2018 Peugeot 5008 112691 PDF

HANDBOOK
PEUGEOT 5008
Access to the Handbook
The Handbook is available on the PEUGEOT website,
in the "Personal space" section or at the following
address:
http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/
Select:
- the language,
- the vehicle, its body style,
From the appropriate Store, download the Scan - the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of 1st
MyPeugeot application for smartphone. registration of your vehicle.
Then select:
- the vehicle, Direct access to the Handbook.
- the print edition appropriate for the date of 1st registration of your
vehicle.
Download the content of the vehicle's Handbook.
This symbol indicates the latest
information available.
Welcome
Thank you for choosing a Peugeot 5008. In this document you will find all of the instructions and
recommendations on use that will allow you to enjoy your vehicle to the
This document presents the information and recommendations required fullest. It is strongly recommended that you familiarise yourself with it
for you to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety. as well as the Warranty and Maintenance Record which will provide you
with information about warranties, servicing and roadside assistance
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in associated with your vehicle.
this document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification
for the country in which it was sold.
Key
The descriptions and illustrations are given as indications only.
Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical Safety warning
specifications, equipment and accessories without having to update this
edition of the guide.
Additional information
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this
Handbook is passed on to the new owner. Contributes to the protection of the environment
Left-hand drive vehicle
Right-hand drive vehicle

Contents
Overview . Ease of use and comfort Lighting and visibility

Instruments and controls 4 Driving position 68 Exterior lighting control stalk 111
Front seats 69 Direction indicators 113
Eco-driving . Steering wheel adjustment
Mirrors 74
74 Headlamp adjustment
Automatic illumination of headlamps
114
114
Second row seats 76 Automatic headlamp dipping 116
Third row seats 79 Cornering lighting 118
Instruments Seat modularity 82 Wiper control stalk 119
i-Cockpit Amplify function 83 Automatic windscreen wipers 121
Head-up digital screen 8
Heating and Ventilation 84
Warning and indicator lamps 11
Manual air conditioning 86
Indicators 29
Semi-automatic mono-zone
Manual test 35 air conditioning 87
Distance recorders 35 Automatic dual-zone air conditioning 89
Lighting dimmer 36 Recirculation of the interior air 92
Ambient lighting 36 Front demist – defrost 93
Trip computer 37 Safety
Heated windscreen 93
Monochrome screen C 38 General safety recommendations 122
Rear screen demist – defrost 94
Touch screen 40 Hazard warning lamps 123
Programmable heating 94
Horn 123
Front fittings 99
Emergency or assistance call 123
Access Courtesy lamps 104
Electronic stability control (ESC) 125
Interior ambient lighting 105
Remote control 46 Advanced Grip Control 128
Rear fittings 106
Keyless Entry and Starting 48 Hill Assist Descent Control 129
Boot fittings 108
Back-up procedures 52 Seat belts 130
Central locking 55 Airbags 134
Anti-intrusion security 56 Child seats 138
Alarm 56 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 139
Doors 58 ISOFIX mountings and child seats 146
Boot 59 i-Size child seats 150
Hands-free tailgate 60 Child lock 153
Electric windows 63
Panoramic opening sunroof 64
2
Contents .
Driving Practical information Technical data
Driving recommendations 155 Fuel 220 Engine technical data and towed loads 267
Anti-theft protection 156 Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 221 Petrol engines and towed loads 268
Starting/Switching off the engine with Compatibility of fuels 222 Diesel engines and towed loads 269
the key 156 Towing device 223 Dimensions 272
Starting/Switching off the engine with Towbar with quickly detachable towball 224 Identification markings 273
Keyless Entry and Starting 158 Load reduction mode 227
Electric parking brake 161 Energy economy mode 227
Manual gearbox 164 Very cold climate screen 228
.
Automatic gearbox 165 Snow chains 228
Hill start assist 169 Fitting roof bars 229 Audio equipment and telematics
Dynamic pack 170 Bonnet 230 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Gear shift indicator 170 Engine compartment 231 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Stop & Start 171 Checking levels 232 Bluetooth audio system
Under-inflation detection 174 Checks 235
Memorising speeds 175 AdBlue ® (BlueHDi engines) 237
.
Recognition of speed limit signs and
recommendation 176 Alphabetical index
Speed limiter 179
Cruise control 181
Adaptive cruise control 184 In the event of a breakdown
Distance Alert and Active Safety Brake 192
Access to additional videos
Warning triangle 240
Fatigue detection system 196 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 240
Lane Departure Warning System 198 Tool kit 241
Active Lane Departure Warning System 198 Temporary puncture repair kit 243
Blind Spot Monitoring System 203 Spare wheel 246
Parking sensors 205 Changing a bulb 252
Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2 207 Changing a wiper blade 257
Park Assist 212 Changing a fuse 257
bit.ly/helpPSA
12 V battery 262
Towing the vehicle 265
3
Overview
Instruments and controls

1. Sunroof and blind controls
2. Front courtesy/map reading lamps
3. Warning lamp display for the seat belts
and front passenger airbag
Emergency and assistance call buttons
4. Rear view mirror
5. Head-up digital screen
6. Horn
Driver front airbag
7. Door mirror and electric window control
panel
8. Monochrome screen with Bluetooth audio
system
or
Touch screen with PEUGEOT Connect
Radio or PEUGEOT Connect Nav
9. Hazard warning lamps
10. Air conditioning system controls
11. 12 V socket/USB socket
Wireless charger
12. Advanced Grip Control
Hill Assist Descent Control
13. Ignition switch
or
"START/STOP" button
14. Gearbox control
"SPORT" button
15. Electric parking brake
16. Front passenger airbag
17. Glove box
Front passenger airbag deactivation switch
4
Overview .
Steering mounted controls Side switch panel Central switch panel
1. External lighting/Direction indicators

control stalk
2. Wiper/Screenwash/Trip computer control 1. Headlamp beam height adjustment wheel
stalk 2. Programmable heating operation
1. Hazard warning lamps switch
3. Audio system setting controls indicator lamp
2. Bluetooth audio system controls
4. Instrument panel display mode selection 3. Hands-free tailgate opening/closing
or
wheel 4. Deactivation of Stop & Start Touch screen controls with PEUGEOT
5. Voice synthesis control 5. Deactivation of the interior volumetric and Connect Radio or PEUGEOT Connect
Volume adjustment anti-tilt monitoring Nav
6. Speed limiter/Cruise control/Adaptive 6. Heated windscreen i-Cockpit Amplify function
cruise control with Stop function controls 7. Electric child lock 3. Manual air conditioning system controls
or
Semi-automatic or automatic air
conditioning system controls
4. Rear screen demist/defrost control
5. Central locking control
6. Heated seats controls
5
Eco-driving
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.
Optimise the use of your Drive smoothly

gearbox
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, Unless it has automatic regulation, switch off
With a manual gearbox, move off gently use engine braking rather than the the air conditioning as soon as the desired
and change up without waiting. During brake pedal, and press the accelerator temperature has been reached.
acceleration change up early. progressively. These practices contribute Switch off the demisting and defrosting
towards a reduction in fuel consumption and controls, if these are not automatically
With an automatic gearbox, give preference CO2 emissions and also help reduce the managed.
to automatic mode and avoid pressing the background traffic noise. Switch off the heated seat as soon as
accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly. possible.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of
the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps
The gear shift indicator invites you to engage
when the traffic is flowing well. when the ambient light level does not require
the most suitable gear: as soon as the
their use.
indication is displayed in the instrument panel,
follow it straight away. Control the use of your electrical Avoid running the engine before moving off,
For vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, equipment particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up
this indicator appears only in manual mode.
much faster while driving.
Before moving off, if the passenger
compartment is too warm, ventilate it by
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your
opening the windows and air vents before
multimedia devices (film, music, video game
using the air conditioning.
etc.), you will contribute towards limiting the
Above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the windows
consumption of electrical energy, and so of
and leave the air vents open.
fuel.
Consider using equipment that can help
Disconnect your portable devices before
keep the temperature in the passenger
leaving the vehicle.
compartment down (sunroof blind and window
blinds, etc.).
6
Eco-driving .
Limit the causes of excess Observe the recommendations

consumption on maintenance
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine
the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, referring to the label in the door aperture, oil, oil filter, air filter, cabin filter, etc.) and
as close as possible to the rear seats. driver's side. observe the schedule of operations in the
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and Carry out this check in particular: manufacturer's service schedule.
reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, - before a long journey,
bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably, use a - at each change of season, With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR
roof box. - after a long period out of use. system is faulty, your vehicle becomes
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. Do not forget the spare wheel and the tyres on polluting. As soon as possible, visit
any trailer or caravan. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
to make your vehicle's level of nitrogen oxides
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and
emissions compliant to the standard.
refit your summer tyres.
When filling the tank, do not continue after the
3rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only

after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres)
that you will see the fuel consumption settle
down to a consistent average.
7
Instruments
6. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm).

Head-up digital screen 7. Engine coolant temperature indicator
Permanent information
Customisable digital instrument panel. Whatever the display mode selected, the
(°Celsius).
Depending on the selected display mode, instrument panel displays:
8. Trip distance recorder (miles or km).
some information may be hidden or shown in - in fixed locations:
9. Total distance recorder (miles or km). • gearbox and gear efficiency indicator
a different way.
information,
Control buttons • the fuel gauge,
• the engine coolant temperature indicator,
A. Lighting dimmer for the instruments and • the distance recorders.
controls* (available in night mode). - in variable locations:
or • the digital speedometer,
Instrument panel ambient lighting**. • status or alert messages displayed
B. Short press: start a manual test. temporarily.
Long press: reset the service indicator or
trip distance recorder (depending on the Optional information
context).
Depending on the display mode selected and
active features, the following information may
Digital screen Displays be displayed:
- the rev counter,
The representation below shows the "DIALS" Most warning and indicator lamps do not have - the trip computer,
display mode. a fixed position. - driving aids,
1. Fuel gauge. The warning and indicator lamps in the second - the speed limiter or cruise control,
line are displayed from right to left in order of - the media currently playing,
2. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h).
priority. - navigation instructions,
3. Gear efficiency indicator.
For certain functions that have indicator lamps - engine information from the Dynamic Pack.
Selector mode and gear with an
for both operation and for deactivation, there is
automatic gearbox.
only one dedicated location.
4. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).
5. Cruise control or speed limiter setting, * Versions with monochrome screen.
display of speed limit signs.
** Versions with touch screen.
8
Instruments
Customisation of the
instrument panel
You can modify the appearance of the
Choice of display mode - "DRIVING": standard display also showing
the current driving aid systems information.
- "MINIMAL": minimal display with digital

1
instrument panel, by choosing: speedometer and the distance recorders
- the instrument panel display colour**, and, in the event of a warning only, the
- a display mode. fuel gauge and the coolant temperature
indicator.
Display language and units
They depend on the configuration of the - "TRIP COMPUTER"* minimal display also
multifunction screen (configuration menu). showing the rev counter, current information
To modify the display mode of the instrument and the trip recorder selected (1 or 2).
When travelling abroad, the speed must
panel: or
be shown in the official units of the
F Turn the wheel located on the left of the - "PERSONAL"**: minimal display also
country you are driving in (km/h, km or
steering wheel to display and scroll through showing the selection made from the touch
mph, miles).
the different modes on the right-hand side screen of the type of information displayed
of the instrument panel. in the customisable areas on the left and
F Once the selected display mode appears, right.
As a safety measure, these adjustments
press on the wheel to validate.
must be carried out with the vehicle
The new display mode is applied instantly.
stationary.
To enter settings for the "PERSONAL"
Each mode corresponds to the type of
display mode and select the information to
information displayed in the instrument panel.
Choosing a display colour - "DIALS": standard display of the analogue
be displayed in the customisable areas of the
instrument panel:
This depends on the ambience activated by the and digital speedometers, the rev counter,
i-Cockpit Amplify function. the fuel gauge, the engine coolant F Select the Settings menu in the
The possible choices are: temperature indicator and the distance upper bar of the touch screen.
F "Relax": grey, recorders.
F "Boost": red, or
F "Normal" (no ambience activated): blue. - "NAVIGATION": standard display also
For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify showing the current navigation information
function, refer to the corresponding section. (map database and navigation instructions).
* Versions with monochrome screen.

** Versions with touch screen. ** Versions with touch screen.
9
Instruments
F Select "Settings".
F Press the "Dashboard

configuration" button.
If the current display mode is "PERSONAL", the
new selection is displayed immediately.
As a safety measure, these adjustments

must be carried out with the vehicle
stationary.
F For each customised display area, left and

right, select a type of information using the
corresponding scroll arrows in the touch
screen:
• "Driving aids",
• "Default" (empty),
• "Engine info" (Dynamic pack),
• "G-metres" (Dynamic pack),
• "Temperatures" (engine oil),
• "Media",
• "Navigation",
• "Trip computer",
• "Rev counter".
F Confirm to save and quit.
10
Instruments
Warning and indicator lamps

When the ignition is
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is
being driven, illumination of one or more of the
Operation indicator lamps
If one or more of the following indicator lamps
come on, this confirms that the corresponding
1
switched on following warning lamps indicates a fault which system has been switched on.
requires action on the part of the driver.
Certain warning lamps come on in the
Any fault resulting in the illumination of
instrument panel for a few seconds when the
a warning lamp must be investigated further
ignition is switched on.
using the associated alert message.
When the engine is started, these same
If you encounter any problems, contact
warning lamps should go off.
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the
information on the warning lamp concerned.
Associated warnings
Most warning lamps in the instrument panel are
accompanied by the display of a message and
an audible signal.
Certain warning lamps may come on in one

of two modes: fixed (continuous) or flashing.
Only by relating the type of illumination
to the operation of the vehicle can it be Deactivation indicator
determined whether the situation is normal lamps
or a fault has occurred. If one of the following indicator lamps comes
For more information, refer to the on, this confirms that the corresponding system
corresponding tables of warning and has been switched off intentionally.
indicator lamps. This may be accompanied by the display of
a message and an audible signal.
11
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Action/Observations
Red warning/indicator lamps

STOP Fixed, associated with Illumination of this warning lamp You must stop the vehicle as soon as traffic and
another warning lamp, is related to a serious fault with safety conditions permit.
accompanied by the the engine, braking system, Park, switch off the ignition and call a PEUGEOT
display of a message and power steering, automatic dealer or a qualified workshop.
an audible signal. gearbox or a major electrical
fault.
Maximum Fixed, accompanied by The temperature of the cooling You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
coolant the STOP warning lamp. system is too high. Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping
temperature up to the required level if necessary.
+ If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Engine oil Fixed. There is a fault with the engine You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
pressure lubrication system. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
12
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp
Battery charge*
State
Fixed.
Cause
The battery charging circuit has

Action/Observations
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is

1
a fault (dirty or loose terminals, started.
slack or cut alternator belt, etc.). If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
The battery charging level requires the vehicle to be
stopped immediately, as soon as road and safety
conditions permit.
If the electric parking brake does not work, immobilise
the vehicle:
F With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
F With an automatic gearbox, put the chocks against
one of the wheels.
Door(s) open Fixed, associated with Speed below 6 mph (10 km/h), a Close the door or boot.
a message identifying door or the boot is not properly
the door. closed.
Fixed, associated with Speed above 6 mph (10 km/h), a

a message identifying door or the boot is not properly
the door, together with an closed.
audible signal.
Seat belts Fixed A seat belt has not been fastened Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.
not fastened/ or or has been unfastened. This warning lamp also lights up in the seat belt
unfastened Flashing, accompanied and front passenger airbag warning lamps display,
by an audible signal. accompanied by the indicator lamps corresponding
to the passenger seat belts being unfastened or not
fastened.
* Depending on the country of sale.

13
Instruments
Electric parking Fixed. The electric parking brake is Release the parking brake to switch off the warning
brake applied. lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal, briefly push the
parking brake control lever.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For more information on the Electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Flashing. The electric parking brake is not You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
applied automatically. Park on level ground (horizontally).
The application/release is faulty. With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
With an automatic gearbox, place the gear selector in
mode P.
Switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
Brakes Fixed. The brake fluid level has dropped You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
significantly. Top up with a fluid approved by PEUGEOT.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by
Fixed, associated with The electronic brake force You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
the ABS warning lamp. distribution (EBFD) system is Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
faulty. workshop.
+
14
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State
Orange warning/indicator lamps

Cause Action/Observations
1
Braking Fixed. A minor fault with the braking Drive carefully.
system. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Anti-lock Fixed. The anti-lock braking system has The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Braking System a fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact
(ABS) a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay.
Dynamic stability Flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is The system optimises traction and improves the
control operating. directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of
(DSC/ASR) grip or trajectory.
Fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
Deactivation of Fixed. The "automatic application" (on Activate the functions again.
the automatic switching off the engine) and For more information on the Electric parking brake,
functions of the "automatic release" functions are refer to the corresponding section.
electric parking deactivated.
brake
15
Instruments
Service Temporarily on, One or more minor faults for Identify the cause of the fault using the message
accompanied by the which there is no specific warning displayed in the instrument panel.
display of a message. lamp have been detected. You can deal with some problems yourself, such
as a door open or the start of saturation of the
particle filter (as soon as the traffic conditions allow,
regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least
37 mph (60 km/h), until the warning lamp goes off).
For any other problems, such as a fault with the tyre
under-inflation detection system, contact a PEUGEOT
Fixed, accompanied by One or more major faults for Identify the cause of the fault using the message
the display of a message. which there is no specific warning displayed in the instrument panel; you must then
lamp have been detected. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Fixed, associated with The servicing interval has been Only on BlueHDi Diesel versions.
the flashing and then exceeded. Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
fixed display of the
service spanner.
Distance Alert/ Flashing. The system is operating. The system brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed of
Active Safety collision with the vehicle ahead.
Brake
Fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
by a message and an a qualified workshop.
audible signal.
16
Instruments
Distance Alert/
State
Fixed, accompanied by
Cause
The system has been

Action/Observations
For more information on the Distance Alert/Active

1
Active Safety a message. deactivated, via the vehicle Safety Brake system, refer to the corresponding
Brake configuration menu. section.
Lane Departure Flashing, accompanied A lane marking has been crossed Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction to
Warning System by an audible signal. on the left or right. return to the correct trajectory.
For more information on the Lane Departure
Warning System, refer to the corresponding section.
Fixed, accompanied by The system has a fault. Be vigilant and drive carefully.
the display of a message. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
Active Lane Fixed. The system has been automatically For more information on the Active Lane Departure
Departure deactivated or placed on standby. Warning System, refer to the corresponding section.
Warning System
Flashing. You are about to cross a broken The system is activated, then corrects the trajectory
lane marking without operating on the side of the lane marking detected.
the direction indicators.
+
Fixed, accompanied by The system has a fault. Be vigilant and drive carefully.
the display of a message, Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
an audible signal and the a qualified workshop.
Service warning lamp. For more information on the Active Lane Departure
Warning System, refer to the corresponding section.
Under-inflation Fixed. The pressure in one or more Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
tyres is too low. This check should preferably be carried out when the
tyres are cold.
You must reinitialise the system after adjusting one or
more tyre pressures and after changing one or more
wheels.
For more information on Under-inflation detection,
17
Instruments
Flashing then fixed, The tyre pressure monitoring Under-inflation detection is no longer assured.
accompanied by the system is faulty. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
Service warning lamp. a qualified workshop.
+
Airbags Temporarily on. This warning lamp comes on for This warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
a few seconds when you turn on If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
the ignition, then goes off. a qualified workshop.
Fixed. Either the airbag or the Have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
pyrotechnic seat belt pretensioner a qualified workshop.
system has a fault.
Front passenger Fixed, in the seat belt The control switch, located in Set the control to the "ON" position to activate the
airbag and front passenger the glove box, is set to the "OFF" front passenger airbag. In this case, do not install
airbag warning lamps position. a rearward facing child seat on this seat.
display. The front passenger airbag is
deactivated.
You can install a rearward facing
child seat, unless there is a fault
with the airbags (airbag warning
lamp on).
18
Instruments
Front passenger
State
Fixed, in the seat belt

Cause
The control switch, located in the

Action/Observations
In this case, do not install a rearward facing child seat

1
airbag and front passenger glove box, has been placed in the on this seat.
airbag warning lamps ON position. Move the control switch to the OFF position to
display. The front passenger airbag is deactivate the front passenger airbag. In this case,
activated. you may install a rearward facing child seat, unless
there is a fault with the airbags (airbag warning lamp
on).
Low fuel level Fixed, with reserve level When it first comes on there You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running
shown in red, with the remains approximately 6 litres out of fuel.
display of a message and of fuel in the tank. This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition
an audible signal. is switched on, accompanied by a message and an
audible signal, until a sufficient addition of fuel is
made.
This audible signal and message are repeated with
increasing frequency as the fuel level drops and
approaches "0".
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 56 litres.
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel as
this could damage the emission control and injection
systems.
Engine Flashing. The engine management system There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be
diagnostic has a fault. destroyed.
system Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Fixed. The emission control system has The warning lamp should go off when the engine is
a fault. started.
If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop without delay.
19
Instruments
AdBlue ® Fixed, on switching on The remaining driving range Top up the AdBlue ® as soon as possible, or go
(with 1.6 BlueHDi and the ignition, accompanied is between 375 and 1,500 to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
2.0 BlueHDi 150 S&S by an audible signal and miles (600 and 2,400 km).
+ engines) a message indicating the
remaining driving range.
Flashing, accompanied The remaining driving You must top up the AdBlue ® to avoid
by an audible signal and range is less than 375 miles a breakdown or go to a PEUGEOT dealer or
a message indicating the (600 km). a qualified workshop.
Flashing, accompanied The AdBlue ® tank is empty: To be able to restart the engine, you must top
by an audible signal and the starting prevention up the AdBlue ® or go to a PEUGEOT dealer or
a message indicating that system required by a qualified workshop.
starting is prevented. regulations prevents the It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue ®
engine from restarting. to its tank.
20
Instruments
AdBlue ®
State
Switched on for around

Cause
The remaining driving range

Action/Observations
Top up the AdBlue ®.

1
(with 1.5 BlueHDi 130 S&S 30 seconds when switching is between 500 and 1,500 You can add up to 10 litres of AdBlue ® to its
and 2.0 BlueHDi 180 S&S on the ignition, accompanied miles (800 and 2,400 km). tank.
engines) by a message indicating the
Fixed, on switching on The remaining driving range Top up the AdBlue ® as soon as possible.
the ignition, accompanied is between 60 and 500 miles You can add up to 10 litres of AdBlue ® to its
by an audible signal and (100 and 800 km). tank.
a message indicating the
Flashing, accompanied The remaining driving You must top up AdBlue ® to avoid
by an audible signal and range is less than 60 miles a breakdown.
a message indicating the (100 km). You can add up to 10 litres of AdBlue ® to its
remaining driving range. tank.
Flashing, accompanied The AdBlue ® tank is empty: To be able to restart the engine, you must top
by an audible signal and the starting prevention up the AdBlue ®.
a message indicating that system required by It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue ®
starting is prevented. legislation prevents starting to its tank.
of the engine.
21
Instruments
SCR emissions Fixed, on switching on the A fault with the SCR emissions This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions
control system ignition, associated with control system has been return to normal levels.
(BlueHDi Diesel) the Service and engine detected.
+
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied by
an audible signal and
a message.
+
Flashing, on switching After confirmation of the fault with Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
on the ignition, the emissions control system, without delay, to avoid a breakdown.
associated with the you can drive for up to 685 miles
Service and engine (1,100 km) before the engine
diagnostic warning starting prevention system is
lamps, accompanied by triggered.
a message indicating the
Flashing, on switching You have exceeded the To be able to restart the engine, you must call on
on the ignition, authorised driving limit following a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
associated with the confirmation of a fault with the
Service and engine emissions control system: the
diagnostic warning engine starting prevention system
lamps, accompanied by prevents starting of the engine.
a message.
For topping up or for more information on the AdBlue ® (BlueHDi engines), refer to the corresponding section.
22
Instruments
Diesel engine
State
Fixed.
Cause
When the ignition is switched on

Action/Observations
The period of illumination of the indicator lamp is

1
pre-heating with a key in the ignition switch determined by the climatic conditions (up to about
or a starting instruction is made thirty seconds in severe winter conditions).
using the "START/STOP" button, With a key in the ignition switch, wait until the indicator
the engine temperature makes lamp goes off before starting.
engine pre-heating necessary. With Keyless Entry and Starting, once it goes off,
starting is immediate, on the condition that the brake
pedal remains pressed with an automatic gearbox.
With Keyless Entry and Starting, once it goes off,
starting is immediate, on the condition that the clutch
pedal remains pressed with a manual gearbox.
If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and
then on, wait until the indicator lamp goes off again,
then start the engine.
Stop & Start Fixed, accompanied by The Stop & Start system is The engine will not switch off at the next traffic stop.
the display of a message. deactivated. Reactivate the system by pressing the button again.
For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the
corresponding section.
Rear foglamps Fixed. The rear foglamps have been Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearwards to
switched on using the ring on the switch off the rear foglamps.
lighting control stalk.
23
Instruments
Green warning/indicator lamps

Hill Assist Fixed. The function has been activated, but is Between 19 and 31 mph (30 and 50 km/h), the system is paused.
Descent Control paused because the speed is too high. Reduce the speed of the vehicle.
Fixed. The function has been activated, but

the conditions for regulation are not met
(gradient, gear engaged).
Flashing. The function is regulating the speed of the The vehicle is being braked; the brake lamps come
vehicle. on during the descent.
For more information on the Hill Assist Descent
Control function, refer to the corresponding section.
Stop & Start Fixed. When the vehicle stops (red lights, traffic The lamp goes off and the engine restarts
jams, etc.) the Stop & Start system puts the automatically in START mode, as soon as you
engine into STOP mode. want to move off.
Flashing for a few STOP mode is temporarily unavailable. For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the
seconds, then or corresponding section.
goes off. START mode is invoked automatically.
Blind Spot Fixed. The function has been activated. For more information on the Blind Spot
Monitoring Monitoring System, refer to the corresponding
System section.
Park Assist Fixed. The function has been activated. For more information on the Park Assist, refer to
the corresponding section.
Automatic Fixed. The wiper control stalk has been pushed To deactivate automatic wiping, push the wiper
wiping down. control stalk down again or put the wiper control
Automatic front wiping is activated. stalk in another position.
24
Instruments
Front foglamps
State
Fixed.
Cause
The front foglamps have been

Action/Observations
Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk once

1
switched on using the ring on the rearwards to switch off the foglamps.
lighting control stalk.
Left-hand Flashing with audible The lighting control stalk has

direction indicator signal. been moved down.
Right-hand Flashing with audible The lighting control stalk has

direction indicator signal. been moved up.
Hazard warning Flashing with audible The hazard warning lamps The left-hand and right-hand direction indicators and
lamps signal. switch, located on the dashboard, their associated indicator lamps flash simultaneously.
has been operated.
Sidelamps Fixed. The lighting control stalk is in the

"Sidelamps" position.
Dipped beam Fixed. The lighting control stalk is in

headlamps the "Dipped beam headlamps"
position or in the "AUTO"
position in conditions of low light.
25
Instruments
Automatic Fixed. The function has been activated The camera, placed at the top of the windscreen,
headlamp via the Vehicle/Driving menu of manages the main beam headlamps or dipped beam
dipping the touch screen. headlamps operation, according to the outside lighting
+
The lighting control stalk is in the and the driving conditions.
"AUTO" position. For more information on Automatic headlamp
dipping, refer to the corresponding section.
or
Blue warning/indicator lamps

Main beam Fixed. The lighting control stalk has Pull the lighting control stalk to return to dipped beam
headlamps been pulled towards you. headlamps.
For more information on the Lighting control stalk, refer to the corresponding section.
26
Instruments
Electric parking brake Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified

workshop as soon as possible. 1
Warning/
State Cause Action/Observations
indicator lamp
It lights up, Automatic release is not If you attempt an automatic release, a help message is displayed upon
accompanied by the available. acceleration while the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use
display of the message manual release.
"Parking brake fault".
They light up, Emergency braking does not If automatic release is not available, a help message is displayed upon
accompanied by the have full power. acceleration while the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use
+ display of the message manual release.
"Parking brake fault".
They light up, Automatic application is not The electric parking brake control lever must be used.
accompanied by the available. The electric parking brake can only be used manually.
+ display of the message If automatic release is also not available, a help message is displayed
"Parking brake fault". upon acceleration while the parking brake is applied, prompting you to
use manual release.
They light up, You can no longer immobilise If manual application and release are not working, the electric parking
accompanied by the the vehicle with the engine brake control lever is faulty.
+ display of the message running. The automatic functions must be used at all times: they are automatically
"Parking brake fault". reactivated in the event of failure of the control lever.
27
Instruments
Warning/
State Cause Action/Observations
indicator lamp
They light up, The parking brake is faulty: When stationary, to immobilise your vehicle:
accompanied by the manual and automatic F Pull and hold the control lever for approximately 7 to 15 seconds, until
+ display of the message functions may not be working. the warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel.
"Parking brake fault". If this procedure does not work, you should secure your vehicle as
follows:
+ F Park on a level surface.
F With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
F With an automatic gearbox, select mode P, then put the supplied
chocks against one of the wheels.
Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
They light up, The parking brake does not You should secure your vehicle as follows:
accompanied by the have the optimum performance F Park on a level surface.
+ display of the message to park the vehicle in complete F With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
"Parking brake fault". safety in every situation. F With an automatic gearbox, select mode P, then put the supplied
chocks against one of the wheels.
+ Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
For more information on the use of the Electric parking brake, refer to the corresponding section.
28
Instruments
Indicators
Service indicator
1
Service spanner Fixed, temporary when There are between 620 miles The service indicator is displayed for a few seconds on
the ignition is switched (1,000 km) and 1,900 miles the instrument panel. Depending on version:
on. (3,000 km) before the next - the distance recorder display line indicates the
service is due. distance remaining (in kilometres or miles) before
the next service is due.
- an alert indicates the distance remaining (in
kilometres or miles) as well as the period before
the next service is due.
The service spanner goes off after a few seconds.
The alert may be triggered close to the due date.
Fixed, when the Less than 620 miles (1,000 km) The service indicator is displayed for a few seconds on
ignition is switched on. remain before the next service the instrument panel. Depending on version:
is due. - the distance recorder display line indicates the
distance remaining before the next service is due.
- an alert message indicates the distance remaining
as well as the period before the next service is due.
The service spanner remains on to show that a service
is required very soon.
The alert may be triggered close to the due date.
29
Instruments
Service spanner Flashing then fixed, The servicing interval has been The service indicator is displayed for a few seconds on
when the ignition is exceeded. the instrument panel. Depending on version:
switched on. - the distance recorder display line indicates the
distance travelled since the service was due. The
value is preceded by the "-" sign.
- an alert message indicates that the due date has
passed.
The service spanner remains on until the service has
been performed.
The alert is triggered when the due date has passed.
Flashing then fixed, Service date passed for BlueHDi The service indicator is displayed for a few seconds
when the ignition Diesel versions. on the instrument panel. Depending on version:
is switched on, - the distance recorder display line indicates the
+ associated with the distance travelled since the service was due. The
Service warning value is preceded by the "-" sign.
lamp. - an alert message indicates that the due date has
passed.
The service spanner remains on until the service has
been performed.
The alert is triggered when the due date has passed.
The distance indicated (in miles or kilometres) is calculated according to the distance covered and the time elapsed since the last service.
30
Instruments
Resetting the service indicator

The service indicator must be reset after each
service.
Retrieving the service
information
You can access the service information at any
1
If you have carried out the service on your time.
vehicle yourself:
F switch off the ignition,
The level read will only be correct if the

vehicle is on level ground and the engine
has been off for more than 30 minutes.
F Press the trip distance recorder reset

button. Oil level correct
The service information is displayed for
F press and hold the trip distance recorder a few seconds, then disappears.
reset button,
F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown, Engine oil level indicator
F release the button when "=0" is displayed; (Depending on version.) Oil level incorrect
the spanner disappears.
On versions fitted with an electric oil level
indicator, the state of the engine oil level is
If you have to disconnect the battery displayed in the instrument panel for a few
following this operation, lock the vehicle seconds, after the servicing information. This is indicated by the display of the message
and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to "Oil level incorrect" in the instrument panel
be registered. screen, accompanied by the Service warning
lamp and an audible signal.
31
Instruments
If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using Engine coolant temperature For more information on Checking levels,
the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
avoid damage to the engine.
gauge refer to the corresponding section.
For more information on Checking levels,
AdBlue® range indicators

These range indicators are present only on
Oil level indicator fault
BlueHDi Diesel versions.
Once the AdBlue ® tank is on reserve or after
detection of a fault with the SCR emissions
control system, when the ignition is switched
on, an indicator displays an estimate of the
This is signalled by the display of the message distance that can be covered, (the range)
"Oil level measurement invalid" in the before engine starting is prevented.
instrument panel. With the engine running:
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified - in zone A, the temperature is correct,
workshop. - in zone B, the temperature is too high; this
warning lamp and the central STOP warning In the event of the risk of non-
In the event of a fault with the electric lamp come on in the instrument panel, starting related to a lack of
indicator, the oil level is no longer accompanied by the display of a message AdBlue®
monitored. and an audible signal.
If the system is faulty, you must check the The engine starting prevention system
engine oil level using the manual dipstick You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do
required by regulations is activated
located under the bonnet. so.
automatically once the AdBlue ® tank is
For more information on Checking levels, Wait a few minutes before switching off the
empty.
refer to the corresponding section. engine.
After first switching off the ignition, open Range greater than 1,500 miles (2,400 km)
the bonnet cautiously and check the When switching on the ignition, there is no
coolant level. automatic display of range in the instrument
panel.
32
Instruments
Remaining range between 500 and 60 miles

(800 and 100 km)
(with 1.5 BlueHDi 130 S&S and 2.0 BlueHDi
180 S&S engines)
1
When switching on the ignition, this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible
signal (1 beep) and the display of a message
(e.g. "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible
in x miles") indicating the remaining range
Pressing this button temporarily These messages are accompanied by the expressed in miles or kilometres.
displays the driving range. recommendation not to top up with more than When driving, the audible signal and the
10 litres of AdBlue. message display are triggered every 60 miles
(100 km) until the level is topped up.
Remaining range between 1,500 and Remaining range between 1,500 and
It is essential to top up as soon as possible and
500 miles (2,400 and 800 km) 375 miles (2,400 and 600 km)
before the tank is completely empty; otherwise
(with 1.5 BlueHDi 130 S&S and 2.0 BlueHDi (with 1.6 BlueHDi 100 S&S, 1.6 BlueHDi
it will not be possible to restart the engine after
180 S&S engines) 115 S&S, 1.6 BlueHDi 120 S&S and
the next stop.
2.0 BlueHDi 150 S&S engines)
Remaining range less than 375 miles
(600 km)
When switching on the ignition, this warning (with 1.6 BlueHDi 100 S&S, 1.6 BlueHDi
lamp comes on for about 30 seconds,
lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible 115 S&S, 1.6 BlueHDi 120 S&S and
accompanied by an audible signal and the
signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top 2.0 BlueHDi 150 S&S engines)
display of a message (e.g. "Top up AdBlue:
Starting impossible in x miles") indicating up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles")
the remaining range expressed in miles or indicating the remaining range expressed in
kilometres. miles or kilometres.
When driving, the message comes up every When switching on the ignition, this warning
The reserve level has been reached; it is
185 miles (300 km) until the tank is topped up. lamp flashes, accompanied by the permanent
recommended that you top up as soon as
The reserve level has been reached; it is lighting of the Service warning lamp, an audible
possible.
recommended that you top up as soon as signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top
possible. up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles")
indicating the remaining range expressed in
miles or kilometres.
33
Instruments
When driving, this message is displayed every Breakdown due to a lack of AdBlue ® In the event of a fault with the
30 seconds until the AdBlue level has been SCR emissions control system
topped up.
It is essential to top up as soon as possible and
before the tank is completely empty; otherwise
it will not be possible to restart the engine after A system that prevents engine starting is
the next stop. activated automatically from 685 miles
(1,100 km) after confirmation of a fault with
Remaining range less than 60 miles the SCR emissions control system.
(100 km) Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
(with 1.5 BlueHDi 130 S&S and 2.0 BlueHDi dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as
180 S&S engines) possible.

When switching on the ignition, this warning In the event of the detection of a fault
lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible
signal (1 beep) and the display of a message lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible
(e.g. "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible signal and the display of the message "Top up
in x miles") indicating the remaining range AdBlue: Starting impossible".
expressed in miles or kilometres. These warning lamps come on, accompanied
The AdBlue ® tank is empty: the starting
by an audible signal and the display of the
When driving, the audible signal and the prevention system required by legislation
"Emissions fault" message.
message display are triggered every 6 miles prevents starting of the engine.
The alert is triggered while driving as soon
(10 km) until the AdBlue tank is topped up. as the fault is detected for the first time, then
It is essential to top up as soon as possible and To be able to restart the engine, it is when switching on the ignition for subsequent
before the tank is completely empty; otherwise essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue ® journeys, while the fault persists.
it will not be possible to restart the engine after to its tank.
the next stop.
If it is a temporary fault, the alert
For more information on AdBlue ® disappears during the next journey,
(BlueHDi engines), and, in particular, after self-diagnostic checks of the SCR
on topping up, refer to the corresponding emissions control system.
section.
34
Instruments
During the permitted driving phase

(between 685 and 0 miles (1,100 and 0 km))
F With the engine running, briefly press this
button.
The following information is displayed in the
instrument panel:
1
- the engine oil level,
If a fault with the SCR emissions control system - when the next service is due,
is confirmed (after 31 miles (50 km) covered - the driving range for the AdBlue and the
with the permanent display of the message SCR system for BlueHDi Diesel versions,
signalling a fault), these warning lamps come - current alerts.
on and the AdBlue warning lamp flashes,
associated with an audible signal and the
display of a message (e.g. "Emissions fault: You have exceeded the authorised driving This information is also displayed
Starting prevented in 200 miles") indicating limit: the starting prevention system does automatically every time the ignition is
the remaining range expressed in miles or not allow the engine to be started. switched on.
kilometres.
While driving, the message is displayed every To be able to restart the engine, you must call
30 seconds while the fault with the SCR on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Distance recorders
emissions control system persists.
The total and trip distances are displayed for
The alert is repeated when switching on the
ignition. Manual test in the thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
You should contact a PEUGEOT dealer or instrument panel when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
a qualified workshop as soon as possible. This function allows you, at any time, to check
Otherwise you will not be able to restart the certain indicators and display the alerts log.
vehicle.
Starting prevented When travelling abroad, you may have to
change the distance unit: the display of
road speed must be in the official units
(miles or km) for the country.
Each time the ignition is switched on, these The change of units is done via the screen
warning lamps come on and the AdBlue configuration menu, with the vehicle
warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an stationary.
audible signal and the display of the message
"Emissions fault: Starting prevented".
35
Instruments
Total distance recorder Instrument panel lighting Instrument panel ambient

It measures the total distance travelled by the dimmer lighting
vehicle since its first registration. Version with monochrome Version with touch screen
screen
It allows the instrument panel ambient lighting
Only works when the vehicle lighting is on
to be switched on or off.
("night" mode).
It allows the brightness of the instruments and
F Press this button.
controls to be adjusted.
F Press this button to adjust the
brightness.
F When the lighting reaches the The brightness of the instrument panel ambient
minimum setting, release the
Trip recorder lighting is adjusted in the touch screen.
button, then press it again to
It measures the distance travelled since it was increase brightness.
reset by the driver. F Select the Settings menu in the
or upper bar of the touch screen.
F When the lighting reaches the maximum
setting, release the button, then press it or
again to decrease brightness.
F Release the button once the desired level of
brightness is reached.
F Press the "Brightness" button.
Resetting the trip recorder

F With the ignition on, press the button until
zeroes appear.
36
Instruments
Trip computer data is displayed permanently

when you select the display mode "TRIP
COMPUTER" or "PERSONAL", depending on
the version.
- Trip "2" with:
• average speed,
• average fuel consumption,
• distance travelled,
1
In all other display modes, pressing the end of for the second trip.
the wiper control stalk will cause this data to
appear temporarily in a specific window.
Resetting the trip recorder
F Adjust the brightness by pressing the

arrows or moving the cursor.
F Confirm to save and quit.
Trip computer
Information displayed about the current journey
(range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.).
F Press this button, located on the end of the
wiper control stalk, to display the different
Display of data on the F When the desired trip is displayed, press
tabs in turn. the button on the end of the wiper control
instrument panel
stalk for more than two seconds.
- Current information with: Trips "1" and "2" are independent and are used
• range, identically.
• current fuel consumption, Trip "1" allows daily calculations to be carried
• Stop & Start time counter. out, for example, and trip "2" allows monthly
- Trip "1" with: calculations.
• average speed,
• average fuel consumption,
• distance travelled,
for the first trip.
37
Instruments
A few definitions… If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time
This function is only displayed from
counter calculates the time spent in STOP
19 mph (30 km/h).
Range mode during a journey.
It resets to zero every time the ignition is
(miles or km)
switched on.
The distance which can still be Average fuel consumption
travelled with the fuel remaining
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Monochrome screen C
in the tank (at the average fuel
consumption seen over the last few Calculated since the last trip
Displays
miles (kilometres) travelled). computer reset.
This value may vary following a change in

the style of driving or the terrain, resulting Average speed
in a significant change in the current fuel (mph or km/h)
consumption.
Calculated since the last trip
When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km), computer reset.
dashes are displayed.
After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the
range is recalculated and is displayed if it
exceeds 62 miles (100 km).
Distance travelled Depending on the context, it displays:
(miles or km) - time,
If dashes are displayed continuously - date,
Calculated since the last trip
while driving in place of the digits, contact - exterior temperature (this flashes if there is
computer reset.
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. a risk of ice),
- visual parking sensor information,
- audio source being listened to,
Current fuel consumption - telephone or hands-free kit information,
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) Stop & Start time counter - settings menus for the screen and the
vehicle equipment.
(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)
Calculated over the last few
seconds.
38
Instruments
Controls "Multimedia" menu

With the audio system switched on,
this menu allows you to activate or
For more information on the "Connections"
application, refer to the "Audio equipment and
telematics" section.
1
deactivate the functions associated
with use of the radio (Frequency "Personalisation-
From the audio system control panel, press: search (RDS), DAB/FM auto configuration" menu
F the "MENU" button to access the main tracking, Radio Text (TXT) display)
menu, This menu gives access to the
or to choose the media play mode
F the "5" or "6" buttons to scroll through the (Normal, Random, Random all,
following functions:
items in the screen, - "Define the vehicle parameters",
Repeat).
F the "7" or "8" buttons to change a setting - "Choice of language",
value, For more information on the "Multimedia" - "Display configuration".
F the "OK" button to confirm, application, refer to the "Audio equipment and
or telematics" section.
F the "Back" button to abandon the operation Define the vehicle parameters
in progress. "Telephone" menu This menu allows the activation or deactivation
With the audio system switched on, of the following equipment, depending on
Main menu this menu allows you to make a call, version:
view the calls log or the various - "Access to the vehicle":
telephone directories. • "Remote control action".
For more information on the Remote control
For more information on the "Telephone"
and driver door selective unlocking in
application, refer to the "Audio equipment and
particular, refer to the "Access" section.
- "Comfort":
• "Rear wipe in reverse gear".
F Press the MENU button: For more information on the Wipers,
- "Multimedia",
"Connections" menu
refer to the "Lighting and visibility"
- "Telephone", With the audio system on, this section.
- "Connections", menu allows a Bluetooth device • "Parking sensors".
- "Personalisation-configuration". (telephone, media player) to be For more information on the Parking
F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the paired and the connection mode sensors, refer to the "Driving" section.
menu required, then confirm by pressing the to be defined (hands-free, playing
"OK" button. audio files).
39
Instruments
• "Fatigue Detection System". Adjusting the date and time This system gives access to:
For more information on the Fatigue F Press the "7" or "8" button to display the - the permanent display of the time and
detection system, refer to the "Driving" "Display configuration" menu, then press the exterior temperature (a blue symbol
section. OK. appears when there is a risk of ice),
- "Driving assistance": F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the - the heating/air conditioning controls,
• "Auto. emergency braking". "Date and time adjustment" button, then - menus for adjusting settings for vehicle
For more information on the Active press OK. functions and systems,
Safety Brake, refer to the "Driving" F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the - audio system and telephone controls and
section. setting to modify. Confirm by pressing OK, the display of associated information,
• "Speed recommendation". then modify the setting and confirm again to - the display of visual parking aids (visual
For more information on Speed limit save the modification. parking sensor information, Park Assist,
recognition, refer to the "Driving" F Adjust the settings one by one, confirming etc.),
section. with the OK button. - Internet services and the display of
• "Tyre inflation". F Press the "5" or "6" button, then the OK associated information.
For more information on Under- button to select the OK box and confirm or and, depending on equipment, allows:
inflation detection and reinitialisation in the Back button to cancel. - access to the navigation system controls
particular, refer to the "Driving" section. and the display of associated information.
Choice of language General operation

As a safety measure, the driver must only
This menu allows selection of the language
carry out operations that require sustained Recommendations
used by the screen and the instrument panel.
attention with the vehicle stationary.
This screen is of the capacitive type.
Display configuration Use is possible in all temperatures.
This menu gives access to the following Do not use pointed objects on the touch
settings:
- "Choice of units",
Touch screen screen.
Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands.
- "Date and time adjustment", Use a soft clean cloth to clean the touch
- "Display parameters", As a safety measure, the driver must
screen.
- "Brightness". only carry out operations that require
sustained attention with the vehicle
stationary.
Some functions are not accessible when
driving.
40
Instruments
Principles
Use the buttons below the touch screen for
access to the menus, then press the virtual
Menus For more information on Semi-automatic
mono-zone air conditioning and Automatic
dual-zone air conditioning, refer to the
corresponding sections.
1
buttons in the touch screen.
Some menus may display across two pages: Connected Navigation or Mirror
press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Screen*.
second page. See the "Audio equipment and
After a few moments with no action on the Vehicle or Driving*.
second page, the first page is displayed Allows the activation, deactivation
automatically. and adjustment of settings for
certain functions.
To deactivate or activate a function, select The functions accessible from this menu are
"OFF" or "ON". arranged under two tabs: "Vehicle settings"
and "Driving functions".
Use this button to adjust the settings
for a function. Telephone.
i-Cockpit Amplify function.
See the "Audio equipment and
Use this button for access to Allows a driving ambience to be
additional information on the personalised.
Applications.
function.
Allows direct access to certain
Use this button to confirm. For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify
i-Cockpit Amplify functions
function, refer to the corresponding section.
(scented air freshener, etc.).
Use this button to return to the
previous page. For more information on the Scented air
Radio Media.
freshener, refer to the corresponding section.
For the other functions, refer to the "Audio
equipment and telematics" section.
Air conditioning.
Allows control of the settings for * Depending on equipment.
temperature, air flow, etc.
41
Instruments
You can also press with three fingers Families Functions

on the touch screen to display the menu
carousel. - "Directional headlamps": activation/deactivation of cornering lighting.
Volume adjustment/mute. "Driving lighting"

- "Remote control action: Unlock driver's door": activation/deactivation of
selective unlocking of the driver's door.
Upper bar - "Unlock boot only": activation/deactivation of selective unlocking at the
"Vehicle access" tailgate.
Certain information is always displayed in the
upper bar of the touch screen: - "Motorised tailgate": activation/deactivation of motorised operation of
- Time and exterior temperature (a blue the tailgate.
warning lamp appears when there is a risk - "Hands-Free Tailgate Access": activation/deactivation of the hands-free
of ice). tailgate access system.
- Repeat of the air conditioning information,
- "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the rear wiper on with
and direct access to the corresponding
reverse gear.
menu.
- "Mirror adaptation in reverse": activation/deactivation of the automatic
- Summary of information from the Radio "Comfort lighting" door mirror tilt when engaging reverse gear.
Media, Telephone menus and navigation
- "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of automatic guide-
instructions*.
me-home lighting.
- Notifications.
- "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior welcome lighting.
- Access to the Settings for the touch screen
- "Ambient lighting": activation/deactivation of ambient lighting and
and the digital instrument panel (date/time,
adjustment of brightness.
languages, units, etc.).
* Depending on equipment
- "Distance alert": activation/deactivation of the distance alert and

Vehicle/Driving menu automatic emergency braking.
- "Recommended speed display": activation/deactivation of speed limit
"Vehicle settings" tab "Safety" sign recognition.
- "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of the driver fatigue
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
detection system.
42
Instruments
PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Families Functions
For more information on one of these
functions, refer to the corresponding
section.
1
- "Directional headlamps": activation/deactivation of cornering lighting.
- "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of automatic guide-
me-home lighting.
"Headlamps" - "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior welcome lighting.
- "Unlock driver's door": activation/deactivation of selective unlocking of

the driver's door.
- "Unlock boot only": activation/deactivation of selective unlocking at the
"Vehicle access" tailgate.
- "Motorised tailgate": activation/deactivation of motorised operation of
the tailgate.
- "Hands-Free Tailgate Access": activation/deactivation of the hands-free
tailgate access system.
- "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the rear wiper on with

reverse gear.
- "Mirror adaptation in reverse": activation/deactivation of the automatic
"Comfort" door mirror tilt when engaging reverse gear.
- "Ambient lighting": activation/deactivation of ambient lighting and
adjustment of brightness.
- "Distance alert": activation/deactivation of the distance alert and

automatic emergency braking.
- "Recommended speed display": activation/deactivation of speed limit
"Safety" sign recognition.
- "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of the driver fatigue
detection system.
43
Instruments
"Driving functions" tab For more information on one of these

functions, refer to the corresponding
section.
Function Comment
"Adjusting Speeds" Memorisation of speed settings for the speed limiter or

programmable cruise control.
Settings
"Under-inflation initialisation" Reinitialisation of the under-inflation detection system. PEUGEOT Connect Nav
The functions available through the
"Lane departure warning system" Activation/deactivation of the function. upper menu bar are detailed in the
table below.
"Lane assist" Activation/deactivation of the function.
Button Comments
"Parking sensors" Activation/deactivation of the function.
Selection of a topic.
"Park Assist" Activation/deactivation of the function.
"Automatic headlamp dip" Activation/deactivation of the function.

Audio settings (sound ambience,
distribution, level, voice volume,
"Stop & Start" Activation/deactivation of the function.
ringer volume).
"Blind spot sensors" Activation/deactivation of the function.
Switch off the screen.

"Panoramic visual aid" Activation of the Visiopark 2 function.
"Traction control" Activation/deactivation of the function.

Settings for the touch screen and
the digital instrument panel.
44
Instruments
Settings for the touch screen and the digital

instrument panel
The functions available through the
upper menu bar are detailed in the
Settings for the touch screen and the digital
instrument panel
1
Button Comments Button Comments
table below.
Choice of units: Adjustment of the display
- temperature (°Celsius or parameters (text scrolling,
°Fahrenheit), Button Comments animations, etc.) and brightness.
- distances and fuel consumption
Turn off the screen (black
(l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
screen).
To return to the current screen, Choice of units:
Choice of display language on press the black screen or one of - temperature (°Celsius or
the touch screen and digital the menu buttons. °Fahrenheit),
instrument panel. - distances and fuel consumption
Adjustment of the brightness of
(l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
the instrument panel ambient
Setting the date and time. lighting.
Option of synchronisation with
Choice of display language on
GPS.
Choice and settings for three the touch screen and digital
user profiles. instrument panel.
Adjustment of the display
parameters (text scrolling,
Setting the date and time.
animations, etc.) and brightness. Settings for the touch screen and
Choice and settings for three Choice of the type of information

Activation and configuration of
user profiles. displayed in the digital instrument
the settings for the Wi-Fi.
panel.
Choice of the type of information

displayed in the digital instrument
panel.
45
Access
Remote control
General information
The key, integral with the remote control, can

be used for the following functions, depending
on version:
- unlocking/locking/deadlocking the vehicle,
- turning the mechanical child lock on or off,
- activating/deactivating the front passenger
airbag, Version with K eyless Entry and Starting
- back-up door locking, F Pull on this button to remove the key from
The remote control can be used for the
- switching on the ignition and starting/ the housing.
following functions, depending on version:
switching off the engine. To return it to the housing, first pull on this
- unlocking/locking/deadlocking the vehicle,
button.
- unlocking – opening/closing the boot,
- turning the lighting on, Ejecting the key
- folding/unfolding the door mirrors, Unlocking the vehicle
- activating/deactivating the alarm,
- opening the windows, Complete unlocking
- closing the windows and the sunroof,
F Press this button.
- locating the vehicle,
- vehicle immobiliser.
Selective unlocking
Driver's door and fuel flap
The setting is done in the vehicle configuration
Version without K eyless Entry and Starting menu.
F Press this button; the key is ejected from its F Press this button.
housing. F To unlock the other doors and
To avoid damaging the mechanism, first press the boot, press this button again.
this button to fold it.
46
Access
On the first press of the unlocking button,

An access that is not properly closed Deadlocking renders the interior door
flashing of the direction indicators for a few
(door or tailgate) prevents locking of the controls inoperative.
seconds signals:
2
vehicle. However, if your vehicle has an It also deactivates the interior central
- complete or selective unlocking of the
alarm, this will be fully activated after locking button on the dashboard.
vehicle for versions without an alarm,
about 45 seconds. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the
- deactivation of the alarm for other versions.
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently vehicle when it is deadlocked.
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.
and there is then no action on the doors
or boot, the vehicle will automatically lock
itself again after about 30 seconds. If the
alarm was previously activated, it will be
Opening the windows reactivated automatically.
Closing the windows and sunroof
Depending on version, pressing and
holding the unlocking buttons opens Maintaining pressure on the locking
the windows to the desired position. button allows the windows and,
The automatic folding and unfolding of the depending on version, the sunroof to
The windows stop when you release door mirrors with the remote control can
the button. be closed to the desired position.
be deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or This operation also closes the
a qualified workshop. sunroof blind.
Locking the vehicle
Normal locking Deadlocking Ensure that nothing could prevent the
correct closing of the windows and
F Press this button. F Within five seconds, press this sunroof.
button again to deadlock the If, on versions with alarm, you want to
vehicle. leave the windows and/or sunroof partly
On the first press of the locking button, open, you must first deactivate the
illumination of the direction indicators for a few For versions without an alarm, deadlocking
is confirmed by illumination of the direction volumetric alarm protection.
seconds indicates: For more information on the Alarm, refer
- locking of the vehicle for versions without an indicators for few seconds on the second press
of the locking button. to the corresponding section.
alarm,
- activation of the alarm for other versions.
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold.
47
Access
Locating your vehicle Selective unlocking and eyless Entry and

K
This function allows you to identify your vehicle
opening of the tailgate Starting
from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your The settings for the selective tailgate unlocking System that allows the unlocking, locking
vehicle must be locked. and motorised operation are made in the and starting of the vehicle, while keeping the
vehicle configuration menu.
F Press this button. electronic key in the recognition zone.
By default, selective tailgate unlocking is
activated and the motorised function is
deactivated.
This will switch on the courtesy lamps and door The electronic key can also be used as
mirror spot lamps and the direction indicators a remote control.
F Make a long press on the button
will flash for around ten seconds. For more information on the operation
to unlock the boot and trigger the
of the Remote control, refer to the
motorised opening of the tailgate.
The doors and fuel filler flap remain locked.
Welcome lighting Unlocking the vehicle
Availability of this function depends on version.
If selective unlocking of the tailgate is
F Make a short press on this
deactivated, pressing the unlocking button
remote control button.
unlocks the whole vehicle.
The sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps,

number plate lamps and door mirror spotlamps If motorised operation of the tailgate is
come on for 30 seconds. deactivated, pressing the unlocking button
releases the tailgate.
Pressing again before the end of the timed To lock the vehicle, it is necessary to close
period switches off the lighting immediately. the tailgate again.
48
Access
Complete unlocking opening control (located in the centre) with

If one of the doors or the boot is still open
the electronic key close to the rear of the
F With the electronic key in recognition eyless
or if the electronic key for the K
vehicle.
2
zone A, pass your hand behind the door Entry and Starting system has been left
The setting for selective unlocking of the inside the vehicle, the central locking does
handle of one of the front doors or press
driver's door is managed in the vehicle not take place.
the tailgate opening control (located in the
configuration menu. However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully
centre).
If motorised operation of the tailgate is When unlocking the driver's door, flashing activated after about 45 seconds.
activated, this action triggers its automatic of the direction indicators for a few seconds
opening. signals:
- the selective unlocking of the vehicle for If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently
Opening the windows versions without an alarm, and there is then no action on the doors
Depending on version, keeping your hand - the deactivation of the alarm for other or boot, the vehicle will automatically lock
behind the door handle or maintaining the versions. itself again after about 30 seconds.
press on the tailgate control allows the Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold. If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm will also
windows to be opened to the desired position. be reactivated automatically.
Flashing of the direction indicators for a few
Selective unlocking of the
seconds signals:
tailgate
- the unlocking of the vehicle for versions The automatic folding and unfolding
without an alarm, F Press the tailgate opening control to unlock of the door mirrors can be deactivated
- the deactivation of the alarm for other just the boot. by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
versions. The doors remain locked. workshop.
As a safety measure (children on board),
Selective unlocking never leave the vehicle without taking the
If selective unlocking of the tailgate is
Driver's door and fuel flap electronic key for the Keyless Entry and
deactivated, pressing this control also
F Pass your hand behind the driver's door Starting system with you, even for a short
unlocks the doors.
handle. period.
F To unlock the complete vehicle, pass your Be aware of the risk of theft when the
hand behind the front passenger door electronic key for the Keyless Entry and
handle with the electronic key close to Activation or deactivation of selective Starting system is in one of the defined
the passenger door, or press the tailgate unlocking of the tailgate is done in zones with the vehicle unlocked.
the Vehicle/Driving menu of the
touch screen.
49
Access
F With the electronic key in recognition zone

In order to preserve the battery in the For safety and theft protection reasons,
A, press with your finger or thumb on the
electronic key and the vehicle's battery, do not leave your electronic key in the
door handle of one of the front doors (at the
the "hands-free" functions are put into vehicle, even when you are close to it.
markings) or on the locking control located
long-term standby after 21 days without It is recommended that you keep it with
on the tailgate (on the right).
use. To restore these functions, press you.
It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the
one of the remote control buttons or start
electronic keys is left inside the vehicle.
the engine with the electronic key in the
reader. Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt
For more information on starting with etc.) on the inner surface of the door
Closing the windows and sunroof
Keyless Entry and Starting, refer to the handle may affect detection.
Maintaining pressure on the door handle or
corresponding section. If cleaning the inner surface of the door
the tailgate control allows the windows and,
depending on version, the sunroof to be closed handle using a cloth does not restore
to the desired position. detection, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
This operation also closes the sunroof blind. a qualified workshop.
A sudden splash of water (stream of water,
Locking the vehicle high pressure jet washer, etc.) may be
Normal locking identified by the system as the desire to
Ensure that nothing could prevent the
open the vehicle.
correct closing of the windows and
sunroof.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the windows. Deadlocking
Illumination of the direction indicators for a few Deadlocking renders the interior door
seconds signals: controls inoperative.
- locking of the vehicle for versions without an It also deactivates the interior central
alarm, locking button on the dashboard.
- activation of the alarm for other versions. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold. vehicle when it is deadlocked.
50
Access

At the second press, illumination of the
direction indicators for a few seconds signals
2
the deadlocking of the vehicle for versions
without an alarm.
F With the electronic key in recognition zone

A, press with your finger or thumb on the
door handle of one of the front doors (at the
markings) or on the locking control located
on the tailgate (on the right).
F Within five seconds, press one of these
locking controls again to deadlock the
vehicle.
At the first press on one of the locking controls,

illumination of the direction indicators for a few
seconds signals:
- the locking of the vehicle for versions
without an alarm,
- the activation of the alarm for other
versions.
51
Access
Lost keys, remote control, electronic key Electrical interference Do not throw away the remote control
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's The K
eyless Entry and Starting electronic batteries, they contain metals which are
registration certificate, your personal key may not operate if close to certain harmful to the environment.
identification documents and if possible, the electronic devices: telephone, laptop Take them to an approved collection
label bearing the key code. computer, strong magnetic fields, etc. point.
The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve
the key code and the transponder code Anti-theft protection
required to order a new key. Do not make any modifications to the
electronic engine immobiliser system; this Back-up procedures
Remote control could cause malfunctions.
The high frequency remote control is For vehicles with an ignition switch, do
Complete unlocking/locking
a sensitive system; do not operate it while it not forget to remove the key and turn the of the vehicle with the key
is in your pocket as there is a possibility that steering to engage the steering lock.
it may unlock the vehicle, without you being These procedures should be used in the
aware of it. following cases:
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle - remote control cell battery flat,
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your Have the key codes memorised by
remote control out of range and out of sight - remote control fault,
a PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the keys - vehicle in an area subject to strong
of your vehicle. The remote control may stop in your possession are the only ones which
working and need to be reinitialised. electromagnetic interference.
can start the vehicle. In the first case, you can also replace the
The remote control does not operate when
the key is in the ignition, even when the remote control cell battery.
ignition is switched off. Refer to the corresponding section.
In the second case, you can also reinitialise the
remote control.
Locking the vehicle
Refer to the corresponding section.
Driving with the doors locked may make
access to the passenger compartment by
the emergency services more difficult in an
emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children on board),
remove the key from the ignition or take the
electronic key when you leave the vehicle, even
for a short time.
52
Access
Unlocking F Insert the key in the door lock barrel. manoeuvre the deadlocking is confirmed by
F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle. flashing of the direction indicators for a few
For versions without an alarm, the locking is seconds.
2
confirmed by flashing of the direction indicators Depending on version, the door mirrors fold.
for a few seconds.
Without central locking
These procedures should be used in the
following cases:
- central locking fault,
If your vehicle is fitted with an alarm, this - battery disconnected or discharged.
F Insert the key in the door lock barrel. function will not be activated when locking
F Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle. with the key.
For versions without an alarm, the unlocking is Driver's door
confirmed by flashing of the direction indicators
F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle
for a few seconds.
Deadlocking to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it.
Passenger doors
If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds Unlocking a door
on opening the door; switch on the ignition F Pull the interior opening control for the door.
to stop it.
Normal locking
F Insert the key in the door lock barrel.

F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle
to lock it.
F Within five seconds, turn the key towards
the rear of the vehicle again to deadlock it.
For versions without an alarm, at the second
53
Access
Locking eyless Entry and Starting

Version without K F Fit the new battery into its housing
Battery type: CR1620/3 volts. observing the polarity.
F Clip the cover onto the casing.
The remote control must be reinitialised after

replacing the battery.
For more information on reinitialising the
remote control, refer to the corresponding
section.
Reinitialising the remote

control
Following replacement of the battery or in
F Open the doors.
the event of a remote control fault, it may be
F For the rear doors, check that the child lock eyless Entry and Starting
Version with K
necessary to reinitialise the remote control.
is not on. Battery type: CR2032/3 volts.
Refer to the corresponding section.
Version without K
eyless Entry
F Remove the black cap on the edge of the
and Starting
door, using the key.
F Without forcing, insert the key into the
aperture; then, without turning it, move the
latch sideways towards the inside of the
door.
F Remove the key and refit the black cap.
F Close the doors and check from the outside
that the vehicle is locked.
Changing the battery

F Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver
A message is displayed on the instrument
at the cut-out. F Switch off the ignition.
panel screen when replacement of the battery
F Remove the cover. F Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition).
is needed.
F Remove the discharged battery from its
housing.
54
Access
F Press the closed padlock button for a few F Switch on the ignition by pressing the Unlocking
seconds. "START/STOP" button.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key The electronic key is now fully operational F Press this button again to unlock
2
from the switch. again. the vehicle.
The remote control is now fully operational The red indicator lamp in the button
If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact goes off.
again. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
Version with K
eyless Entry and When locking/deadlocking from the
Starting outside
When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked
Central locking from the outside, the red indicator lamp
This function allows the doors and boot to be flashes and the button is inactive.
locked or unlocked simultaneously from inside F After normal locking, pull one of the
the vehicle. interior door controls to unlock the
vehicle.
F After deadlocking, it is necessary to
Manual mode use the remote control, K eyless Entry
and Starting or the integral key to
unlock the vehicle.
F Place the mechanical key (integral with the

remote control) in the lock to unlock your Automatic mode
vehicle. Locking This is the automatic central locking of the
F Place the electronic key against the back-up vehicle when driving, also called anti-intrusion
reader on the steering column and hold it F Press this button to lock the security.
there until the ignition is switched on. vehicle. For more information on Anti-intrusion
The red indicator lamp in the button security, refer to the corresponding section.
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear
comes on.
lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch
pedal. If one of the doors is open, the central
F With an automatic gearbox, select locking from the inside does not take
position P, then fully depress the brake place.
pedal.
55
Access
Anti-intrusion security Activation/Deactivation - perimeter monitoring

This system allows automatic simultaneous The system checks for opening of the vehicle.
locking of the doors and boot as soon as the The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open
speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). a door, the boot, the bonnet, etc.
- volumetric monitoring
Operation
The system checks for any variation in the
If one of the doors or the boot is open, the You can activate or deactivate this function volume in the passenger compartment.
automatic central locking does not take place. permanently. The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks
a window, enters the passenger compartment
F With the ignition on, press this or moves inside the vehicle.
This is signalled by the sound of button until an audible signal is
the locks rebounding, accompanied triggered and a corresponding - anti-tilt monitoring
by illumination of this symbol in the message of confirmation is
instrument panel, an audible signal and displayed. The system checks for any change in the
the display of an alert message. attitude of the vehicle.
The state of the system stays in memory when The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted,
Carrying long or voluminous objects switching off the ignition. moved or knocked.
If you want to drive with the boot open, you
should press the central locking button Driving with the doors locked may render Self-protection function
to lock the doors. Otherwise, every time access for the emergency services The system checks for the putting out of
the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph difficult in an emergency. service of its components.
(10 km/h), the locks will rebound and the The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central
alerts mentioned above will appear. control or the siren wiring are put out of service
Pressing the central locking button Alarm or damaged.
unlocks the vehicle. (Depending on version)
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), this unlocking is
temporary. For all work on the alarm system, contact
System which protects and provides a deterrent
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
against theft and break-ins. It provides the
workshop.
following types of monitoring:
56
Access
Locking the vehicle with full - leaving a window or sunroof partially open,
If an opening (door, boot or bonnet) is not
- washing your vehicle,
alarm system fully closed, the vehicle is not locked but
- changing a wheel,
2
the exterior perimeter monitoring will be
Activation activated after a delay of 45 seconds at
- having your vehicle towed,
- transport by ship.
the same time as the interior volumetric
and anti-tilt monitoring.
Deactivating the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt
Deactivation monitoring
F Press the unlocking button on the remote
control.
or
F Unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Entry
and Starting system.
The monitoring system is deactivated: the
indicator lamp in the button goes off and the
F Turn the ignition off and exit the vehicle. direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.
F Lock the vehicle using the remote control or
the Keyless Entry and Starting system.
The monitoring system is active: the red When the vehicle automatically locks itself
indicator lamp in the button flashes once per again (as happens if a door or boot is not
second and the direction indicators come on for F Switch off the ignition and within
opened within 30 seconds of unlocking),
about 2 seconds. 10 seconds, press the button until the red
the monitoring system is also reactivated
indicator lamp is on continuously.
automatically.
F Get out of the vehicle.
F Immediately lock the vehicle using the
Following a vehicle locking request, the Locking the vehicle remote control or the Keyless Entry and
perimeter monitoring is activated after with exterior perimeter Starting system.
5 seconds and the interior volumetric and monitoring only The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is
anti-tilt monitoring after 45 seconds.
Deactivate the interior volumetric and anti-tilt activated: the indicator lamp in the button
monitoring to avoid unwanted triggering of the flashes once per second.
alarm in certain cases such as:
- leaving a pet in the vehicle,
57
Access
To be effective, the deactivation must Failure of the remote Doors

be carried out each time the ignition is control
switched off. Opening
To deactivate the monitoring functions:
F unlock the vehicle using the key (integral to From outside
Reactivating the interior the remote control) in the driver's door lock,
volumetric and anti-tilt F open the door; the alarm is triggered,
monitoring F switch on the ignition; the alarm stops; the
indicator lamp in the button goes off.
F Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring
by unlocking the vehicle with the remote
control or the Keyless Entry and Starting Locking the vehicle without
system.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
activating the alarm
F Reactivate all monitoring by locking the F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
vehicle with the remote control or the (integral to the remote control) in the driver's
Keyless Entry and Starting system. door lock.
The red indicator lamp in the button once again
flashes every second.
Malfunction F After unlocking the vehicle or with the
electronic key of the Keyless Entry and
Triggering of the alarm When the ignition is switched on, fixed Starting system in the recognition zone, pull
This is indicated by sounding of the siren illumination of the red indicator lamp in the the door handle.
and flashing of the direction indicators for button indicates a malfunction of the system.
30 seconds. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop. When the selective unlocking is activated,
The monitoring functions remain active until
the first press of the remote control
the alarm has been triggered eleven times in
unlocking button permits unlocking of the
succession.
driver's door only.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control or the Keyless Entry and Starting
system, rapid flashing of the red indicator
lamp in the button informs you that the alarm
was triggered during your absence. When
the ignition is switched on, this flashing stops
immediately.
58
Access
From inside Closing When selective unlocking is activated, the

electronic key must be close to the rear of
When a door is not closed correctly:
2
the vehicle.
- with the engine running or the
vehicle moving (speed below
The tailgate is not designed to take
6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp
a bicycle carrier.
comes on, accompanied by an
alert message displayed for a few
seconds. Closing the tailgate
- with the vehicle moving (speed
above 6 mph (10 km/h)), in addition F Lower the tailgate using the interior grips.
to the warning lamp and alert F Release the grips and press down on the
message, an audible signal sounds outside of the tailgate to close it.
for a few seconds.
Boot If the tailgate is not properly closed:

- engine running, this warning
Opening the tailgate lamp and a message appear in the
F Pull the interior control lever of a front door;
instrument panel for a few seconds,
this unlocks the vehicle completely. With the exterior tailgate control - vehicle moving (speed above
6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning
lamp and a message appear in the
With the selective unlocking activated: instrument panel for a few seconds,
- opening the driver's door unlocks the accompanied by an audible signal.
driver's door only (if the vehicle has not
already been completely unlocked),
In the event of a fault or difficulties felt in
- opening one of the passenger doors F With the vehicle unlocked or with the manoeuvring the tailgate when opening
unlocks the rest of the vehicle. electronic key of the Keyless Entry and or closing it, get it quickly checked
Starting system in the recognition zone, by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
press the central tailgate control. workshop to stop this issue getting worse
F Raise the tailgate. and so as to not cause the tailgate to drop,
and serious injuries.
59
Access
In the event of a fault with the central To avoid the risk of injury through pinching
locking system, it is essential to or trapping, before and during operation of
disconnect the battery to lock the boot and the motorised tailgate:
so ensure complete locking of the vehicle. - ensure that there is no person close to
the rear of the vehicle,
- watch the activity of your passengers,
particularly any children.
Hands-free tailgate
General points
The motorised operation of the tailgate can be Bicycle carrier/Towbar
activated or deactivated in the vehicle settings Never introduce a finger in the locking
menu. system of the motorised tailgate – Risk of The motorised tailgate is not designed to
The motorised tailgate must only be operated a serious injury! support a bicycle carrier.
with the vehicle stationary. When installing a bicycle carrier on a towbar
with connection of a cable to the towbar socket,
Safety anti-pinch the motorised operation of the tailgate will be
automatically deactivated.
The motorised tailgate has an obstacle If using a towbar or bicycle carrier not
detection system that automatically interrupts recommended by PEUGEOT, it is essential
and reverses its movement by a few degrees to to deactivate the motorised operation of the
allow the obstacle to be cleared. tailgate.
Please note that this anti-pinch system is not
active at the end of the closing travel (around
1 cm from completely closed).
Motorised operation
Activation/deactivation of the
motorised operation of the tailgate is
done in the Vehicle/Driving menu of
Check that there is enough space to
the touch screen.
allow for the movement of the motorised
tailgate. This function is deactivated by default.
60
Access
F Press the exterior tailgate control B with the

At any point, It is possible to interrupt the
electronic key on your person.
operation of the tailgate.
or
2
Pressing one of these controls again
F Press the interior tailgate control C (closing
interrupts the movement that is underway.
only).
Following the interruption of a movement,
or
pressing one of these controls again
F Press twice in succession on the dashboard
reverses the movement.
control D.
or
F With the electronic key on your person, use
the "hands-free" access E by performing a Hands-Free Tailgate Access
"kicking" movement below the rear bumper.
The command is confirmed by an audible Activation and deactivation of the
signal. "Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
function is done in the Vehicle/
Driving menu of the touch screen.
This function is deactivated by default.
The tailgate opens, either completely
There are several ways of operating the
by default, or to the position memorised
tailgate:
beforehand. Ensure that you are steady on your
A. using the electronic key of the K eyless If motorised operation is not activated, feet before performing the quick foot
Entry and Starting system, these actions release the tailgate. movement.
B. using the exterior tailgate control, The request to open the tailgate with one Take care not to touch the exhaust system
C. using the interior tailgate control, of the controls A, B or E enables you to which may be hot – Risk of burns!
D. using the control on the dashboard, unlock the vehicle or the tailgate alone
E. using the "hands-free access" procedure beforehand, if selective unlocking of the
below the rear bumper. boot is activated.
Closing the tailgate with the "hands-free"
access function enables you to lock the
Opening/Closing vehicle.
F Press and hold the central button A of the
electronic key.
or
61
Access
Automatic locking using the To cancel the memorised position: Reinitialising the motorised
"Hands-Free Tailgate Access" F stop the tailgate in an intermediate position,
F press button C or the exterior control B for
tailgate
function
more than 3 seconds. This operation is necessary where there is no
Cancellation of the memorised position is movement – after detection of an obstacle,
confirmed by an audible signal. connecting or recharging the battery, etc.
F Open the tailgate manually, if necessary.
F Fully close the tailgate manually.
If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT
Manual operation dealer or a qualified workshop.
The tailgate can be manoeuvred by hand, even
with motorised operation activated.
The tailgate must be immobile.
To activate automatic locking of the vehicle When opening and closing a motorised tailgate
when closing the tailgate using the Hands-Free manually, there is no assistance from gas
Tailgate Access function: struts. Resistance to opening and closing is
Precautions in use
F press this button; its green therefore entirely normal.
In wintry conditions
indicator lamp will come on. In the event of an accumulation of snow
Pressing this button again on the tailgate, clear the snow before
deactivates the function; its indicator Repeatedly opening and closing of the commanding a motorised opening of the
lamp goes off. motorised tailgate can cause overheating tailgate.
of its electric motor, after which opening The formation of ice can block the tailgate
Memorising an opening and closing will not be possible. and prevent its opening: wait until the ice
position Allow at least 10 minutes for the electric melts with the heating of the passenger
motor to cool down before operating the compartment.
To limit the motorised tailgate opening angle:
tailgate again.
F open the tailgate to the desired position,
If you are unable to wait, operate it
F press button C or the exterior control B for When washing
manually.
more than 3 seconds. When washing the vehicle in an automatic
Memorisation of the maximum opening position car wash, do not forget to lock your vehicle
of the tailgate is confirmed by an audible signal. to avoid the risk of unexpected opening.
62
Access
Recommendations related - your vehicle is being serviced, Manual operation

- you are accessing the spare wheel
to the "Hands-Free Tailgate (depending on version). To open or close the window, press or pull the
2
Access" function To avoid such operating problems, keep the switch gently, without exceeding the resistance
If several kicking movements to operate the electronic key away from the recognition zone point. The window stops as soon as the switch
tailgate have no effect, wait a few seconds or deactivate the "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" is released.
before trying again. function.
Automatic operation
The function automatically deactivates in heavy Electric windows To open or close the window, press or pull the
rain or following a build-up of snow.
switch fully, beyond the resistance point: the
If it does not work, check that the electronic key window opens or closes completely when the
is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic switch is released. Pressing the switch again
pollution (smartphone, etc.). stops the movement of the window.
The function may not work correctly with

a prosthetic leg.
The electric window switches remain
operational for approximately 45 seconds
The function may not work correctly if your
after switching off the ignition.
vehicle is fitted with a towbar.
Once this time has elapsed, the electric
In some circumstances, the tailgate may open windows will not operate. To reactivate
or close by itself, particularly if: them, switch the ignition on again.
- you hitch or unhitch a trailer,
- you fit or remove a bicycle carrier,
- you load or unload bicycles from a bicycle
Safety anti-pinch
1. Front left.
carrier, When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
- you place or lift something behind the 2. Front right.
it stops and immediately partially lowers again.
vehicle, 3. Rear right.
In the event of unwanted opening of the
- an animal approaches the rear bumper, 4. Rear left. window on closing, press the switch until the
- you are washing your vehicle, 5. Deactivating the electric window switches window opens completely, then pull the switch
located at the rear seats. immediately until the window closes. Continue
to hold the switch for approximately one second
63
Access
after the window has closed. For each window:

The safety anti-pinch function is not active - bring the window down completely, then
Panoramic opening
during this operation. bring it back up. It will go up by a few sunroof
centimetres each time. Perform the The panoramic sunroof and its blind are
operation until the window is fully closed, opened and closed using the buttons in the roof
Deactivating the rear - continue to pull the switch for at least one console.
controls for the rear second after reaching the window closed
windows position.
In the event of contact (pinching) during

operation of the windows, you must
reverse the movement of the window. To
do this, press the switch concerned.
For your children's safety, press switch When operating the passenger electric
5 to prevent operation of the rear windows window switches, the driver must ensure
irrespective of their positions. that nothing is preventing correct closing A. Blind control button.
of the windows. B. Sunroof control button.
The red indicator lamp in the button comes
The driver must ensure that the
on, accompanied by a message confirming
passengers use the electric windows
activation of the system. It remains on for as
correctly.
long as the deactivation is maintained. Ensure that any luggage or accessories
Use of the rear electric windows from the carried on the roof bars do not interfere
operating the windows.
driver's controls remains possible. with the movement of the sunroof.
Be aware of passengers or other persons
Do not place heavy loads on the fixed or
present when closing the windows using
Reinitialising the electric the electronic key or the Keyless Entry
mobile glass of the sunroof.
windows and Starting system.
Following reconnection of the battery, the

Principles
safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised. Complete opening of the sunroof involves partly
The safety anti-pinch function is not active raising the mobile glass, then sliding it over the
during these operations. fixed glass.
Any intermediate position is possible.
64
Access
Opening the roof involves opening the blind. By With the sunroof opened beyond the raised Closing
contrast, the blind can remain open when the position:
roof is closed. F press and release the rear of button B With the sunroof partially or fully
2
without going beyond the point of resistance open:
to open the sunroof. F press beyond the point of
The control buttons for the sunroof and blind
With the sunroof partly or fully closed: resistance and release the front
can be used:
F press beyond the point of resistance and of button B to fully close the
- with the ignition on, if the state of charge of
release the rear of button B to fully open the sunroof.
the battery is adequate,
sunroof. Any new action on this button
- with the engine running,
Any new action on this button interrupts the interrupts the movement.
- in STOP mode with Stop & Start,
- during the 45 seconds after switching off movement. With the sunroof partially or fully open:
the ignition, F Press and hold the rear of button B without F press and release the front of button B
- during the 45 seconds after locking the going beyond the point of resistance; the without going beyond the point of resistance
vehicle. sunroof opens and stops when you release to close the sunroof to its raised position.
the button. F press and release the front of button B
again to fully close the sunroof.
Before operating the sunroof or blind
With the sunroof fully or partly raised:
control buttons, ensure that no object or
F press and release the front of button B
person might prevent the movement. If the sunroof is wet, following a shower without going beyond the point of resistance
or washing the vehicle, wait until it is to fully close the sunroof.
completely dry before opening.
F press and hold the front of button B without
Operating the sunroof Do not operate the sunroof if it is covered
going beyond the point of resistance; the
by snow or ice – Risk of damage!
Opening Use only plastic scrapers to remove snow sunroof closes and stops when you release
or ice. the button.
With the sunroof fully closed or partly
raised:
F press and release the rear of
button B without going beyond
the point of resistance to fully
raise the sunroof.
Do not extend your head or arms through
Never leave the vehicle with the sunroof
the open sunroof when driving – Risk of
open.
serious injury!
65
Access
Anti-pinch system Operating the sunroof blind Anti-pinch system

If the sunroof encounters an obstacle when If the blind encounters an obstacle when
The closing movement of the blind is limited by
closing, the movement is automatically closing, the movement is automatically
the position of the opening sunroof: the blind
reversed. reversed.
cannot be further forward than the front of the
The anti-pinch system is designed to be mobile glass.
effective at speeds of up to 75 mph (120 km/h). Reinitialisation
Following reconnection of the battery or in the
Reinitialisation Opening event of a fault or jerky movement of the blind,
the blind must be reinitialised:
Following reconnection of the battery or in F Press the rear of button A going F press the rear of button A until the blind is
the event of a fault or jerky movement of beyond the point of resistance to fully open,
the sunroof, the opening sunroof must be fully open the blind. F press and hold the rear of button A again for
reinitialised: Any new action on this button at least 3 seconds.
F press the rear of button B until the sunroof interrupts the movement.
is fully open,
F press and hold the rear of button B again for
at least 3 seconds. F Press and hold the rear of button A without
During simultaneous closing of the
sunroof and the blind, if the blind catches
blind opens and stops when you release the
up with the sunroof, the blind then
button.
suspends its movement and automatically
Check the condition of the sunroof seals
resumes when the sunroof stops.
regularly (presence of dust or deposits, Closing
dead leaves, etc.).
If using a car wash, check that the roof F Press the front of button A, going
is correctly closed in advance and keep beyond the point of resistance to When locking the vehicle, pressing and
the tip of the high-pressure lance at least fully close the blind. holding the locking button simultaneously
30 centimetres from the seals. Any new action on this button closes the windows and the sunroof
interrupts the movement. and then the blind. The movements are
interrupted when you release the locking
F Press and hold the front of button A without button.
blind closes and stops when you release the
button.
66
Access
Never leave the electronic key inside the

vehicle if you get out of the vehicle, even
2
for a short time.
In the event of contact (pinching) when
closing the sunroof or blind, you should
reverse the movement of the sunroof or
blind. To do this, press the control button
in question.
The driver must ensure that passengers
use the sunroof and blind correctly.
operating the sunroof or blind.
67
Ease of use and comfort
The cushion height should be set so your eyes

Driving position are looking at the centre of the windscreen.
If your vehicle has electric seats, the
ignition must be on to adjust them.
Adopting a good driving position helps improve The head room should be at least 4 in (10 cm).
your comfort and protection. Adjust the longitudinal position of the seat so
It also optimises interior and exterior visibility you can fully press the pedals with legs slightly
as well as access to controls. flexed. Passenger's side
The knee room should be at least 4 in (10 cm)
from the dashboard for access to the dashboard
controls.
Sitting comfortably Adjust the backrest angle to as vertical
Whether or not your vehicle has certain seat a position as possible; never tilt it more than 25°.
adjustments described in this section depends Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge
on the trim level and country of sale. is level with the top of your head.
Adjust the length of the seat cushion to support
your thighs.
Adjust the lumbar support so that it conforms to
the shape of your spine.
Driver's side Adjust the steering wheel so that it is at least
10 in (25 cm) from your sternum and your arms
are slightly bent. Sit fully back in the seat with your pelvis, back
The steering wheel should not hide the and shoulders in contact with the seat backrest.
instrument panel. Adjust the longitudinal position of the seat
so that you are at a distance of at least 10 in
(25 cm) from the dashboard.
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge
is level with the top of your head.
As a safety precaution, adjust the seats

only when the vehicle is stationary.
Sit fully back in the seat with your pelvis, back
and shoulders in contact with the seat backrest.
68
Before moving off belt so that it is tightened across your pelvis.

Never adjust the seats or steering wheel
Ensure that all passengers have fastened their
when driving.
seat belts correctly.
Always keep your feet on the floor.
If your vehicle has electric door mirrors,
3
the ignition must be on to adjust them.
Front seats
Manual seats
When driving
Adjust the interior and exterior door mirrors to

reduce blind spots.
1. Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards

F Raise the control bar and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
F Release the bar to lock the seat in position
Maintain a good driving position and hold the in one of the notches.
steering wheel with both hands at the quarter
Fasten your seat belt: place the diagonal belt in
to three position, so that you can easily and
the middle of your shoulder and adjust the lap
quickly reach the controls behind and near the
steering wheel.
69
2. Adjusting the height of the seat cushion "AGR" certified seats Placing the passenger seat
F Raise or lower the control as many times as
in the table position
needed to obtain the desired seat height. Additional adjustments
The backrest of the passenger seat can be fully
3. Adjusting the seat backrest angle
folded forward and secured in this position.
F Turn the knob forwards or backwards to
This function, when associated with folding
recline the backrest to the desired angle.
of the backrest of the rear seats, helps in
or
transporting long and voluminous objects.
F For a passenger seat that can be placed in
the table position, pull the handle and guide
First steps:
the backrest forwards or backwards.
F lower the head restraint,
4. Adjusting the height of the head restraint F straighten the "Aircraft" type table,
1. Adjusting the length of the seat cushion
F move the seat fully back to allow space for
Refer to the corresponding section. F Pull the handle forwards to release the
the head restraint when folding,
cushion, then move the front part of the seat
5. Adjusting the lumbar support F adjust the seat to the lowest position,
cushion forwards or backwards.
(only on the driver's seat) F check that there is nothing that might
F Turn the knob forwards or backwards to 2. Adjusting the seat cushion angle electrically interfere with folding of the backrest (seat
increase or decrease the level of lumbar F Press and hold the front or rear of the belt, child seat, items of clothing, bags, etc.).
support. control to raise or lower the front of the seat
cushion.
3. Adjusting the lumbar support electrically

Before moving the seat backwards, The control allows independent adjustment of
the depth and vertical position of the lumbar Deactivation of the front passenger airbag
ensure that there is nothing that might is recommended.
prevent the full travel of the seat. support.
There is a risk of trapping or pinching F Press and hold the front or rear of the
passengers if present in the rear seats control to increase or reduce the lumbar
or jamming the seat if large objects are support.
placed on the floor behind the seat. F Press and hold the top or bottom of the
control to raise or lower the lumbar support
area.
70
Folding the backrest Front head restraints Refitting a head restraint

F Introduce the head restraint rods into the
Height adjustment
guides in the seat backrest.
F Push the head restraint down as far as it will
go.
F Press the lug A to free the head restraint
3
and push it down.
F Adjust the height of the head restraint.
Never drive with the head restraints

removed; they should be in place and
correctly adjusted for the occupant of the
F Pull the control fully up to release the seat.
backrest.
F Tip the backrest fully forward. Upward:
F pull the head restraint up to the desired
position; the head restraint can be felt to
In this position, the backrest can support
Driver's seat with electric
click into position.
a maximum load of 30 kg. Downward:
adjustment
When sharp deceleration occurs, objects F press the lug A and push the head restraint
placed on the folded backrest can turn into down to the desired position. To carry out these electric adjustments,
projectiles. switch on the ignition or start the engine if
The adjustment is correct when the upper the vehicle has gone into energy economy
edge of the head restraint is level with the mode.
top of the head. These are accessible for approximately
Returning the backrest to the one minute after opening the driver's door.
normal position They are deactivated approximately one
F Pull the control fully up to release the
Removing a head restraint minute after switching off the ignition.
backrest. F Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
F Raise the backrest and guide it back until it F Press the lug A to release the head restraint
latches into place. and remove it completely.
F Check that the backrest has engaged F Stow the head restraint securely.
correctly.
71
4. Adjusting the length of the seat cushion It takes account of the electric adjustments of
F Pull the handle forwards to release the the seat and the door mirrors.
cushion, then move the front part of the seat
cushion forwards or backwards.
5. Adjusting the lumbar support

The control allows independent adjustment of
the depth and vertical position of the lumbar
support.
F Press and hold the front or rear of the
control to increase or reduce the lumbar
support.
F Press and hold the top or bottom of the
control to raise or lower the lumbar support
area.
1. Adjusting the angle and height of the seat
Storing a position
cushion/Adjusting the seat forwards and Using buttons M/1/2
backwards Before moving the seat backwards, F Sit in the driver's seat.
F Raise or lower the front of the control to ensure that there is nothing that might F Switch on the ignition.
obtain the desired seat cushion angle. prevent the full travel of the seat. F Adjust your seat and the door mirrors.
F Raise or lower the rear of the control to There is a risk of trapping or pinching F Press button M, then press button 1 or 2
raise or lower the seat cushion. passengers if present in the rear seats within four seconds.
F Slide the control forwards or backwards to or jamming the seat if large objects are An audible signal indicates that the position has
move the seat forwards or backwards. placed on the floor behind the seat. been stored.
2. Adjusting the seat backrest angle

F Turn the control forwards or backwards to
recline the backrest to the desired angle. Storing driving positions
Associated with adjustments of the electrical
3. Adjusting the height of the head restraint Storing a new position cancels the
driver's seat, this function allows two driving
Refer to the corresponding section. previous position.
positions to be memorised, to make these
adjustments easier if there are frequent driver
changes.
72
Recalling a stored position F Each press changes the level of heating; the
Prolonged use is not recommended for
corresponding number of indicator lamps
persons with sensitive skin.
Ignition on or engine running come on:
There is a risk of burns for people whose
F Press button 1 or 2 to recall the • 1 orange indicator lamp = low.
perception of heat is impaired (illness,
corresponding position. • 2 orange indicator lamps = medium.
taking medication, etc.).
An audible signal confirms that adjustment is • 3 orange indicator lamps = high.
There is a risk of overheating the system if
3
complete.
material with insulating properties is used,
Switching off such as cushions or seat covers.
You can interrupt the current movement by Do not use the system:
pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one F Press the button again until all the indicator
- if wearing damp clothing,
of the seat controls. lamps are off.
- if child seats are fitted.
A stored position cannot be recalled while To avoid breaking the heating element in
The state of the system is not kept in memory
driving. the seat:
when the ignition is switched off.
Recalling stored positions is deactivated - do not place heavy objects on the seat,
45 seconds after switching off the ignition. - do not kneel or stand on the seat,
Do not use the function when the seat is - do not place sharp objects on the seat,
not occupied. - do not spill liquids onto the seat.
Reduce the intensity of the heating as To avoid the risk of short-circuit:
soon as possible. - do not use liquid products for cleaning
the seat,
Heated seats When the seat and passenger
- never use the heating function when
compartment have reached an adequate
The function is active only with the engine temperature, you can stop the function; the seat is damp.
running. reducing the consumption of electrical
current reduces fuel consumption.
Switching on
F Press the button corresponding to your
seat.
73
Multipoint massage If the settings suit you and you make no F When stationary, pull the control lever to release
changes, the display returns to its previous the steering wheel adjustment mechanism.
System with a choice of type of massage and state. F Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving
adjustment of its intensity. position.
This system operates with the engine running, The multipoint massages are also F Push the control lever to lock the steering wheel
as well as in STOP mode of Stop & Start. managed by the i-Cockpit Amplify adjustment mechanism.
function.
Activation/Settings As a safety measure, these adjustments
For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify
The massage settings are adjusted in the touch function, refer to the corresponding section. should only be carried out with the vehicle
screen. stationary.
If you want to modify the settings:
The system is switched on, either directly using
F select another type of massage from the
the button on the front seat, or by activating
a personalised ambience with the i-Cockpit
five offered, Mirrors
F select a massage intensity from the three
Amplify function.
levels offered: "1" (Low), "2" (Normal) or "3" Door mirrors
(High).
The modifications are taken into account Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass
immediately. permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary
Once activated, the system starts a one hour for overtaking or parking.
massage cycle, made up of sequences of They can also be folded for parking in confined
6 minutes of massage followed by 3 minutes at spaces.
rest.
The system stops automatically at the end of the
cycle; the indicator lamp in the button goes off. Demisting/Defrosting
If your vehicle is so equipped,
Steering wheel demisting/defrosting of the heated
Using the button on the front seat:
adjustment door mirrors is performed when the
F Press this button; its green heated rear screen is switched on.
indicator lamp comes on.
For more information on Rear screen demist -
defrost, refer to the corresponding section.
The system is activated immediately with the
last settings used and the settings page is
displayed on the touch screen.
74
Adjustment Folding The folding and unfolding of the door

mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or
3
If necessary the mirrors can be folded
manually.
Automatic tilting in reverse gear

System which provides a view of the ground
during parking manoeuvres in reverse gear.
F Move control A to the right or to the left to F From outside: lock the vehicle using the
select the corresponding mirror. remote control or the key. With the engine running, on engaging reverse
F Move control B in any of the four directions F From inside: with the ignition on, pull the gear, the mirror glasses tilt downwards.
to adjust. control A in the central position rearwards. They return to their initial position:
F Return control A to the central position. - a few seconds after coming out of reverse
gear,
- once the speed of the vehicle exceeds
If the mirrors are folded using control A, 6 mph (10 km/h),
they will not unfold when the vehicle is - on switching off the engine.
unlocked. Pull again on control A.
As a safety measure, the mirrors should
be adjusted to reduce the "blind spots". This function is activated/
The objects observed are, in reality, closer deactivated via the Vehicle settings
than they appear. tab in the Vehicle/Driving menu of
Take this into account in order to
Unfolding the touch screen.
correctly judge the distance of vehicles F From outside: unlock the vehicle using the
approaching from behind. remote control or the key. Rear view mirror
F From inside: with the ignition on, pull the
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which
control A in the central position rearwards.
darkens the mirror glass and reduces the
nuisance to the driver caused by the sun,
headlamps from other vehicles, etc.
75
Manual model This system automatically and progressively - a low position, for stowing, when the seat
changes between day and night use by means is not in use:
of a sensor measuring the light coming from the F press the lug A to release the head
rear of the vehicle. restraint and push it fully down.
The rear head restraints can be removed.

In order to ensure optimum visibility during To remove a head restraint:
your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens F pull the head restraint as far up as it will go,
automatically when reverse gear is F press the lug A to release the head restraint
engaged. and remove it completely,
F stow the head restraint.
Adjustment
To refit a head restraint:
F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
F insert the head restraint rods into the guides
directed correctly in the "day" position. Second row seats in the corresponding seat backrest,
F push the head restraint down as far as it
Day/night position
F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti- Rear head restraints will go,
F press the lug A to release the head restraint
dazzle position.
and push it down.
F Push the lever to change to the normal
"day" position.
Never drive with passengers seated at
the rear when the head restraints are
removed; they must be in place and in the
Automatic "electrochrome" model high position.
They have two positions:

- a high position, for when the seat is in use:
F pull the head restraint fully up.
76
Seat adjustments Longitudinal adjustment Outer seats

nd
The three seats of the 2 row are independent F Lift control handle B1 and guide the
and have the same width. Their backrests backrest backwards or forwards, raising
can be folded to increase or reduce the boot yourself slightly if needed.
loading space. F Release the handle and ensure the backrest
is properly locked on one of the positions
3
offered.
Central seat
F Lift control strap B2 and guide the backrest
backwards or forwards, raising yourself
F Raise the control bar A and slide the seat slightly if needed.
forwards or backwards. F Release the strap and ensure the backrest
F Release the bar and ensure the seat is is properly locked on one of the positions
properly locked. offered.
Adjusting the seat backrest angle Flat floor
A. Longitudinal adjustment
B. Adjusting the seat backrest angle and
folding
C. Folding the backrest from behind and
emergency exit for 3rd row passengers
D. Access to 3rd row seats (7-seat versions)
77
Folding the backrests Folding from the boot F Raise the continuity panels of the 2nd row
seats against the backrests.
F Check that the "aircraft" type tables of the F Straighten the backrest until it locks.
front seats are properly folded.
F Place the 2nd row seats in the maximum rear
position.
Before performing any operations on
the rear seats, to avoid damage to the
Before and while performing operations seat belts, check that the outer belts are
on the seats, check that the passengers, properly tensioned. The central belt must
children in particular, keep their hands and be stored in the headlining.
their feet far from the moving elements of
the seats (hinges, slides, etc.) – Risk of
serious injury!
When loading, for example, or from the 3rd row
seats:
Continuity panels
Folding from the outside F Pull strap C to unlock the desired seat and
push the backrest slightly forward.
Replacing the seat
F Pull the handle B1 or the strap B2 until the Each seat has a continuity panel at the bottom
backrest is fully folded. of the backrest, which, once unfolded:
F Release the control. - allows for a continuous loading surface in
F Push the backrest slightly forward so that the boot, whatever the position of the seats,
the backrest tilts and the cushion is folded
flat on the floor.
78
- prevents objects from sliding beneath the From the outside or from the 3rd row seats:
Do not let children operate the seats
2nd row seats. F Check that the "aircraft" type tables of the
unsupervised.
The continuity panels are held against the front seats are properly folded.
backrests with a magnetic fixing element. F Pull lever D and guide the backrest forwards
to tilt it and move the seat to the front.
Each concertina board can support
To put the seat backrest back in place: a maximum load of 100 kg with the 3rd row
3
These continuity panels are not designed
to support a weight greater than 30 kg. F Straighten the backrest until the seat locks. seats folded away.
Whatever the initial position of the seat, it With the 3rd row seats removed and the
is placed automatically at one third of the removable concertina board carriers
longitudinal adjustment range in order to installed, the maximum load is limited
preserve enough space for passengers in the to 40 kg.
Before deploying the continuity panels, 3rd row seats.
check that the 2nd row seats are pulled as
far back as possible.
Access to third row seats If this system fails (lever D), the 3rd row
Third row seats are accessed via the second passengers can also exit after having
row outer seats. folded the backrest of the 2nd row seats
using strap C.
Do not let children operate the seats
unsupervised.
When there is a seat at the back of the boot,

the removable carrier is fixed against the wall in
Third row seats front of its holder.
If you remove the seat from the back of the
The two seats in the 3rd row are stored in the boot for extra storage space, you must place
folded away position at the back of the boot. the removable carrier on the two lugs on the
Each is covered with a rigid concertina board central wall.
attached to the vehicle.
79
Folding the concertina Seat storage

boards
F Remove the load space cover.

F Straighten the continuity panels of the 2nd
row seats. F Straighten the continuity panels of the 2nd
F Pull one of the straps; the 3 parts of the F Fold back the concertina board and row seats.
corresponding board fold into concertina straighten it vertically. F Put the head restraints in the low position.
form. F Pull the black strap E located behind the F Check that the seat belts in the 3rd row are
backrest. properly stored along the side trims without
When the 3rd row seats are straightened, these
The backrest tilts backwards bringing the being folded or twisted.
folded concertina boards can be left:
- either flat behind the seats,
seat cushion with it; the seat locks in the open F Pull strap F, located at the bottom of the
position. backrest.
- or in the vertical position,
thus clearing the inside of the seat as a storage The seat is unlocked.
The load space cover can be stored behind the
space. F Push the backrest slightly forwards.
backrests of the seats in the 3rd row.
The backrest tilts and folds on the cushion; the
For more information on the Interior fittings
folded seat is stored at the back of its storage
Installing the seats and particularly on the load space cover, refer
area.
to the corresponding section.
This is done from the boot sill. F Put the concertina boards back above the
folded away seats.
80
The rear head restraints can be removed. The seat must be in the folded away
Before doing anything to the seats in the
To remove a head restraint: position.
3rd row, straighten the continuity panels of
F pull the head restraint as far up as it will go, These operations must be performed from the
the seats in the 2nd row.
F press the lug A to release the head restraint boot sill.
Do not try to fold a seat in the 3rd row
and remove it completely, F Fold back the concertina board.
without having opened it until the backrest
F stow the head restraint.
is fully locked.
3
To refit a head restraint:
Do not leave anything on or underneath
F insert the head restraint rods into the guides
the seats in the 3rd row when they are
in the corresponding seat backrest,
being folded.
F push the head restraint down as far as it
Do not guide strap F when storing the
will go,
seat – your fingers may get jammed!
F press the lug A to release the head restraint
and push it down.
Never drive with passengers seated at

Rear head restraints the rear when the head restraints are F Lift the yellow lever G, located on the right-
removed; they must be in place and in the hand side, as far as possible to unlock the
high position. seat.
Seat removal
Removing the right-hand seat first is
recommended in order to make it easier to
access the left-hand seat unlocking control.
They have two positions:

- a high position, for when the seat is in use:
F pull the head restraint fully up.
- a low position, for stowing, when the seat
F While keeping the yellow lever held at the
is not in use:
highest position, raise the rear part of the
F press the lug A to release the head
seat using the red strap F.
restraint and push it fully down.
81
F Drop the rear part of the seat which will lock

in place under its own weight.
The yellow lever G folds automatically.
If the seat is not perfectly horizontal, do

not press on the backrest and do not
try to unfold it – Risk of damaging the
mechanism!
Take out the seat and start the operation
F Once the rear part of the seat has been F While holding it by the sides at the plastic
again.
raised, take hold of each side of the covers, tilt the seat forwards.
cushion, at the plastic covers, then bring F Place the hooks located at the front of
the seat towards you, keeping it at the same the seat, both at the same time onto the
angle. coloured securing lugs on the right and left
at the bottom of the seat well. Seat modularity
Replacing the seats Configuration examples
These operations must be performed from the
boot sill. Check that the front hooks of the seat are
properly located on the two lugs.
As long as the seat is not correctly in If they are not, you must lift the seat and
position, it must be held with both hands start the procedure again.
by the sides, keeping it folded.
F Check in advance that the seat storage well

is empty and that the movable carrier is
properly secured against the front wall.
7 seats 5 seats Transport of

objects
82
These ambiences can be personalised in the Access to the i-Cockpit

touch screen.
Amplify system home page
Content of an ambience
Direct access by this button
An ambience is defined by the settings for each
of the following systems:
- the passenger compartment

ambient lighting,
(activation/deactivation and
Access via the Applications menu
3
adjustment of brightness) F Select "i-Cockpit Amplify".
6 seats 4 seats
- the audio ambience,
(choice of predetermined settings for
By folding the 2nd row of seats and folding the audio system equaliser).
away the 3rd row of seats, you can create Activating an ambience
a continuous storage floor through to the - scented air freshener,
back of the front seats. (activation/deactivation, choice of From the home page:
By folding the front passenger seat an air freshener and adjusting the F Select an ambience: "Relax" or "Boost".
into a table position, you can create amount of diffusion). Depending on the settings made for the
a continuous storage floor through to the ambience, the systems are activated
- multipoint massage, immediately.
dashboard.
(selection of the seat, activation/
deactivation, selection of a type of
massage and a setting for intensity). Deactivating an ambience
Folding or unfolding the seats must only
be done with the vehicle stationary. - Dynamic pack, From the home page:
(activation/deactivation). F Press "Deactivate ambience".
or
F Select another ambience.
i-Cockpit Amplify function The ambience is automatically deactivated
This function allows the driving ambiences to when the ignition is switched off.
be managed.
Specific system settings are offered for each
ambience.
83
Personalising an ambience Heating and Ventilation Air distribution

From the home page:
F Select an ambience to activate it. Air intake
F Press "Settings" to display the settings
page for the ambience. The air circulating in the passenger
F Select a system for which you wish to compartment is filtered and originates either
modify the settings. from the outside via the grille located at the
F After making the modifications, press any base of the windscreen or from the inside in air
area of the screen outside the system recirculation mode.
settings window to return to the ambience
settings page. Controls
F After making all of the desired modifications
to settings, press "Save settings". The incoming air follows various routes
The modifications are taken into account depending on the controls selected by
immediately. the driver, the front passenger and rear
passengers, depending on the level of
equipment.
The temperature control enables you to obtain
It is possible to temporarily modify an
the level of comfort required by mixing the air of
ambience at any time, by modifying the
the various circuits.
settings for one or more of the systems
The air distribution control enables you to
managed in the ambience, without going
select the air vents used in the passenger
via the i-Cockpit Amplify function.
compartment by the combined use of the 1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents.
For example, you can deactivate or modify
associated buttons. 2. Front side window demisting/defrosting
the intensity of the current massage by
The air flow control enables you to increase or vents.
pressing the massage activation button
reduce the speed of the ventilation fan.
on your seat or activate/deactivate 3. Side adjustable air vents.
the ambient lighting in the passenger Depending on your vehicle, the controls are
compartment from the Vehicle/Driving 4. Central adjustable air vents.
accessible in the Air conditioning menu of the
menu. touch screen or are grouped together on the 5. Air outlets to the front footwells.
In this case, the new settings will not be control panel of the centre console.
saved as part of the current ambience.
84
6. Air outlets to the rear footwells.

Recommendations for ventilation and F To ensure correct operation of the
7. Adjustable air vents with blower. air conditioning air conditioning system, you are also
In order for these systems to be fully advised to have it checked regularly
To close the air vents: effective, follow the operation and as recommended in the Warranty and
F side vents; place the slider in the central maintenance guidelines below: Maintenance Record.
position, then move it sideways towards the F To ensure that the air is distributed F If the system does not produce cold air,
3
door. evenly, keep the external air intake switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT
F central vents; place the slider in the central grilles at the base of the windscreen, dealer or a qualified workshop.
position, then move it sideways towards the nozzles, the vents, the air outlets When towing the maximum load on a steep
you. and the air extractor in the boot free gradient in high temperatures, switching off
from obstructions. the air conditioning increases the available
F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, engine power and so improves the towing
located on the dashboard; this is used ability.
for regulation of the automatic air
conditioning system.
F Operate the air conditioning system for
at least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice
a month to keep it in perfect working
order.
F Ensure that the passenger
compartment filter is in good condition
and have the filter elements replaced
regularly. We recommend the use of
a combined passenger compartment
filter. Thanks to its special active
additive, it contributes to the purification
of the air breathed by the occupants
and the cleanliness of the passenger
compartment (reduction of allergic
symptoms, bad odours and greasy
deposits).
85
1. Temperature settings. Air flow adjustment

If after an extended stop in sunshine, the
2. Air conditioning On/Off.
interior temperature is very high, first air
3. Air distribution adjustment. F Press the "large fan" or "small
the passenger compartment for a few
4. Air flow adjustment. fan" button to increase or
moments.
decrease the air flow.
Put the air flow control at a setting high 5. Recirculation of interior air.
The corresponding orange indicator
enough to quickly change the air in the
The air conditioning system operates only with lamps come on.
passenger compartment.
the engine running.
If you keep pressing the "small fan" until all

The condensation created by the air Temperature adjustment of the indicator lamps go off (system off), the
conditioning results in a discharge of
F Turn this knob from blue (cold) temperature is no longer controlled.
water under the vehicle which is perfectly
to red (hot). A slight flow of air can still be felt, resulting from
normal.
the forward movement of the vehicle.
Stop & Start

The heating and air conditioning systems
only work when the engine is running. Air distribution adjustment Air conditioning On/Off
To maintain a comfortable temperature
Windscreen and side windows. The air conditioning is designed to operate
in the passenger compartment, you may
effectively in all seasons, with the windows
temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start
closed.
system.
Central and side vents. It enables you to:
For more information on Stop & Start,
- lower the temperature, in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3°C.
Footwells.
Manual air conditioning Switching on

F Press this button as many times as
necessary to obtain the desired air F Press this button; its orange
distribution. indicator lamp comes on.
The air distribution can be adapted by
combining the corresponding orange indicator
lamps.
86
The value indicated corresponds to a level of

The air conditioning does not operate
comfort and not to a precise temperature.
when the air flow adjustment is set to off.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can
activate recirculation of the interior air for Air flow adjustment
a few moments. Press one of these buttons to
increase (+) or decrease (-) the
3
speed of the booster fan.
Switching off
F Press this button again; its The symbol for air flow (a fan) fills progressively
indicator lamp goes off. according to the air flow setting made.
1. Automatic visibility programme.
2. Recirculation of interior air. By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are
Switching off the air conditioning may result in stopping ventilation.
3. Air flow adjustment.
some discomfort (humidity, condensation).
4. Temperature adjustment.
5. Air distribution adjustment.
Semi-automatic mono- 6. System off. Avoid driving too long without ventilation –
Risk of condensation and deterioration of
zone air conditioning 7. Air conditioning On/Off.
air quality!
8. Maximum air conditioning.
The air conditioning system operates only with

the engine running.
The temperature at the nozzles and vents Air distribution adjustment
is regulated by the system according to the
Press the Air conditioning menu These buttons are used to arrange
temperature in the passenger compartment
button to display the system controls the distribution of air in the passenger
and the temperature setting.
page. compartment by combining several air outlets.
Temperature adjustment Windscreen and side windows.

F Press one of these buttons to
decrease (blue) or increase
(red) the value. Central and side vents.
87
Footwells. Automatic visibility

when the air flow adjustment is set to off. programme
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can
For more information on Front demist -
The air distribution can be adapted by using use recirculation of the interior air for
defrost, refer to the corresponding section.
several buttons: illumination of the indicator a few moments. Then return to the intake
lamp confirms the presence of fan boosted air of exterior air.
in the direction indicated, the indicator lamp off
indicates the absence of fan boosted air in the Switching off the system
direction indicated. Switching off
F Press this button; its indicator
For a uniform distribution of air in the F Press this button again, its lamp comes on and all other
passenger compartment, the three buttons can indicator lamp goes off. indicator lamps of the system
be activated simultaneously. go off.
Switching off the air conditioning may result in
This action deactivates all functions of the air
some discomfort (humidity, condensation).
conditioning system.
Air conditioning On/Off Temperature is no longer regulated. However,
The air conditioning is designed to operate a slight flow of air can still be felt, resulting from
Maximum air conditioning the forward movement of the vehicle.
effectively in all seasons, with the windows
closed. This function allows faster cooling of the air in
It enables you to: the passenger compartment.
Avoid driving for too long with the system
- lower the temperature, in summer, The system automatically adjusts the
switched off – Risk of condensation and
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting temperature setting to the lowest possible, air
deterioration of air quality!
in winter, above 3°C. distribution towards the centre and outer vents,
Pressing any button reactivates the
air flow to maximum and activates recirculation
system with the settings that were
of interior air.
Switching on previously in use.
F Press this button, its indicator F Press this button to activate

lamp comes on. the function; its indicator lamp
comes on.
F Press this button again to deactivate the
function and return to the previous settings;
its indicator lamp goes off.
88
1. Automatic visibility programme. The value indicated corresponds to a level of

Automatic dual-zone air 2. Recirculation of interior air. comfort and not to a precise temperature.
conditioning 3. Temperature adjustment on the left side.
F Press one of these buttons to
4. Temperature adjustment on the right side.
increase the value.
5. Air distribution adjustment.
6. Air flow adjustment.
3
7. System off. F Press one of these buttons to
8. Air conditioning On/Off. decrease the value.
Press the Air conditioning menu
button to display the system controls 9. Automatic comfort programme On/Off.
10. Maximum air conditioning. It is recommended that you avoid a difference
page.
11. Access to the secondary page. of more than 3°C in the settings for left and
right.
12. Selection of settings for the automatic
comfort programme (Soft/Normal/Fast).
13. "AQS" (Air Quality System) function (with Automatic comfort
pollution sensor). programme
14. Mono-zone/Dual-zone.
F Press this button to activate or
15. "REAR" function (depending on version).
deactivate the automatic mode
of the air conditioning system.
The air conditioning system operates with
the engine running, but the ventilation and its When the indicator lamp in the button is on, the
controls are available with the ignition on. air conditioning system operates automatically:
Operation of the air conditioning and regulation the system manages the temperature, air
of temperature, air flow and air distribution in flow and air distribution in the passenger
the passenger compartment are automatic. compartment in an optimum way according to
the comfort level you have selected.
Temperature adjustment It is possible to modulate the intensity of the
The driver and front passenger can each automatic comfort programme by choosing one
choose their own temperature setting. of three settings offered in the secondary page,
accessible from the "OPTIONS" button.
89
To change the current setting, shown by This function is not designed to detect
In cold weather with the engine cold, the
illumination of the corresponding indicator unpleasant odours.
air flow is increased gradually until the
lamp, press this button repeatedly until the Recirculation is automatically activated when
comfort setting has been reached, in order
desired setting is displayed: the front screenwash is used or when reverse
to limit the delivery of cold air into the
gear is engaged.
passenger compartment.
"Soft": provides soft and quiet The function does not operate if the exterior
62)7 On entering the vehicle, if the interior
operation by limiting air flow. temperature is below 5°C, to avoid the risk of
temperature is much colder or warmer
misting of the windscreen and side windows.
$872 than the comfort setting requested, there
is no need to alter the value displayed
To activate or deactivate the function, go to the
"Normal": offers the best in order to reach more quickly the
secondary page by pressing the "OPTIONS"
1250$/
compromise between required level of comfort. The system
button.
a comfortable temperature and compensates automatically and corrects
the temperature difference as quickly as
$872 quiet operation (default setting).
possible.
Manual control
"Fast": provides strong and You can manually adjust one or more settings,
)$67
effective air flow. Automatic visibility while retaining automatic control of the other
programme functions:
$872 - air flow,
For more information on Front demist –
- air distribution.
Use the "Normal" or "Fast" setting to assure defrost, refer to the corresponding section.
the comfort of passengers in the rear seats. As soon as you modify a setting, the indicator
This setting is associated with automatic mode lamp in the "AUTO" button goes off.
only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode, "Air Quality System" (AQS)
the indicator for the last setting remains on. function
Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO F Press this button again to
mode if deactivated. Using a pollution sensor, this function reactivate the automatic comfort
automatically activates recirculation of the programme.
interior air once it detects a certain level of
polluting substances in the exterior air.
When the air quality returns to a satisfactory
level, recirculation of interior air is automatically
deactivated.
90
Air flow adjustment Each press on a button activates or deactivates Maximum air conditioning
the function. The indicator lamp is on when the
F Press one of these buttons to button is activated. For a uniform distribution This function allows faster cooling of the air in
increase or decrease the speed of air in the passenger compartment, the three the passenger compartment.
of the booster fan. buttons can be activated simultaneously.
The system automatically adjusts the
In AUTO mode, the indicator lamps in all three temperature setting to the lowest possible, air
3
buttons are off. distribution towards the centre and outer vents,
The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in air flow to maximum and activates recirculation
progressively as the speed of the fan is Air conditioning On/Off of interior air.
increased.
The air conditioning is designed to operate F Press this button to activate
By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are effectively in all seasons, with the windows the function; its indicator lamp
stopping ventilation. closed. comes on.
"OFF" is displayed alongside the fan. It enables you to:
F Press this button again to deactivate the
- lower the temperature, in summer,
function and return to the previous settings;
Avoid driving too long without ventilation – - increase the effectiveness of the demisting
its indicator lamp goes off.
Risk of condensation and deterioration of in winter, above 3°C.
air quality!
Switching on Mono-zone/Dual-zone
F Press this button, its indicator The passenger temperature setting can be
Air distribution adjustment lamp comes on. linked to the driver's setting (mono-zone
function).
You can vary the distribution of air in the
passenger compartment using these three It is available in the secondary page by
buttons. pressing the "OPTIONS" button.
when the air flow adjustment is set to off.
Windscreen and side windows.
F Press this button to activate

Switching off
the "MONO" function; its "ON"
Central and side vents.
F Press this button again, its status is displayed.
indicator lamp goes off.
The function is automatically deactivated if the
Footwells. Switching off the air conditioning may result in passenger uses their temperature adjustment
some discomfort (humidity, condensation). buttons (dual-zone function).
91
"REAR" function. F Press the "large fan" or

Avoid driving for too long with the
"small fan" button to increase
ventilation off or the system deactivated –
or decrease the air flow
Risk of misting and deterioration of the air
respectively.
quality!
The corresponding indicator lamps
Pressing any button reactivates the
come on.
system with the settings that were
If all of the indicator lamps are off, a slight air previously in use.
flow can still be felt as a result of the vehicle's
movement.
Recirculation of the
Ventilation with the ignition on
interior air
When the ignition is switched on, you can
The intake of exterior air prevents the formation
use the ventilation system to adjust the air
When this function is activated, the rear air of mist on the windscreen and the side
flow settings and the air distribution in the
vents blower starts up. In this case, the rear windows.
passenger compartment depending on the
passengers can control the air flow from these The recirculation of the interior air isolates the
battery charge.
air vents independently of the air conditioning passenger compartment from exterior odours
This function does not operate the air
air flow control for the front air vents. and fumes.
conditioning.
When the function is deactivated, the maximum This function also allows the desired
temperature in the passenger compartment to
air flow distributed by the rear air vents is System switch-off be reached in the shortest time.
limited by the air conditioning air flow setting for
the front air vents. F Press this button. F Press this button to activate the
The function is available on the secondary Its indicator lamp comes on and all function; its orange indicator
page, which can be accessed by pressing the other indicator lamps for the system lamp comes on.
"OPTIONS" button. go off.
This action deactivates all functions F Press this button again to deactivate the
of the air conditioning system. function; its indicator lamp goes off.
By reducing the air flow to a minimum, you are

F Press this button to activate the Avoid prolonged use of the recirculation of
stopping ventilation.
"REAR" function; its status is interior air – Risk of formation of mist and
Temperature is no longer regulated. A slight air
displayed as "ON". deterioration of the air quality!
flow can still be felt however, resulting from the
forward movement of the vehicle.
92
The system activates automatically when With semi-automatic and In wintry conditions, remove all snow or
reverse gear is engaged. automatic air conditioning ice on the camera on the windscreen
before moving off.
Automatic visibility programme Otherwise, this can affect the function
of the equipment associated with the
Front demist – defrost F Press this button to demist or
camera.
3
defrost the windscreen and
With manual air side windows more quickly; its
conditioning orange indicator lamp comes on.
F Adjust the temperature to maximum (red). The system automatically manages the air
Heated windscreen
F Adjust the air flow to maximum; all of the conditioning (depending on version), air
orange indicator lamps come on. flow and air intake, and provides optimum
F Adjust the air distribution to the distribution towards the windscreen and side
"Windscreen" position; its associated windows.
orange indicator lamp comes on. F To switch it off, press this button; its
F Check that the recirculation of interior air is indicator lamp goes off.
deactivated; its indicator lamp must be off.
F Switch on the air conditioning by pressing The system allows the manual modification of
the "A/C" button; its orange indicator lamp air flow without causing automatic deactivation
comes on. of the automatic visibility programme.
In cold weather, this system heats the bottom of

With Stop & Start, when the demisting, With Stop & Start, when demisting – the windscreen, as well as the areas alongside
air conditioning and air flow functions are defrosting has been activated, STOP the windscreen pillars.
activated, STOP mode is not available. mode is not available. Without changing the settings for the air
conditioning system, it allows faster release
of the windscreen wiper blades when they
are frozen to the windscreen and helps avoid
the accumulation of snow resulting from the
operation of the windscreen wipers.
93
Switching on/off Rear screen demist – Switch off the demisting/defrosting of

defrost the rear screen and door mirrors as
soon as appropriate, as lower current
consumption results in reduced fuel
consumption.
Rear screen demisting – defrosting can

only be operated when the engine is
running.
Switching on
F With the engine running, press this button; F Press this button to demist/ Programmable heating
its orange indicator lamp comes on. defrost the rear screen and
The programmable heating operates
The system is active if the exterior temperature (depending on version) the door
independently of the engine.
is below 0°C. mirrors.
With the engine off, it preheats the coolant
The orange indicator lamp associated with the
F Pressing the button again switches off the circuit to ensure optimal engine operating
button comes on.
system; its indicator lamp goes off. temperature as soon as it is started up.
The system is automatically deactivated every The programmable heating is switched on
time the engine is switched off.
Switching off by the long range remote control. It may be
Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically immediate or deferred depending on the
to prevent an excessive consumption of programming.
current.
F It is possible to stop the
demisting/defrosting operation
before it is switched off
automatically by pressing the
button again.
The indicator lamp associated with the button
goes off.
94
1. Functions scrolling menu buttons.

The volumetric alarm movement detector
2. Function symbols:
may be disrupted by the programmable
clock, temperature, operating time,
heating air flows when it is operating.
programmed time, heater operation,
To avoid any untimely triggering of the
heating management.
Always switch off the programmable alarm when using the programmable
heating, it is advisable that the volumetric 3. Digital displays:
heating when refuelling to avoid any risk of
3
monitoring is deactivated. time, temperature, operating time,
fire or explosion. programmed time or heating level.
The programmable heating is supplied by
4. Off button.
the vehicle's fuel tank. Before use, ensure
5. On button.
that there is enough fuel left in the tank. If
the fuel in the tank is at the reserve level, Adapting the programmable heating
we strongly recommend that you do not enables you to use it to preheat the
programme the heating. passenger compartment of your vehicle.
To avoid the risks of poisoning or Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
asphyxia, the programmable heating must workshop. Operating indicator lamp
not be used, even for short periods, in
a closed environment such as a garage or
workshop which are not equipped with an
exhaust gas extraction system.
Do not park the vehicle on a flammable Presentation
surface (dry grass, dead leaves, paper,
etc.) – Risk of fire!
Remote control
on red: deferred switching on programmed.

flashing red: heating on.
off: heating off.
95
Function display Setting the time Immediate switching on
F Press the buttons 1 several times to display F After having displayed the time using F Press button 5 until the message "OK" is
the functions. the buttons 1, press on buttons 4 and displayed.
The first press on the left or right button 5 simultaneously within 10 seconds. When the signal has been received, the
displays the time. message "OK" is displayed along with the
Then, the left button is used to scroll to the operating time.
programmed time then the heating level This symbol will flash.
("C1" to "C5"). The heater starts and this symbol is
The right button is used to scroll to the displayed.
passenger compartment temperature then F Set the time with the buttons 1.
the heater operating time when immediately F Press simultaneously on buttons 4 and 5 to This red indicator flashes during
switched on. save it. heating.
This symbol will be displayed.

The passenger compartment temperature F To deactivate the function, press button
information is only available when the 4 until the message "OK" is displayed.
engine is off.
This symbol and the indicator lamp

will turn off.
96
F Adjust the operating time by pressing Programming the departure time

During these operations, if the message
buttons 1: in 10 minute increments to
"FAIL" is displayed, it means that the F Press buttons 1 to display the programmed
a maximum of 30 minutes.
signal has not been received. Restart the time.
F Simultaneously press buttons 4 and 5 to
procedure after having changed position.
save the operating time.
3
Adjusting the operating time This symbol will be displayed.
F After having displayed the programmed

time, press buttons 4 and 5 simultaneously
The factory value setting is 30 minutes. within 10 seconds.
This symbol will flash.
Deferred switching on
You must programme your departure time F Set the time by pressing buttons 1.
for the system to automatically calculate the F Simultaneously press buttons 4 and 5 to
optimal time to start the heater. save it.
F Press the buttons 1 to display the operating
time.
F After having displayed the operating time, Activation/Deactivation

press buttons 4 and 5 simultaneously within F After having displayed the programmed
10 seconds. time using buttons 1, press button 5 until the
message "OK" is displayed.
This symbol will flash.
When the signal has been received,
the message "OK" is displayed
along with this symbol.
97
This red indicator lamps comes on Changing the heating level Changing the battery
until heating begins.
The system has 5 heating levels: C1 (lowest The remote control is powered by a 6 V-28L
level) to C5 (highest level). battery, which is provided.
This symbol is displayed when the Information on the screen indicates when this
F After having displayed the heating level
heater starts. battery needs to be changed.
using buttons 1, press simultaneously on
buttons 4 and 5.
The letter "C" will flash.
HTM: Heat Thermo Management
F Adjust the heating level by pressing
buttons 1.
F Simultaneously press buttons 4 and 5 to
F To deactivate the programming, press save the selected level.
button 4 until the message "OK" is The letter "C" will be displayed.
displayed.
This symbol will disappear.
The presets are replaced by the new

entries. The programmed times are
During these operations, if the message
memorised until the next change. F Unclip the case.
"FAIL" is displayed, it means that the
When the start time is activated, it is not F Replace the battery observing the
signal has not been received. Restart the
possible to change the heating level. You polarities.
procedure after having changed position.
must first deactivate the start time. F Reinitialise the remote control.
Stopping the heating Do not throw away used batteries, take

F Press button 5. them to an approved collection point.
Operating fault
This symbol remains on.
In the event of a fault with the programmable
heating, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
This indicator lamp goes off. a qualified workshop.
98
Reinitialising the remote control Front fittings 5.

6.
Illuminated glove box
Door pockets
If the battery is disconnected or when changing
the battery, the remote control must be 7. Scented air freshener
reinitialised. 8. USB port
F After turning on the power, within the next 9. Front 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
5 seconds, press button 4 for 1 second. 10. Storage compartment or CD player or
3
If the operation is successful, the message Wireless charger
"OK" will be displayed on the remote 11. Storage compartment
control's screen. 12. Cup holder
If there is a fault, the message "FAIL" will
13. Front armrest with storage
appear.
compartment
F Start the operation again.
14. Rear 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
15. Rear blower
16. 230 V socket
Sun visor
Component which protects against sunlight
from the front or the side, also equipped with an
illuminated vanity mirror.
F With the ignition on, raise the concealing

1. Grab handle
flap; the mirror is illuminated automatically.
2. Sun visor
This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket
3. Card holder holder.
4. Storage compartment below the
steering wheel
99
Glove box Cigarette lighter/12 V USB port

F To open the glove box, raise the handle. accessory socket(s)
The glove box is lit when the lid is opened.
The USB port allows the connection of

F To use the cigarette lighter, press it in a portable device, such as an iPod ® -type digital
and wait a few seconds until it pops out audio player, or a USB memory stick.
automatically. The USB reader reads your audio files which
F To use a 12 V accessory (max power: are then transferred to the audio system and
120 W), remove the cigarette lighter and played via the vehicle's loudspeakers.
connect a suitable adaptor. These files are managed via the steering wheel
controls or from the audio system.
You can use this socket to connect a telephone
charger, a bottle warmer, etc.
After use, put the cigarette lighter back into
place straight away. When connected to the USB port,
the portable device can be charged
It houses the front passenger airbag
automatically.
deactivation switch A.
The connection of an electrical device While charging, a message is displayed
It also gives access to the housing for scented
not approved by PEUGEOT, such as if the power consumption of the portable
air freshener B cartridges.
a USB charger, may adversely affect the device exceeds the amperage supplied by
operation of vehicle electrical systems, the vehicle.
Never drive with the glove box open when causing faults such as poor radio
a passenger is at the front – it may cause reception or interference with displays in For more details on the Audio equipment and
injury during sharp deceleration! the screens. telematics, and particularly the USB port,
consult the corresponding section.
100
The USB port also allows a smartphone to be - TNF tweeters: Inverted dome aluminium Operation
connected by MirrorLinkTM, Android Auto ® or technology giving optimum sound
CarPlay ®, so that certain applications on the dispersion and very detailed treble. The charger works with the engine running and
smartphone can be used on the touch screen. - Sub-woofer: 200 mm triple coil Power in STOP mode of Stop & Start.
Flower™ technology for defined and Charging is managed by the smartphone.
dynamic reproduction of low frequencies. For versions with Keyless Entry and Starting,
3
- 12-way active amplification – 515 Watts: operation of the charger may be interrupted
Hybrid Class AB/Class D technology
FOCAL® premium Hi-Fi providing breadth and finesse in the high
when opening a door or switching off the
system frequency signals, as well as real power in
ignition.
the bass.
Charging
Wireless charger F First ensure that the charging zone is clear
of other articles.
F Place a portable device in the middle of the
charging zone.
F Once the portable device is detected, the
charge indicator lamp comes on in green.
Your vehicle is equipped with a high-fidelity

sound system designed by the French brand
FOCAL®, a specialist in acoustics for more
This system allows the wireless charging of F Charging of the portable device's battery
than 35 years and recognised throughout the
a portable device, such as a smartphone, using then starts.
world for its patented innovations and its unique
the principle of magnetic induction, based on F Once the portable device's battery is fully
audio signature.
the Qi 1.1 standard. charged, the charge indicator lamp goes off.
The portable device to be charged must be
10 speakers incorporating exclusive FOCAL®
compatible with the Qi standard, either by
technologies offer the pleasure of pure and
design or by using a compatible holder or shell. The system only supports charging one
detailed sound inside the vehicle:
The charging zone is identified by the Qi portable device at a time.
- High fidelity woofer/mid-range speakers:
symbol.
Polyglass technology delivering balance
and precise sound.
101
Do not leave any metal objects (coins, Flashing, orange Foreign object Front armrest
keys, vehicle remote control, etc.) in detected in the
Comfort device for the driver and front
the charging area while a device is charging zone.
passenger.
being charged – risk of overheating or Portable device not
It includes a refrigerated storage space.
interrupting the charging process! well centred in the
charging zone.
Opening
Fixed, orange Fault with the
portable device's
battery meter.
Temperature of the
portable device's
battery too high.
Checking operation Charger fault.
The state of the charge indicator lamp allows

F Press the lever beneath the cover.
the operation of the charger to be monitored.
The cover opens in two parts.
If the indicator lamp is lit orange:
Charge indicator
Meaning
lamp Storage
Off Engine switched off.
No compatible portable - remove the portable device, then place it
device detected. back in the middle of the charging zone.
Charging finished. or
- remove the portable device and try again in
Fixed, green Compatible portable a quarter of an hour.
device detected. If the problem persists, have the system
Charging. checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The small removable tray can be installed in
front of or behind the storage space.
A ventilation nozzle circulates fresh air.
102
Closing F select a delivery intensity to activate the F Ignition on, pull the tab 1 in the direction of
system, the arrow to release the used cartridge.
or F Remove the used cartridge 2 from its
F select "OFF" to deactivate it. housing.
The changes are taken into account The air freshener stops working with the
immediately. cartridge removed.
F Fold the two parts of the cover back.

The scented air freshener is also
managed by the i-Cockpit Amplify
function.
3
For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify
Scented air freshener
A complete air freshener system for the
passenger compartment. It is supplied by
a three-fragrance cartridge. Changing the cartridge
This system operates only with the engine
Access to the cartridge is in the glove box.
running.
Activation/Settings
The activation and adjustment of the air F Remove the two seals from the new
freshener are done from the touch screen: cartridge.
- either directly from the Applications menu, F Insert the new cartridge into its housing
- or by personalising an ambience for the observing the direction of fitment.
i-Cockpit Amplify function. The air freshener is ready to operate again.
From the Applications menu:
F select "Scented air freshener",

F select a fragrance from the three offered,
103
Recommendations To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:

Do not discard the original cartridge, which - only use mats which are suited to the
serves as a blanking plug if the air freshener is fixings already present in the vehicle;
not used. these fixings must be used,
Retain the cartridge sealing caps which serve - never place one mat on top of another.
as packaging if the cartridge is not used. The use of mats not approved by
Replacement cartridges are available from PEUGEOT may interfere with access to
PEUGEOT dealers or from the brand's internet the pedals and hinder the operation of the
website. cruise control/speed limiter.
The mats approved by PEUGEOT have
two fixings located below the seat.
As a safety measure:
- use only the cartridges designed for
the system,
- do not try to fit or remove a cartridge
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the
when driving,
driver's side use only the fixings provided in the
- do not try to refill or dismantle the
wallet attached.
cartridges.
Keep cartridges out of the reach of
The other mats are simply placed on the
carpet.
Courtesy lamps
children or pets.
Do not allow the fluid in the cartridge to Removing
come into contact with the skin or eyes.
In the event of ingestion of the fluid in the To remove the mat on the driver's side:
cartridge, consult a doctor, showing them F move the seat as far back as possible,
the product packaging or label. F unclip the fixings,
F remove the mat.
Mats Refitting
To refit the mat on the driver's side:
Fitting F position the mat correctly,
F reattach the fixings by pressing,
F check that the mat is secured correctly. 1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Front map reading lamps
104
Permanent lighting.
Interior ambient lighting
The dimmed passenger compartment lighting
In permanent lighting mode, the lighting time improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
varies according to the circumstances: is poor.
- when the ignition is off, approximately ten
3
minutes,
- in energy economy mode, approximately
thirty seconds,
3. Rear courtesy lamp
- with the engine running, unlimited.
4. Rear map reading lamps
When the courtesy lamp is in the
Front and rear courtesy "permanent lighting" position, the rear
lamps courtesy lamp also comes on, except if it
In this position, the courtesy is in the "permanently off" position.
lamp comes on gradually: To switch off the rear courtesy lamp, put it
in the "permanently off" position.
At night, the interior ambient lighting comes
- when the vehicle is unlocked, on automatically when the sidelamps are
- when the key is removed from the ignition, switched on.
- when opening a door,
- when the remote control locking button is
Front and rear map reading
activated, in order to locate your vehicle. lamps
Take care not to put anything in contact
It switches off gradually:
with the courtesy lamps.
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
F With the ignition on, operate the
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
corresponding switch.
Permanently off.
105
- illuminated bezels for the front cup holders,

- a light source for each of the front door
Rear fittings
pockets, 230 V/50 Hz power socket
- illuminated rails along the panoramic
sunroof blind.
The ambient lighting switches off automatically

when the sidelamps are switched off.
The interior ambient lighting can

be activated or deactivated and its
brightness adjusted in the Vehicle/
Driving menu of the touch screen.
It is located at the back of the centre console
beneath a protective cover.
This socket (max. power: 150 W) operates with
The interior ambient lighting is also the engine running, as well as in STOP mode of
managed by the i-Cockpit Amplify Stop & Start.
function. F Raise the protective cover.
For more information on the F Check that the green indicator lamp is on.
i-Cockpit Amplify function, refer F Connect your multimedia or other electrical
Depending on the version, the ambient lighting
to the corresponding section. device (telephone charger, laptop computer,
includes:
- two LEDs located in the front courtesy lamp, CD-DVD player, bottle warmer, etc.).
- a light source in the storage compartment at
the front of the centre console, In the event of a fault, the green warning lamp
- a light source for each of the front footwells, flashes.
- illuminated guides on the front door panels Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
and on the sides of the centre console, a qualified workshop.
106
Connect only one device at a time to the The connection of an electrical device On the passenger side, do not forget to
socket (no extension lead or multi-socket not approved by PEUGEOT, such as fold it before placing the backrest in the
connector). a USB charger, may adversely affect the table position.
Connect only devices with class II operation of vehicle electrical systems, For more information on the Front seats
insulation (shown on the device). causing faults such as poor radio and, in particular, using the "table"
Do not use a device with a metal case reception or interference with displays in position for the backrest, refer to the
3
(electric shaver, etc.). the screens. corresponding section.
Do not place hard or heavy objects on the

As a safety measure, when electrical
table.
consumption is high and when required by
the vehicle's electrical system (particular "Aircraft" type tables They could become dangerous projectiles
in the event of emergency braking or
weather conditions, electrical overload,
impact.
etc.), the current supply to the socket will be
cut off; the green indicator lamp goes off.
Side blinds
12 V accessory socket
F To use the table, lower it fully until it locks in

the low position.
F To store it, raise the table, passing the point
of resistance, to the high position.
Fitted to the windows in row 2, they protect the
passenger compartment from the sun's rays.
F To connect a 12 V accessory (max. power: F Pull the central tab to unroll the blind.
120 W), lift the cover and connect a suitable F Position the blind's clip on the hook.
adaptor.
107
1. Load space cover F Position the left and right ends of the roller
Always guide the blind slowly using the
2. 12 V accessory socket (maximum in cut-outs A, with the mobile flap at the
tab, both up and down.
power: 120 Watts) front.
3. Boot lamp F Pull out the roller until it reaches the boot
4. Luggage retaining strap pillars.
Storage boxes F Insert the guides of the roller into the rails in
5. Storage brackets of the load space
pillars B.
cover
6. Armrest with cup holder and storage
7. Open storage compartment
Removal
8. Concertina boards
9. Stowing rings
Depending on version, the storage boxes are

fitted in the floor, at the foot of the outer seats
on the second row.
Load space cover
On the left side, it may also contain the In 5-seat configuration, it is installed behind
temporary puncture repair kit. the second row seats, with the third row seats
To open them, lift the cover by the notch. stored folded away.
In 7-seat configuration, it is stored behind the
third row seats.
Boot fittings Installation F Remove the guides of the roller from the
rails in pillars B.
F Guide the roller as it reels in.
F Unlock the roller by pressing one of the
handles located at the ends of the roller
bracket.
108
Storage behind the 3rd row seats When sharp deceleration occurs, objects
Behind the front seats
placed on the load space cover can turn
into projectiles.
High load retaining net
3
F Fold down the rear seats.
F Make sure the third row seats are folded F Insert the ends of the bar, one after the
away. other, into the fixing points of the roof.
F Fold the first two concertina boards. F Attach the net's straps to the lower
F Position the roller in the space located anchoring points, located in the housing of
above the armrest, side by side, tilting it the Top Tether fixings.
slightly. F Pull on the straps to stretch the net.
F Slide the roller to the stop position, until it
reaches the notches arranged at the back of
the boot, with the two hinges facing down. This removable net allows the entire loading
F Unfold the third row seats. volume to be used up to the roof:
The folded concertina boards can be placed in - behind the front seats (1st row) when the
the horizontal or upright position. rear seats are folded down,
To fold the third row seats with the roller - behind the rear seats (2nd row) when the
stored at the back, it is necessary to raise the load space cover is removed.
concertina boards in order to give access to the
seat unlocking controls (red straps). It offers protection to the occupants when
very sharp braking occurs.
109
Behind the rear seats F To connect a 12 V accessory (max power:

The lighting time varies according to the
120 W), remove the cap and connect an
circumstances:
appropriate adaptor. - when the ignition is off, approximately
F Switch on the ignition. ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode,
The connection of an electrical device approximately thirty seconds,
not approved by PEUGEOT, such as - with the engine running, unlimited.
a USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor radio
reception or interference with displays in
the screens.
F Remove the load space cover.

F Insert the ends of the bar, one after the
other, into the fixing points of the roof. Boot lighting
F Attach the straps of the net to the lower
rings, located on each side trim of the boot.
F Pull on the straps to stretch the net.
12 V accessory socket
This comes on automatically when the boot is

opened and goes off automatically when the
boot is closed.
110
Lighting and visibility
Without AUTO lighting In the lighting off and sidelamps modes, the
Exterior lighting control driver can switch on the main beam headlamps
stalk temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining
a pull on the stalk.
Main lighting
Displays
Selection of main lighting mode
Illumination of the corresponding indicator
F Turn ring A to align the desired symbol with lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the
the marking. lighting selected is on.
4
A fault with a lamp is signalled by
Lighting off (ignition off)/ With AUTO lighting the permanent illumination of this
Daytime running lamps (engine running). warning lamp, accompanied by the
display of a message and an audible
Automatic illumination of headlamps. signal.
Daytime running lamps/Dipped
beam/Main beam.
Foglamps
Sidelamps only.
In clear weather or rain, during the day or
at night, it is prohibited to switch on the
Dipped or main beam headlamps.
front or rear foglamps. In these situations,
Headlamp dipping the power of their beams may dazzle other
drivers. They should only be used in fog
or snow.
"Highway function" In these weather conditions, it is your
On versions fitted with "Full LED" responsibility to switch on the foglamps
technology headlamps, the range of the and dipped beam headlamps manually as
dipped beam headlamps is automatically the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
increased once the speed of the vehicle is light.
above 68 mph (110 km/h). Switch off the foglamps when they are no
longer necessary.
F Pull stalk B towards you to switch between
dipped and main beam headlamps or to
activate automatic headlamp dipping.
111
Rear foglamps
The sidelamps or dipped or main beam In some weather conditions (e.g. low
headlamps must be on. temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is
Rotate and release ring C:
normal; it disappears after the lamps have
F once forwards to switch on the front
been on for a few minutes.
foglamps,
F forwards a second time to switch on the rear
foglamps.
F once backwards to switch off the rear
foglamps, Never look too closely at the luminous
F backwards a second time to switch off the beam of "Full LED" headlamps: risk of
front foglamps. serious eye injury.
The main or dipped beam headlamps
must be on.
Switching off the lamps when the
ignition is switched off Travelling abroad
On switching off the ignition, all of the If using your vehicle in a country that
Rotate and release ring C:
lamps turn off immediately, except for drives on the other side of the road, the
F forwards to switch on the rear foglamps.
dipped beam if automatic guide-me-home headlamps must be adjusted to avoid
F backwards to switch them off.
lighting is activated. dazzling oncoming drivers.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
Front and rear foglamps workshop.
Switching on the lamps after the
ignition is switched off
To reactivate the lighting control, rotate
ring A to the 0 position – lamps off, then to
the desired position.
On opening the driver's door a temporary Daytime running lamps/
audible signal warns the driver that the sidelamps
lighting is on.
The LEDs of these lamps light up automatically
They will go off automatically after
when the engine starts, at the front and back of
a period of time that depends on the state
the vehicle.
of charge in battery (entering energy-
saving mode).
112
F Left: lower the lighting control stalk passing Parking lamps

the point of resistance.
F Right: raise the lighting control stalk passing
the point of resistance.
If you forget to cancel the direction

indicators for more than twenty seconds,
the volume of the audible signal will
increase if the speed is above 37 mph
(60 km/h).
They provide the following functions:

- Daytime running lamps (lighting control
stalk at position "0" or "AUTO" with
Three flashes Vehicle side marking by illumination of the
4
adequate light level). F Press briefly upwards or downwards, sidelamps on the traffic side only.
- Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at position without going beyond the point of F Depending on version, within one minute of
"AUTO" with low light levels or "Sidelamps resistance; the direction indicators will flash switching off the ignition operate the lighting
only" or "Dipped/main beam headlamps"). 3 times. control stalk up or down depending on the
traffic side (for example, when parking on the
On versions fitted with LED direction indicators, left, turn the lighting control stalk upwards;
the line of LEDs is illuminated sequentially. the right-hand sidelamps come on).
This is confirmed by an audible signal and
Direction indicators The brightness of the daytime running lamps
is reduced during sequential operation of the illumination of the corresponding direction
direction indicators. indicator lamp in the instrument panel.
To switch off the parking lamps, return the
lighting control stalk to the central position.
113
Headlamp adjustment Automatic adjustment Automatic illumination of

of "Full LED" technology headlamps
Manual adjustment of headlamps
When a low level of ambient light is detected by
halogen headlamps the sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps,
sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are
switched on automatically, without any action
on the part of the driver. They may also come
on if rain is detected, at the same time as
automatic operation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to
a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers
are switched off, the lamps are switched off
automatically.
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road
users, the height of the halogen headlamps
This system automatically adjusts the height
should be adjusted according to the load in the
vehicle.
of the beams from this type of headlamp, Switching on
according to the load in the vehicle, to avoid
0 Driver only or driver + front passenger. causing a nuisance to other road users.
1 Driver only or driver + front passenger +
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
row 3.
comes on in the instrument panel,
2 7 people.
accompanied by a message and an
3 7 people + loads in the boot. audible signal.
4 Not used.
The system then places the headlamp beams
5 Driver + loads in the boot.
in the lowest position.
6 Not used. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop. F Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position.
When the function is activated, a message is
also displayed.
Do not touch the "Full LED" headlamps.
The initial setting is position "0". Risk of electrocution!
114
Switching off Automatic guide-me-home F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
using the lighting control stalk.
F Turn the ring to another position. lighting F A further "headlamp flash" switches the
Deactivation of the function is accompanied by function off.
With the "Automatic illumination of headlamps"
the display of a message.
function activated, under low ambient light, the
sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps and door Switching off
mirror spotlamps come on automatically when
For versions without "Automatic illumination
the ignition is switched off.
Operating fault Activation, deactivation and the duration of the
of headlamps", the manual guide-me-home
lighting switches off automatically after
4
In the event of a malfunction of the guide-me-home lighting are set in the vehicle 30 seconds.
sunshine sensor, the lighting comes parameters menu in the screen. For versions with "Automatic illumination of
on, this warning lamp is displayed in headlamps", the period of operation of the
the instrument panel accompanied manual guide-me-home lighting is the same
by an audible signal and/or Manual guide-me-home as that set for the automatic guide-me-home
a message. lighting lighting.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
The temporary illumination of the dipped beam
headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been Automatic exterior welcome
switched off makes the driver's exit easier
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
when the light is poor.
lighting
combined with the rain sensor and located
With the "Automatic illumination of headlamps"
at the top centre of the windscreen behind
function activated, under low ambient light, the
the rear view mirror; the associated
sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps and door
functions would no longer be controlled.
Switching on mirror spotlamps come on automatically when
the vehicle is unlocked.
Activation, deactivation and the duration of the

In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may exterior welcome lighting are set in the vehicle
detect sufficient light. In this case, the parameters menu in the screen.
lighting will not come on automatically.
115
Welcome lighting To make your approach to the vehicle easier,

these illuminate:
Automatic headlamp
Availability of this function depends on version.
- the zones facing the driver's and dipping
passenger's doors,
System which automatically changes between
- the zones forward of the mirror and
dipped and main beam according to the
F Make a short press on this rearward of the front doors.
ambient light level and the driving conditions,
remote control button.
using a camera located at the top of the
Switching on windscreen.
The sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps,
When the front courtesy lamp
number plate lamps and door mirror spotlamps
switch is in this position,
come on for 30 seconds. This system is a driving aid.
the spotlamps come on
automatically: The driver remains responsible for the
Pressing again before the end of the timed vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the
period switches off the lighting immediately. - when you unlock the vehicle, prevailing conditions of light, visibility,
- on opening a door, traffic and observation of driving and
- when a request to locate the vehicle is vehicle regulations.
received from the remote control.
Door mirror spotlamps Whatever the position of the front courtesy
The system will be operational as soon as
lamp switch, they also come on with the
you have exceeded 16 mph (25 km/h).
exterior welcome lighting and the guide-me-
If the speed drops below 9 mph (15 km/h),
home lighting.
the system no longer operates.
Switching off
They go off automatically after 30 seconds.
116
Activation/Deactivation When the system detects thick fog, it

temporarily deactivates the function.
F Turn the lighting control stalk ring to the As soon as the vehicle leaves the area of thick
"AUTO" position. fog, the function reactivates automatically.
F In the Vehicle/Driving menu,

select the "Driving functions" This indicator lamp goes off while
tab, then "Automatic headlamp the function is deactivated.
dip".
The system state remains in memory when the
4
ignition is switched off. Pause
If the situation requires a change of headlamp
Operation beam, the driver can take over at any time.
If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or if F Flashing the headlamps pauses the function
the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of and the system changes to "automatic
the main beam headlamps: illumination of headlamps" mode:
- if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam"
indicator lamps were on, the system
- dipped beam is maintained, changes to main beam,
these indicator lamps come on - if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator
in the instrument panel. lamps were on, the system changes to
dipped beam.
To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps
again.
If the ambient light level is very low and the
traffic conditions permit:
- main beam comes on
automatically: these indicator
lamps come on in the instrument
panel.
117
The system may suffer interference or not Cornering lighting

work correctly:
- under poor visibility conditions (snow,
heavy rain, etc.),
- if the windscreen is dirty, misted or
obscured (by a sticker, etc.) in front of
the camera,
- if the vehicle is facing highly reflective
signs.
When the system detects thick fog, it
temporarily deactivates the function.
Present on vehicles fitted with "Full LED"
The system is not able to detect: Without cornering lighting
technology headlamps, this system makes use
- road users that do not have their own
of the beam from a front foglamp to illuminate
lighting, such as pedestrians,
the inside of a bend, when the main or dipped Activation/Deactivation
- vehicles whose lighting is obscured
beam headlamps are on and the vehicle speed The cornering lighting can be
(for example: vehicles running behind
is below 25 mph (40 km/h) (urban driving, activated or deactivated in the
a safety barrier on a motorway),
winding road, junctions, parking manoeuvres, Vehicle/Driving menu of the touch
- vehicles at the top or bottom of
etc.). screen.
a steep slope, on winding roads, on
crossroads.
Switching on
This system starts:
- when the corresponding direction indicator
is switched on,
or
- from a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel.
Switching off
The system does not operate:
- below a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel,
With cornering lighting - above 25 mph (40 km/h),
- when reverse gear is engaged.
118
Fast wiping (heavy rain). With AUTO wiping

Wiper control stalk
Programming Normal wiping (moderate rain).
Your vehicle may also include some functions
that can be configured:
Intermittent wiping (proportional to
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
the speed of the vehicle).
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
Off.
In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or

frost present on the windscreen, around
Single wipe (press downwards or
pull the stalk briefly towards you,
then release). Rear wiper
4
the wiper arms and blades and the
windscreen seal, before operating the
or
wipers.
Automatic wiping (press
down, then release).
Single wipe (pull the stalk
Do not operate the wipers on a dry briefly towards you).
windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold
conditions, ensure that the wiper blades
are not stuck to the windscreen before B. Rear wiper selection ring: turn the ring to
operating the wipers. Without AUTO wiping place the desired symbol against the marking.
Off.
Windscreen wipers
A. Wiping speed control stalk: raise or lower Intermittent wipe.
the stalk to the desired position.
119
Wash-wipe. Front screenwash To avoid damaging the wiper blades,

do not operate the screenwash if the
screenwash reservoir is empty.
Only operate the screenwash if there
Turn the ring fully; the rear screen wash, then is no risk of the fluid freezing on the
the rear wiper automatically operate for a set windscreen and hindering visibility. Always
duration. use screenwash fluid suitable for low
temperatures during the winter period.
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
will come into operation automatically if the
front windscreen wipers are operating.
Special position of the
The system is activated or deactivated via the F Pull the wiper control stalk towards you. windscreen wipers
vehicle parameters menu in the screen. The screenwash and windscreen wiper operate
for as long as the control stalk is pulled. This position is used for cleaning or
This function is activated by default.
Termination of the screenwash is followed by replacement of the wiper blades. It can also be
a final wiping cycle. useful, in winter, to release the wiper blades
from the windscreen.
In the event of snow or hard frost or if
a bicycle carrier is fitted to a towbar,
The front screenwash includes a wiper
deactivate the automatic rear wiper via the
blade system with integral washer jets.
vehicle settings menu.
The screenwash fluid is sprayed along the
length of the wiper blade. This improves
visibility and reduces the consumption of
screenwash fluid.
In some cases, depending on the contents
or colour of the liquid and on the outdoor
brightness, the liquid spray may be hardly
noticeable.
120
F In the minute following ignition switch-off, Switching on F Give the control stalk another brief push
any operation of the wiper control stalk will downwards or place the control stalk in
position the wiper blades vertically. another position (Int, 1 or 2).
F To park the wiper blades again, switch on
the ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
This warning lamp goes off in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
a message.
To maintain the effectiveness of the wiper The automatic rain sensitive windscreen
4
blades, it is advisable to: wipers must be reactivated by pushing the
- handle them with care, control stalk downwards, if the ignition has
- clean them regularly using soapy F Give a short downwards push to the control been off for more than one minute.
water, stalk.
- avoid using them to retain cardboard A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has
on the windscreen, been accepted.
- replace them at the first signs of wear.
This warning lamp comes on in the Malfunction
instrument panel, accompanied by
a message. If a fault occurs with the automatic rain
sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in
intermittent mode.
Have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
Switching off a qualified workshop.
Automatic windscreen
wipers
Do not cover the rain sensor, combined
The windscreen wipers operate automatically, with the sunshine sensor and located at
adapting their speed to the intensity of the the top centre of the windscreen.
rainfall without any action on the part of the Switch off the automatic rain sensitive
driver. wipers when using an automatic car wash.
Detection of rainfall is by means of a sensor at In winter, it is advisable to wait until
the top centre of the windscreen, behind the the windscreen is completely clear of
rear view mirror. ice before activating the automatic rain
sensitive wipers.
121
Safety
General safety We draw your attention to the following Installation of accessory radio
recommendations points:
- The fitting of electrical equipment
communication transmitters
Before installing a radio communication
or accessories not approved by transmitter, you must contact a PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT may cause excessive dealer for the specification of transmitters
Labels are attached in different places on current consumption and faults and which can be fitted (frequency, maximum
your vehicle. They include safety warnings failures with the electrical system of power, aerial position, specific installation
as well as identification information for your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT requirements), in line with the Vehicle
your vehicle. Do not remove them: they dealer for information on the range of Electromagnetic Compatibility
are an integral part of your vehicle. recommended accessories. Directive (2004/104/EC).
- As a safety measure, access to
the diagnostic socket, used for the
vehicle's electronic systems, is
reserved strictly for PEUGEOT dealers
or qualified workshops, equipped
For any work on your vehicle, use with the special tools required (risk
a qualified workshop that has the technical of malfunctions of the vehicle's
information, skills and equipment required, electronic systems that could cause Depending on country regulations, some
all of which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to breakdowns or serious accidents). safety equipment may be compulsory:
provide. The manufacturer cannot be held high visibility safety vests, warning
responsible if this advice is not triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs,
followed. spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit,
- Any modification or adaptation not mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc.
intended or authorised by PEUGEOT
or carried out without meeting the
technical requirements defined by
the manufacturer will result in the
suspension of the legal and contractual
warranties.
122
Safety
Pressing this button again immediately cancels

Hazard warning lamps the request; the green LED goes off.
The green LED remains on (without flashing)

when communication is established.
It goes off at the end of the call.
"Peugeot Connect SOS" immediately locates

your vehicle and contacts you in your own
language**, and – if necessary – requests that
relevant emergency services be dispatched**.
F Press the central part of the multifunction In countries where the service is not available,
steering wheel. or when the locating service has been
expressly declined, the call is sent directly
5
F When you press this red button, all four to the emergency services (112) without the
direction indicators flash.
Emergency or assistance vehicle location.
They can operate with the ignition off. call
Automatic operation of * In accordance with the general conditions of
hazard warning lamps service available from dealers and subject
When braking in an emergency, depending on to technological and technical limitations.
the force of deceleration, the hazard warning
lamps come on automatically. They switch off
automatically the first time you accelerate. ** According to the geographic coverage of
It is also possible to switch them off by pressing "Peugeot Connect SOS", "Peugeot Connect
the switch on the dashboard.
Peugeot Connect SOS Assistance" and the official national
language chosen by the owner of the
In an emergency, press this
vehicle.
Horn button for more than 2 seconds.
The list of countries covered and of
The flashing green LED and
Audible warning system to alert other road PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available
the voice message confirm
users to an imminent danger. from dealers or on the website for your
that the call has been made to
country.
the "Peugeot Connect SOS"
service*.
123
Safety
If the red indicator lamp flashes: replace the Pressing this button again immediately cancels
If an impact is detected by the airbag
back-up battery. the request.
control unit, an emergency call is made
The cancellation is confirmed by a voice
automatically and independently of the In either case, the emergency and assistance message.
deployment of any airbags. calls may not function.
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
possible.
Geolocation
If you benefit from the Peugeot Connect
Packs offer with the SOS and assistance
pack included, there are additional
The system's fault does not prevent the
services available to you in your personal
vehicle from being driven.
space, via the website for your country. You can deactivate geolocation by
simultaneously pressing the "Peugeot Connect
SOS" and "Peugeot Connect Assistance"
Peugeot Connect buttons, followed by pressing "Peugeot
Operation of the system Assistance Connect Assistance" to confirm.
When the ignition is switched Press this button for more than To reactivate geolocation, simultaneously press
on, the green indicator lamp 2 seconds to request assistance if the "Peugeot Connect SOS" and "Peugeot
comes on for 3 seconds the vehicle breaks down. Connect Assistance" buttons again, followed
indicating that the system is by pressing "Peugeot Connect Assistance" to
operating correctly. confirm.
For all countries except Russia, Belarus A voice message confirms that the call has
and Kazakhstan. been made**.
If the red indicator lamp flashes If you purchased your vehicle outside the
then goes off: there is a system PEUGEOT network, we invite you to have
fault. a dealer check the configuration of these
** According to the geographic coverage of services and, if desired, modify it to suit
If the red indicator lamp is on continuously: "Peugeot Connect SOS", "Peugeot Connect your wishes. In a multilingual country,
replace the back-up battery. Assistance" and the official national configuration is possible in the official
language chosen by the owner of the national language of your choice.
For Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan. vehicle.
The list of countries covered and of
If the red indicator lamp is on PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available
continuously: there is a system from dealers or on the website for your
fault. country.
124
Safety
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of Trailer stability assist (TSA)
For technical reasons and, in particular,
emergency braking.
to improve the quality of PEUGEOT This system allows control of the vehicle to be
The electronic brake force distribution system
CONNECT services to customers, the retained when towing a trailer, so as to avoid
manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.
manufacturer reserves the right to carry the risk of snaking.
out updates to the vehicle's on-board
telematic system. Emergency braking assistance
In an emergency, this system enables you to
reach the optimum braking pressure more Anti-lock braking system
quickly and therefore reduce the stopping
Electronic stability control distance.
(ABS) and electronic brake
(ESC) It is triggered in relation to the speed at which force distribution (EBFD)
the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by The fixed illumination of this warning
A set of the following Electronic Stability
5
a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and lamp signals that there is a fault with
systems:
an increase in braking efficiency. the ABS.
- anti-lock braking system (ABS) and
electronic brake force distribution (EBFD), The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive
- emergency braking assistance (EBA), Anti-slip regulation (ASR) carefully at moderate speed.
- wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
This system optimises traction in order to
control, workshop as soon as possible.
avoid wheel slip by acting on the brakes of
- dynamic stability control (DSC).
the driving wheels and on the engine. It also
- trailer stability assist (TSA). Illumination of this warning lamp,
improves the directional stability of the vehicle
on acceleration. linked with the STOP and ABS
warning lamps, accompanied by the
Definitions display of a message and an audible
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
signal, signals that there is a fault
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) If there is a difference between the path with the electronic brake force
and electronic brake force followed by the vehicle and that required by the distribution (EBFD).
distribution (EBFD) driver, this system monitors each wheel and You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
These systems improve the stability and automatically acts on the brake of one or more Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle workshop.
and contribute towards improved control in to the required path, within the limits of the laws
corners, in particular on poor or slippery road of physics.
surfaces.
125
Safety
Deactivation of the function is done

Normal operation of the ABS may make The use of snow tyres is strongly
in the Vehicle/Driving menu of the
itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake recommended on surfaces offering low
touch screen.
pedal. levels of adhesion.
It is confirmed by the display of a message.
In emergency braking, press very Anti-slip regulation (ASR)/ The ASR system no longer acts on the
firmly and maintain this pressure. operation of the engine.
Dynamic stability control
(DSC)
Reactivation
When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
Operation The ASR system is reactivated automatically
ensure that these are approved for your These systems are activated automatically every time the ignition is switched back on or
vehicle. every time the vehicle is started. from 31 mph (50 km/h).
They come into operation in the event of Below 31 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate it
a problem with grip or trajectory. manually:
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
Reactivation of the function is done
a qualified workshop. This is indicated by flashing of this from the Vehicle/Driving menu of
warning lamp in the instrument the touch screen.
panel.
Intelligent traction control It is confirmed by the display of a message.
system Deactivation
Depending on version, your vehicle has In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle Operating fault
a system to help driving on snow: intelligent which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft Illumination of this warning lamp,
traction control. ground, etc.), it may be advisable to deactivate accompanied by the display of
This system detects situations of poor surface the ASR system, so that the wheels can turn a message and an audible signal,
grip that could make it difficult to move off freely and regain grip. indicates a fault with the system.
or make progress on deep fresh snow or Reactivate the system when grip conditions
compacted snow. allow. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
In these situations, the intelligent traction
workshop to have the systems checked.
control limits the amount of wheel spin to
provide the best traction and trajectory control
for your vehicle.
126
Safety
ASR/DSC Trailer stability assist Malfunction

These systems offer increased safety Should a fault occur with the system,
When towing, this system reduces the risk of
in normal driving, but they should not this warning lamp comes on in the
the vehicle or trailer swaying.
encourage the driver to take extra risks or instrument panel, accompanied by
drive at high speed. the display of a message and an
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, audible signal.
snow, ice) that the risk of loss of grip
If you continue to tow a trailer, reduce your
increases. It is therefore important for your Operation speed and drive carefully!
safety to keep these systems activated in
The system is activated automatically when the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
all conditions, and particularly in difficult
ignition is switched on. workshop to have the system checked.
conditions.
The correct operation of these The electronic stability control (ESC) must not
systems depends on observation of have any faults. The trailer stability assist system offers
5
the manufacturer's recommendations Between 37 and 99 mph (60 and 160 km/h), if increased safety in normal driving,
regarding as much the wheels (tyres and the system detects oscillations (snaking) in the provided that the recommendations on
rims), braking and electronic components movement of the trailer, it acts on the brakes to towing a trailer are observed. It should not
as the assembly and repair procedures stabilise the trailer and, if necessary, reduces encourage the driver to take risks, such
used by PEUGEOT dealers. engine power to slow down the vehicle. as towing a trailer in adverse operating
The use of snow tyres is recommended, conditions (overloading, failure to observe
in order to be able to benefit from the the trailer nose weight, worn or under-
The correction is signalled by the
efficiency of these systems in winter inflated tyres, faulty braking system, etc.)
flashing of this indicator lamp in the
conditions. or drive at too high a speed.
instrument panel and illumination of
In this case, it is essential to equip the In certain cases, oscillation of the trailer
the brake lamps.
four wheels with tyres approved for your may not be detected by the ESC system,
vehicle. For information on the weights and towed particularly with a light trailer.
loads, refer to the "Technical data" section or When driving on slippery or poor surfaces,
the registration certificate for your vehicle. the system may not be able to prevent
For advice on driving safely when Towing sudden snaking of the trailer.
a trailer, refer to the corresponding section.
127
Safety
Advanced Grip Control Operating modes All terrain (mud, damp grass,
etc.)
Special patented traction control system which
This mode, when moving off,
improves traction on snow, mud and sand.
allows considerable spin on
This system, the operation of which has been
the wheel with the least grip to
optimised for each situation, allows you to
optimise clearing of the mud
manoeuvre in most conditions of poor grip
and to regain grip. At the same
(encountered during touring use).
time, the wheel with the most
Associated with all-season M+S (Mud and
grip is controlled in such a way
Snow) tyres, this system offers a compromise
as to transmit as much torque as
between safety, adhesion and traction.
possible.
The accelerator pedal should be pressed
sufficiently to allow the system to use the power When moving, the system optimises wheel spin
of the engine. Operation at high engine speeds to respond to the driver's requirements as fully
is completely normal. as possible.
A five-position selector knob allows you to
Standard (ESC) (mode active up to 31 mph (50 km/h))
choose the setting best suited to the driving This mode is calibrated for a low
conditions encountered.
Sand
level of wheel spin, based on the
An indicator lamp associated with each mode different levels of grip normally This mode allows little spin on the two driving
comes on, accompanied by the display of encountered on the road. wheels at the same time to allow the vehicle to
a message to confirm your choice. move forward and limit the risks of getting stuck
in the sand.
(mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h))
Every time the ignition is switched off, the
system automatically resets to this mode.
F Place the knob in this position.
Snow
This mode adapts its strategy to
the conditions of grip encountered Do not use the other modes on sand as
for each of the two front wheels on the vehicle may become stuck.
moving off.
(mode active up to 50 mph
(80 km/h))
128
Safety
You can deactivate the ASR Hill Assist Descent The system is not available:
and DSC systems by turning
the knob to the "OFF" position.
Control - if the speed of the vehicle is above
43 mph (70 km/h),
System that provides assistance when - if the speed of the vehicle is being
descending on loose or soft surfaces (gravel, controlled by the Adaptive cruise
The ASR and DSC systems will no longer
mud, etc.) or a steep gradient. control with Stop function, depending
act on the engine operation or the brakes
This system reduces the risk of slip or loss on the type of gearbox.
in the event of an involuntary change of
of control of the vehicle when descending,
trajectory.
whether going forward or in reverse.
These systems are reactivated
automatically from 31 mph (50 km/h) or
During a descent, it assists the driver in Switching on
maintaining a constant speed, depending
every time the ignition is switched on. By default, the system is not selected.
on the gear engaged, while progressively
The system's status is not saved when the
releasing the brakes.
ignition is switched off.
5
Recommendations The driver can select the system when
Your vehicle is designed principally to the engine is running, when the vehicle is
drive on tarmac roads but it allows you to For the system to activate, the slope must stationary or moving at speeds up to approx.
occasionally drive on other less passable be greater than 5%. 31 mph (50 km/h).
terrain. The system can be used with the gearbox
However, it does not permit off-road in neutral.
driving such as: Otherwise engage a gear corresponding
- crossing and driving on terrain which to the speed to prevent the engine stalling.
could damage the underbody or strip With an automatic gearbox, the system
away components (fuel pipe, fuel can be used with the selector at N, D or R.
cooler, etc.) due to obstacles or stones
in particular,
- driving on terrain with steep gradients
and poor grip, F To select the system, at a speed
- crossing a stream. below 31 mph (50 km/h),
When the system is regulating, the Active press this button until its green
Safety Brake system is automatically indicator lamp comes on; this
deactivated. warning lamp comes on in grey
in the instrument panel.
129
Safety
F The system becomes active You can depress the accelerator or brake pedal
at a speed below 19 mph again at any time.
Seat belts
(30 km/h); this warning lamp Front seat belts
comes on in green in the
instrument panel. The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic
Switching off pretensioning and force limiting system.
F When the vehicle begins its descent, you
can release the accelerator and brake This system improves safety in the front
pedals; the system regulates the speed: seats in the event of a front or side impact.
- if the gearbox is in first or Depending on the severity of the impact, the
second gear, the speed pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat
decreases and the warning lamp belts against the body of the occupants.
flashes rapidly, The pretensioning seat belts are active when
- if the gearbox is in neutral or if the ignition is on.
the clutch pedal is depressed, The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
the speed decreases and the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, thus
F Press this button until its indicator lamp
warning lamp flashes slowly; improving their protection.
goes off; the indicator goes off in the
in this case, the maintained instrument panel.
descent speed is lower. Above 43 mph (70 km/h), the system is
automatically deactivated; the indicator lamp in
During a descent, with the vehicle stationary, if
the button goes off.
Fastening
you release the accelerator and brake pedals,
the system will release the brakes to set the
vehicle gradually in motion.
The brake lamps light up automatically when Malfunction
the system is regulating. If a fault occurs with the system, this
If the speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp comes on in green,
regulation is paused automatically, the warning accompanied by the display of
lamp goes back to grey in the instrument panel, a message in the instrument panel.
but the indicator lamp in the button remains on.
Regulation resumes automatically when the Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
speed falls below 19 mph (30 km/h) again, if the a qualified workshop.
slope and pedal release conditions are met.
F Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
130
Safety
F Check that the seat belt is fastened Rear 2nd row seat belts F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap. correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle. F Press the red button on the buckle.
F Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in. F Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in.
Height adjustment Rear 2nd row central seat

belt
The seat belt for the rear central position is
integrated into the roof.
Each of the 2nd row rear seats comes with

a seat belt, with three fixing points and an
inertia reel.
Installation
5
The outer seats are fitted with a pretensioning
and force limiting system.
F To adjust the height of the anchorage point, Before performing any operations on the
squeeze control A and slide it to the notch rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat
desired. belts check that:
- the outer seat belts are properly
tensioned,
- the central seat belt is completely
reeled in. F Pull the strap and insert tongue A into the
right-hand buckle.
F Pull the strap and insert tongue B into the
Fastening left-hand buckle.
F Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the F Check that each buckle is fastened correctly
buckle. by pulling the strap.
131
Safety
Removal and storage F Flatten the seat belt strap against the boot Front seat belts not fastened
F Press the red button on buckle B, then the
side trim using the magnetic retaining alerts
system.
black button on buckle A. When the ignition is switched on, the warning
F Guide the strap as it reels in and take lamp and the corresponding indicators light up
tongue B, then A to the magnet at the Ensure seat belts are always fixed when if the driver and/or the front passenger have not
anchoring point on the roof. not in use. fastened their seat belts.
At speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h), these
warning lamps flash, accompanied by an
Rear 3rd row seat belts Seat belt not fastened/ audible signal for two minutes. After that
unfastened alerts period, these warning lamps remain lit until the
seat belts have been fastened.
Installation
F Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the Rear seat belts not fastened
buckle. alerts
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
When the ignition is switched on, with the
correctly by pulling the strap.
engine running or the vehicle moving at speeds
above 12 mph (20 km/h), the warning lamp and
Removal and storage Not fastened/unfastened warning lamp
the corresponding indicators light up for around
thirty seconds, if one or more rear seat belts
It comes on in red on both the are not fastened.
instrument panel and the front
passenger airbag and seat belts Seat belts unfastened alert
warning lamps display, once the
After the ignition is switched on, the warning
system detects that a seat belt is not
lamp and the corresponding indicators light up
fastened or is unfastened.
if the driver and/or one or more passengers
Seat belts not fastened/unfastened unfasten their seat belts.
identification warning lamp At speeds above 12 miles (20 km/h), these
It comes on in the display: the warning lamps flash, accompanied by an
illuminated red warning lamps audible signal for two minutes. After that
indicate the location of the not period, these warning lamps remain lit until the
F Press the red button on the buckle. seat belts have been refastened.
fastened or unfastened seat
F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
belts.
132
Safety
Advice
The driver must ensure that passengers use In order to be effective, a seat belt must: Recommendations for children
the seat belts correctly and that they are all - be tightened as close to the body as Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is
fastened before setting off. possible, less than 12 years old or shorter than one and
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, - be pulled in front of you with a smooth a half metres.
always fasten your seat belt, even for short movement, checking that it does not twist, Never use the same seat belt to secure more
journeys. - be used to restrain only one person, than one person.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as - not show any signs of cuts or fraying, Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
they will not fulfil their role fully. - not be converted or modified to avoid For more information on Child seats, refer to
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel affecting its performance. the corresponding section.
permitting automatic adjustment of the length In accordance with current safety regulations,
of the strap to your size. The seat belt is for all repairs on your vehicle's seat belts, go In the event of an impact
5
stowed automatically when not in use. to a qualified workshop with the skills and Depending on the nature and seriousness
Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt equipment needed, which a PEUGEOT dealer of the impact, the pyrotechnic pretensioner
is reeled in correctly. is able to provide. device may be deployed before and
The lower part of the strap must be positioned Have your seat belts checked regularly by independently of the airbags. Deployment of
as low as possible on the pelvis. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight
The upper part must be positioned in the particularly if the straps show signs of discharge of harmless smoke and a noise,
hollow of the shoulder. damage. due to the activation of the pyrotechnic
The inertia reels have an automatic locking Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or cartridge incorporated in the system.
device at the time of a collision, during a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes
sudden braking or if the vehicle turns over. dealers. on.
You can release the device by pulling the After folding or moving a seat or rear bench Following an impact, have the seat belts
strap firmly and then releasing it so that it seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned system checked and, if necessary, replaced,
reels in slightly. and reeled in correctly. by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
133
Safety
Airbags Impact detection zones Front airbags

General information
System designed to contribute towards
improving passenger safety (with the exception
of the rear centre passenger) in the event of
violent collisions. The airbags supplement the
action of the seat belts fitted with force limiters
(all except the centre rear passenger).
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
A. Front impact zone. System which protects the driver and front
are deployed instantly and contribute
B. Side impact zone. passenger in the event of a serious front
towards better protection of the occupants
impact, in order to limit the risk of injury to the
of the vehicle (with the exception of the rear
head and thorax.
centre passenger); immediately after the
The deployment of an airbag is The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so that
accompanied by a slight emission of steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is
they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the
smoke and a noise, due to the detonation fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
occupants,
of the pyrotechnic charge incorporated in
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or Deployment
in certain rollover conditions, the airbags the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive The airbags are deployed (except the front
may not be deployed; the seat belt
individuals may experience slight irritation. passenger airbag if it is deactivated) in the
alone contributes towards ensuring your
The detonation noise associated with the event of a serious frontal impact to all or part
protection in these situations.
deployment of an airbag may result in of the frontal impact zone A, in the longitudinal
a slight loss of hearing for a short time. centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane
The airbags do not operate when the and directed from the front to the rear of the
ignition is switched off. vehicle.
This equipment will only deploy once. If The front airbag inflates between the thorax
a second impact occurs (during the same and head of the front occupant of the vehicle
or a subsequent accident), the airbag will and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the
not be deployed again. dashboard, passenger's side, to cushion their
forward movement.
134
Safety
Deactivating the front passenger Reactivating the front passenger Deployment

airbag airbag
The lateral airbags are deployed on one side in
When you remove the child seat, with the the event of a serious side impact applied to all
ignition off, turn the switch to the ON position or part of the side impact zone, perpendicular
to reactivate the front airbag and so assure the to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle
safety of your front passenger in the event of on a horizontal plane and directed from the
an impact. outside towards the inside of the vehicle.
The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and
When the ignition is switched on, shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle
this warning lamp comes on in the and the corresponding door trim panel.
seat belt warning display screen for
approximately one minute to signal Curtain airbags
that the front airbag is activated.
5
System contributing towards greater protection
F With the ignition off, insert the key in the Lateral airbags for the driver and passengers (with the
front passenger airbag deactivation switch. exception of the rear centre passenger) in the
F Turn it to the "OFF" position. event of a serious side impact in order to limit
F Remove the key keeping the switch in the the risk of injury to the side of the head.
new position. Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.
When the ignition is switched on, this
warning lamp comes on in the seat
belt warning display screen. It stays Deployment
on while the airbag is deactivated.
The curtain airbag is deployed at the same
time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the
To assure the safety of your child, the front event of a serious side impact applied to all or
passenger airbag must be deactivated part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular
This system protects the driver and front
when you install a rearward facing child to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle
passenger in the event of a severe side impact
seat on the front passenger seat. on a horizontal plane and directed from the
to minimise the risk of injury to the chest,
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously outside towards the inside of the vehicle.
between hip and shoulder.
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed. The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest
frame, door side. rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
135
Safety
Malfunction
If this warning lamp comes on in the

instrument panel, you must contact
workshop to have the system
checked.
The airbags may no longer be deployed in the

event of a serious impact.
In the event of a minor impact or bump on

the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls
over, the airbags may not be deployed.
In the event of a rear or front collision,
none of the lateral airbags are deployed.
136
Safety
Advice
For the airbags to be fully effective, Front airbags Lateral airbags
observe the safety recommendations Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its Use only approved covers on the seats,
below. spokes or resting your hands on the centre compatible with the deployment of the lateral
Adopt a normal and upright sitting position. part of the wheel. airbags. For information on the range of seat
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. Passengers must not place their feet on the covers suitable for your vehicle, you can
Do not leave anything between the occupants dashboard. contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
and the airbags (a child, pet, object, etc.), nor Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags Do not attach anything to or hang anything
fix or attach anything close to or in the way of can cause burns or the risk of injury from from the seat backrests (clothes, etc.) as
the airbag release trajectory; this could cause a cigarette or pipe. this could cause injuries to the thorax or arm
injuries during their deployment. Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or when the lateral airbag is deployed.
Never modify the original definition of your hit it violently. Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
5
vehicle, particularly in the area directly Do not fit or attach anything to the steering nearer to the door than necessary.
around the airbags. wheel or dashboard, this could cause injuries The vehicle's front door panels include side
After an accident or if the vehicle has been in case of airbag deployment. impact sensors.
stolen, have the airbag systems checked. A damaged door or any unauthorised or
All work on the airbag systems must be incorrectly executed work (modification or
Curtain airbags
performed by a PEUGEOT dealer or repair) on the front doors or their interior trim
Do not attach anything or hang anything to
a qualified workshop. could compromise the operation of these
the roof, as this could cause head injuries
Even if all of the precautions mentioned sensors – risk of malfunction of the lateral
when the curtain airbag is deployed.
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor airbags!
If fitted to your vehicle, do not remove the
burns to the head, chest or arms when an Such work must only be done by a PEUGEOT
grab handles installed on the roof, they play
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The dealer or a qualified workshop.
a part in securing the curtain airbags.
airbag inflates almost instantly (within a few
milliseconds) then deflates within the same
time discharging the hot gas via openings
provided for this purpose.
137
Safety
When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed

General points relating to Ensure that the seat belt is positioned and
on the front passenger seat, adjust the
child seats tightened correctly.
For child seats with a support leg, ensure
vehicle seat to the fully back and highest
position, with the backrest straightened.
that the latter is in firm and steady contact
The regulations on carrying children are with the floor.
specific to each country. Refer to the In the front: if necessary, adjust the
legislation in force in your country. passenger seat. The front passenger airbag must be
At the rear: if necessary, adjust the deactivated. Otherwise, the child risks
relevant front seat. being seriously injured or killed if the
For maximum safety, please observe the airbag is deployed.
following recommendations:
- In accordance with European regulations,
Remove and stow the head restraint "Forward facing"
all children under the age of 12 or less
before installing a child seat with backrest
than one and a half metres tall must
on a passenger seat.
travel in approved child seats suited to
Refit the head restraint once the child seat
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt
has been removed.
or ISOFIX mountings.
- Statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the rear
seats.
Child seat at the front
- A child weighing less than 9 kg must "Rearward facing"
travel in the rearward facing position
both in the front and in the rear.
When a "forward facing" child seat is installed

on the front passenger seat, adjust the
It is recommended that children travel on vehicle seat to the fully back and highest
the rear seats of your vehicle: position, with the backrest straightened. Leave
- "rearward facing" up to the age of 3, the front passenger airbag active.
- "forward facing" over the age of 3.
138
Safety
The warning label present on both sides of the

passenger sun visor repeats this advice.
Passenger seat adjusted to the highest In line with current legislation, the following
position and in the maximum longitudinal tables contain this warning in all of the For more information on Airbags
5
rear position. languages required. and particularly on deactivating the
front passenger airbag, refer to the
Deactivating the front corresponding section.
passenger airbag Passenger airbag OFF

Never install a "rearward facing" child
restraint system on a seat protected by an
active front airbag. This could cause the
death of the child or serious injury.
139
Safety
AR
НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини
BG
СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí
CS
nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT KVÆSTET
DA
eller DRÆBT.
Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung,
DE
das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από
EL
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
EN
CHILD can occur
NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un AIRBAG
ES
frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD. Turvapadja
ET
avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
FI
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l'arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
FR
frontal ACTIVÉ. Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l'ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT.
NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi
HR
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez
HU
a gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
IT
ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
140
Safety
NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO
LT
PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA
LV
SPILVENS. Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MT Qatt m'ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f'siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista' tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
NL
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN
Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
NO
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ
PL POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA.
5
NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
PT
Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
RO
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье, защищенном
RU ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем. Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ
РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM. Mohlo
SK
by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA.
NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem
SL
AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu
SR
nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att
SV
DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT.
KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya
TR
ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
141
Safety
When a "forward facing" child seat is installed

Child seat at the rear on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
"Rearward facing" front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the legs of the child in the "forward
facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's
front seat.
L1
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the "rearward facing" position.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the "rearward facing" child seat does
not touch the vehicle's front seat.
In the presence of a dog guard, it is
imperative that children's booster seats
"Forward facing" with backrest be installed in the second L5
row. "RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX
mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
Recommended child
seats
Range of recommended child seats which are
secured using a three-point seat belt.
142
Safety
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L6
"GRACO Booster"
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
143
Safety
Locations for child seats secured using a seat belt

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing universally approved child seats secured using the seat belt (a) in
relation to the weight of the child and the seat position in the vehicle.
Weight of the child/indicative age
Under 13 kg
9-18 kg 15-25 kg 22-36 kg
(groups 0 (b) and
Front passenger (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
Seat position 0+)
airbag From about 1 to From about 3 to From about 6 to
Up to about
3 years old 6 years old 10 years old
1 year old
Passenger seat Deactivated,

U U U U
with height "OFF"
adjustment*
Activated, "ON" X UF UF UF
Row 1 (c)
Passenger seat Deactivated,
U U U U
without height "OFF"
adjustment**
Activated, "ON" X UF UF UF
Seat behind
U U U U
driver's seat
Seat behind
Row 2 (d) U U U U
passenger's seat
Centre rear seat U U U U
* Max height position. ** Backrest straightened.

144
Safety
Under 13 kg
9-18 kg 15-25 kg 22-36 kg
(groups 0 (b) and
Front passenger (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
Seat position 0+)
airbag From about 1 to From about 3 to From about 6 to
Up to about
3 years old 6 years old 10 years old
1 year old
Row 3 (d) Outer rear seats U U U U
U: position suitable for the installation of (a) Universal child seat: child seat which
5
a child seat secured using the seat belt can be installed in all vehicles using the
and universally approved for "rearward seat belt.
facing" and/or "forward facing" use. (b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car
UF: position suitable for the installation of seats and "car cots" cannot be installed
a child seat secured using the seat belt on the front passenger seat or in the
and universally approved for "forward 3rd row.
facing" use. (c) Refer to the legislation in force in your
X: position not suitable for the installation country before carrying your child in
of a child seat of the weight group this seating position.
indicated. (d) When installing a child seat on a rear
seat in a "rearward facing" or "forward
facing" position, move the front seat
forward then adjust the backrest to an
upright position to allow enough room
for the child seat and the child's legs.
145
Safety
F pass the upper strap of the child seat behind

ISOFIX mountings the seat backrest, between the apertures
The seats, shown below, are fitted with ISOFIX for the head restraint rods,
compliant mountings: F fix the hook of the upper strap to ring B,
F tighten the upper strap.
When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the

left-hand rear seat of the bench seat,
before fitting the seat, first move the
centre rear seat belt towards the middle
- a ring B, located behind the seat and of the vehicle, so as to avoid the seat
There are three rings for each seat: indicated by a marking, referred to as the interfering with the operation of the seat
TOP TETHER, for fixing the upper strap. belt.
This arrangement reduces forward tipping of

the child seat in the event of a front impact. The incorrect installation of a child seat
The ISOFIX mounting system ensures fast, in a vehicle compromises the child's
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your protection in the event of an accident.
vehicle. Strictly observe the fitting instructions
ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two latches provided with the child seat.
which are secured on the two rings A.
Some seats also have an upper strap which is
attached to ring B.
For information on the possibilities for
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER: installing ISOFIX child seats in your
- two rings A, located between the vehicle's F remove and stow the head restraint before vehicle, refer to the summary table.
seat backrest and cushion, indicated by installing the child seat on the seat (refit it
a marking, once the child seat has been removed),
146
Safety
Recommended ISOFIX child seats

Also consult the installation notes from the "RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX"
child seat's manufacturer to find out how (size category: B1)
to install and remove the seat.
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX

base"
(size category: E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Installed only in the forward facing position.

Is attached to rings A and ring B, referred to
5
as TOP TETHER, using an upper strap.
Three seat shell angles: sitting, reclining,
lying down.
This child seat can also be used on seats
not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In
Installed rearward facing using an ISOFIX
this case, it must be secured to the vehicle's
base which is attached to rings A.
seat by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the
The base has a support leg, height-
position of the vehicle's front seat so that the
adjustable, which rests on the vehicle's floor.
child's feet are not touching the backrest.
This child seat can also be secured with
a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used
and attached to the vehicle seat using the
three-point seat belt.
147
Safety
Summary table of locations for ISOFIX child seats

In line with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the child seat's ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter between A and G, is
indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
Under 10 kg
Under 10 kg
Under 13 kg 9-18 kg
(group 0)
(group 0) (group 1)
Up to about
(group 0+) From about 1 to 3 years
6 months
Up to about 1 year
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot "Rearward facing" "Rearward facing" "Forward facing"
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Front passenger
Seat
airbag
Passenger seat Deactivated "OFF" Not ISOFIX
with height
Row 1 adjustment Activated "ON" Not ISOFIX
(a) Passenger seat Deactivated "OFF" Not ISOFIX
without height
adjustment Activated "ON" Not ISOFIX
Seat behind the

X IL(b) IL IL IUF/IL
driver's seat
Row 2 Seat behind the

IL(b) X IL IL IUF/IL
passenger's seat
Centre rear seat X IL IL IUF/IL
148
Safety
Under 10 kg
Under 10 kg
Under 13 kg 9-18 kg
(group 0)
(group 0) (group 1)
Up to about
(group 0+) From about 1 to 3 years
6 months
Up to about 1 year
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot "Rearward facing" "Rearward facing" "Forward facing"
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Front passenger
Seat
airbag
5
Row 3 Outer rear seats Not ISOFIX
X: seat is not suitable for the installation of IL: seat suitable for the installation of an (a) Refer to the current legislation in your
an ISOFIX seat or carrycot of the weight Isofix Semi-Universal seat which is country before installing a child on this
group indicated. either: seat.
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an - rearward facing fitted with an upper (b) The installation of a carrycot on this
Isofix Universal seat, Forward facing, strap or a support leg, seat may prevent the use of one or
secured using the upper strap. - forward facing fitted with a support more of the other seats in this row.
leg,
- a cot fitted with an upper strap or
a support leg.
For securing the upper strap using the ISOFIX

mountings, refer to the corresponding section.
149
Safety
Summary table of the positions for i-Size child seats

The i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A.
i-Size child seats also have:
- either an upper strap that is attached to ring B,
- or a support leg resting on the vehicle's floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position,
which prevents the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision.
For more information on ISOFIX mountings, refer to the associated section.
In accordance with the new European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing i-Size child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with
ISOFIX mountings approved for i-Size.
Seat position Front passenger airbag i-Size restraint system
Deactivated, "OFF" Not i-Size

Row 1 (a) Passenger seat
Activated, "ON" Not i-Size
Seat behind driver's seat i-U
Row 2 Seat behind passenger's seat i-U
Centre rear seat i-U
Seat position Front passenger airbag i-Size restraint system
Row 3 Outer rear seats Not i-Size
150
Safety
i-U: suitable for i-Size restraint systems

in the "Universal" category, forward
facing and rearward facing.
i-UF: only suitable for i-Size restraint
systems in the "Universal" category,
forward facing.
X: seat position not suitable for i-Size
restraint systems in the "Universal"
category.
(a) Refer to the current legislation in your

country before placing a child in this
seating position.
151
Safety
Advice
The incorrect installation of a child seat in The head restraint must be removed before As a safety precaution, do not leave:
a vehicle compromises the child's protection installing a child seat with a backrest on - a child or children alone and unattended in
in the event of an accident. a passenger seat. a vehicle,
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt Ensure that the head restraint is stored or - a child or an animal in a vehicle which
buckle under the child seat, as this could attached securely to prevent it from being is exposed to the sun, with the windows
destabilise it. thrown around the vehicle in the event of closed,
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the sharp braking. Refit the head restraint when - the keys within reach of children inside the
child seat harnesses keeping the slack the child seat is removed. vehicle.
relative to the child's body to a minimum, To prevent accidental opening of the doors
even for short journeys. Children in front and rear windows, use the child lock.
When installing a child seat using the seat The legislation on carrying children on the Take care not to open the rear windows by
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened front passenger seat is specific to each more than one third.
correctly on the child seat and that it secures country. Refer to the legislation in force in To protect young children from the rays of the
the child seat firmly on the seat of your your country. sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
vehicle. If your passenger seat is adjustable, Deactivate the front passenger airbag when
move it forwards if necessary. a rearward facing child seat is installed on the
At rear seating positions, always leave front passenger seat.
sufficient space between the front seat and: Otherwise, the child would risk being
- a rearward facing child seat, seriously injured or killed if the airbag were
- the child's feet for a child seat fitted deployed.
forward facing.
To do this, move the front seat forwards Installing a booster seat
and, if necessary, move its backrest into the The chest part of the seat belt must be
upright position. positioned on the child's shoulder without
For optimal installation of the forward facing touching the neck.
child seat, verify that its backrest is as close Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
as possible to the backrest of the vehicle passes correctly over the child's thighs.
seat, if possible in contact with it. PEUGEOT recommends using a booster seat
with a backrest equipped with a belt guide at
shoulder level.
152
Safety
Manual child lock Unlocking Electric child lock

Mechanical system to prevent opening of a rear F Using the ignition key or the integral key, Remote control system to prevent opening of
door using its interior control. depending on version, turn the red control the rear doors using their interior controls.
The control, red in colour, is located on the as far as it will go: The control is located on the dashboard,
edge of each rear door. - to the left on the left-hand rear door, driver's side.
It is identified by a symbol marked on the - to the right on the right-hand rear door.
bodywork.
Activation
Locking
5
Do not confuse the child lock control,
which is red, with the back-up locking
control, which is black. F Press this button.
The red indicator lamp in the button comes on,
F Using the ignition key or the integral key, accompanied by the display of an activation
depending on version, turn the red control message.
as far as it will go: This red indicator lamp remains on for as long
- to the right on the left-hand rear door, as the child lock is activated.
- to the left on the right-hand rear door.
153
Safety
Deactivation
F Press this button again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off,
accompanied by the display of a deactivation
message.
This indicator lamp remains off while the child
lock is deactivated.
This system is independent and in no

circumstances does it take the place of
the central locking control.
Check the status of the child lock each
time you switch on the ignition.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a short
time.
In the event of a serious impact, the
electric child lock is switched off
automatically to permit the exit of the rear
passengers.
154
Driving
Driving recommendations Important!

Observe the driving regulations and remain
Never drive with the parking brake applied
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions.
– Risk of overheating and damage to the
Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your
braking system!
hands on the wheel so that you are ready to
As the exhaust system of your vehicle
react at any time to any eventuality.
is very hot, even several minutes after
As a safety measure, the driver should only If you are obliged to drive through water:
switching off the engine, never park or run
carry out any operations that require close - check that the depth of water does not
the engine on inflammable surfaces (dry
attention when the vehicle is stationary. exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that
grass, fallen leaves, etc.): Risk of fire!
On a long journey, a break every two hours is might be generated by other users,
strongly recommended. - deactivate the Stop & Start function,
In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate - drive as slowly as possible without stalling.
the need to brake and increase the distance Under no circumstances exceed 6 mph
from other vehicles. (10 km/h),
Never leave a vehicle unsupervised with - do not stop and do not switch off the engine.
the engine running. If you have to leave On leaving the flooded road, as soon as
6
your vehicle with the engine running, apply circumstances allow, make several light brake
Never leave the engine running in the parking brake and put the gearbox into applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
an enclosed area without adequate neutral or position N or P, depending on If in doubt about the state of your vehicle,
ventilation: internal combustion engines the type of gearbox. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
emit toxic exhaust gases, such as carbon workshop.
monoxide. There is a risk of poisoning and
death!
In very severe wintry conditions Driving on flooded roads
(temperatures below -23°C), to guarantee
We strongly advise against driving on flooded
correct operation and the longevity of
the mechanical elements of your vehicle,
roads, as this could cause serious damage In case of towing
to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the
engine and gearbox, the engine must be
electrical systems of your vehicle. Driving with a trailer places greater
left running for 4 minutes before driving.
demands on the towing vehicle and
requires extra care from the driver.
155
Driving
Side wind Tyres If the system fails, as reported by a message,

the engine will not start.
F Take into account the increased sensitivity F Check the tyre pressures of the towing Contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
to wind. vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
recommended pressures.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the
Lighting Starting/Switching off the
temperature of the coolant.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling
F Check the electrical lighting and signalling engine with the key
on the trailer and the headlamp beam height
capacity is not dependent on the engine speed. of your vehicle. Key ignition switch
F To lower the engine speed, reduce your For more information on Headlamp
speed. adjustment, refer to the corresponding
The maximum towable load on an incline section.
depends on the gradient and the exterior
temperature.
In all cases, keep a check on the coolant The rear parking sensors will be
temperature. deactivated automatically to avoid the
audible signal if a genuine PEUGEOT
towbar is used.
F If this warning lamp and the
STOP warning lamp come on,
stop the vehicle and switch off It has 3 positions:
the engine as soon as possible. Anti-theft protection - Position 1 (Stop): inserting and removing
Electronic immobiliser the key, steering column locked.
New vehicle - Position 2 (Ignition on): steering column
Do not pull a trailer before having driven at least The keys contain an electronic chip which has unlocked, ignition on, Diesel preheating,
approximately 620 miles (1,000 kilometres). a secret code. When the ignition is switched engine running.
on, this code must be recognised in order for - Position 3 (Starting).
starting to be possible.
Braking A few seconds after switching off the ignition, Ignition on position
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance. this system locks the engine control system,
therefore preventing the engine from being It allows the use of the vehicle's electric
To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of
started in the event of a break-in. equipment or portable devices to be charged.
engine braking is recommended.
156
Driving
Once the state of charge of the battery drops

In certain cases, you may have to apply In wintry conditions, the warning lamp
to the reserve level, the system switches to
significant force to move the steering can stay on for a longer period. When the
energy economy mode: the power supply is
wheel (wheels on full lock, for example). engine is hot, the warning lamp does not
cut off automatically to preserve the remaining
come on.
battery charge.
F With a petrol engine, operate the starter

Switching off the engine leads to a loss of motor by turning the key to position 3 without If the engine does not start straight away,
braking assistance. pressing the accelerator pedal, until the switch off the ignition. Wait a few moments
engine starts. Once the engine is running, before operating the starter motor again.
release the key. If the engine does not start after several
attempts, do not keep trying: you risk
Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key
damaging the starter motor or the engine.
or the remote control, which would weigh
With petrol engines, after a cold start, Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
down on its blade in the ignition switch
preheating the catalytic converter can workshop.
and could cause a malfunction.
cause clearly-felt engine vibrations when
stationary, with the engine running, for
6
anything up to two minutes (accelerated In temperate conditions, do not let the
Starting the engine idle speed). engine idle to warm up but move off
Parking brake applied: straight away and drive at moderate
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear speed.
lever in neutral then depress the clutch F With a Diesel engine, turn the key to
pedal fully. position 2, ignition on, to operate the engine
F With an automatic gearbox, place the gear pre-heating system.
selector in mode N or P then depress the
brake pedal fully.
F Insert the key into the ignition switch; the Wait until this warning lamp goes off
system recognises the code. in the instrument panel then operate
F Unlock the steering column by the starter motor by turning the key
simultaneously turning the steering and the to position 3 without pressing the
key. accelerator pedal, until the engine
starts. Once the engine is running,
release the key.
157
Driving
F Check that the parking brake is correctly

Never leave the engine running in Key left in
applied, particularly on sloping ground.
an enclosed area without adequate If the key has been left in the ignition
ventilation: internal combustion engines switch at position 2 (Ignition on), the
emit toxic exhaust gases, such as carbon ignition will be switched off automatically
monoxide. There is a risk of poisoning and Never switch off the ignition before the after one hour.
death! vehicle is at a complete stop. With the To switch the ignition back on, turn the key
In very extreme wintry conditions engine off, the braking and steering to position 1 (Stop), then back to
(temperature below -23°C), to guarantee assistance systems are also cut off: risk of position 2 (Ignition on).
correct operation and the longevity of loss of control of the vehicle.
the mechanical elements of your vehicle,
engine and gearbox, the engine must be
left running for 4 minutes before starting
Starting/Switching off the
the vehicle.
When you leave the vehicle, keep the key
engine with Keyless Entry
with you and lock the vehicle. and Starting
Starting the engine
Switching off the engine
F Stop the vehicle.
Energy economy mode
F With the engine running in idle, turn the key After switching off the engine (position 1
to position 1. - Stop), for a maximum of 30 minutes you
F Remove the key from the ignition switch. can still use functions such as the audio and
F To lock the steering column, turn the telematic system, the wipers, dipped beam
steering wheel until it locks. headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc.
To facilitate unlocking of the steering

For more information on Energy
column, it is recommended that the
economy mode, refer to the
wheels be returned to the straight ahead
corresponding section. F With a manual gearbox, put the gear lever
position before switching off the engine.
into neutral.
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle,
fully depress the clutch pedal.
158
Driving
or If this warning lamp comes on after

As a safety measure, never leave the
F With an automatic gearbox, place the gear pressing the "START/STOP" button:
vehicle while the engine is running.
selector in mode P or N.
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle, F With a manual gearbox, you should keep
fully depress the brake pedal. the clutch pedal fully depressed until the
warning lamp goes off and not press the
The presence of the K eyless Entry and
"START/STOP" button again until the Switching off the engine
engine is running.
Starting electronic key in the recognition F Immobilise the vehicle, engine at idle.
F With an automatic gearbox, you should
zone is essential. F With a manual gearbox, put the gear lever
keep the brake pedal fully depressed until
If the electronic key is not detected in this into neutral.
the warning lamp goes off and not press
zone, a message is displayed. or
the "START/STOP" button again until the
Move the electronic key into this zone so F With an automatic gearbox, place the gear
engine is running.
that the engine can be started. selector in mode P or N.
If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key F With the electronic key inside the vehicle,
not detected – Back-up starting" section. If one of the starting conditions is not met, press the "START/STOP" button.
a reminder message is displayed in the The engine stops and the steering column
instrument panel. locks.
6
In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn
the steering wheel slightly while pressing the the steering wheel to lock the steering column.
"START/STOP" button to assist unlocking of On certain versions with the EAT8 automatic
F Press the "START/STOP" the steering column; a message warns you gearbox, the steering column does not lock.
button while maintaining when this is needed.
pressure on the pedal until the
engine starts.
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the
The steering column unlocks and the engine engine will not stop.
starts. With petrol engines, after a cold start,
On certain versions with the EAT8 automatic preheating the catalytic converter can
gearbox, the steering column does not lock. cause clearly-felt engine vibrations for Never leave your vehicle with the
anything up to 2 minutes while stationary electronic key still inside.
For Diesel engines, when the temperature is with the engine running (accelerated idle
negative and/or the engine is cold, the start speed).
Switching off the engine leads to a loss of
will only take place once the preheater warning
braking assistance.
lamp is off.
159
Driving
Switching the ignition on F With an automatic gearbox, select mode

With the ignition on, the system
P, then fully depress the brake pedal.
(without starting) automatically goes into energy economy
mode to maintain an adequate state of
charge in the battery. F Press the "START/STOP" button.
The engine starts.
Key not detected

Back-up switch-off
Back-up starting
A back-up reader is fitted to the steering
column to allow the engine to be started if
the system does not detect the key in the
recognition zone, or when the battery in the
electronic key is discharged.
With the Keyless Entry and Starting remote
control inside the vehicle, pressing the
"START/STOP" button, with no action on the
pedals, allows the ignition to be switched on.
When the electronic key is not detected or is
no longer in the recognition zone, a message
This also allows some equipment to be
appears in the instrument panel when closing
activated (examples: audio system, lighting,
a door or trying to switch off the engine.
etc.).
F Press the "START/STOP"

button, the instrument panel
comes on but the engine does
not start. F To confirm the instruction to switch off the
engine, press the "START/STOP" button for
F Press this button again to switch off the F Place and hold the remote control against
about five seconds.
ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked. the reader.
In the event of a fault with the electronic key,
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
lever in neutral, then fully depress the clutch workshop.
pedal.
160
Driving
Emergency switch-off F by briefly pulling the control lever to apply Label on door panel
the brake,
F by briefly pushing the control lever, while
pressing the brake pedal, to release it.
Automatic mode is activated by default.
In the event of an emergency only, the engine

can be switched off without conditions (even Indicator lamp
when driving).
Press the "START/STOP" button for about five This indicator lamp comes on in the
seconds. instrument panel and in the control Before leaving the vehicle, check that the
In this case, the steering column locks as soon lever to confirm the application of parking brake is applied: the indicator
as the vehicle stops. the parking brake. lamps in the instrument panel and
It goes off to confirm the release of the parking the control lever must be on fixed, not
flashing.
Electric parking brake brake.
If the parking brake is not applied, there
This indicator lamp flashes on the control lever
The system allows, in automatic operation, the when manual parking brake application or is an audible signal and a message is
6
application of the parking brake on switching release is performed. displayed on opening the driver's door.
off the engine and release as the vehicle
moves off. In the event of a battery failure, the
electric parking brake no longer works.
As a safety measure with a manual Never leave a child alone inside the
gearbox, if the parking brake is not vehicle with the ignition on, as they could
applied, immobilise the vehicle by release the parking brake.
engaging a gear.
As a safety measure with an automatic
gearbox, if the parking brake is not
applied, immobilise the vehicle by placing
one of the chocks supplied against one of
The driver can take over at any time to apply the wheels.
or release the parking brake, by operating the Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
control lever: workshop.
161
Driving
The complete release of the parking brake is The electric parking brake releases
When towing, parking on a steep slope,
confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the automatically and progressively when the
or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn
P indicator lamp in the control lever going off, vehicle moves off.
the wheels towards the kerb and engage
accompanied by the display of the message
a gear with a manual gearbox.
"Parking brake released".
When towing, parking on a steep slope,
or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn the
wheels towards the kerb and select mode If you push the control lever without
P with an automatic gearbox. pressing the brake pedal, the parking
For towing, your vehicle is approved for brake will not be released and a message
parking on slopes of up to 12%. is displayed.
With a manual gearbox

Manual application
F Fully depress the clutch pedal, engage 1st
Stationary vehicle: gear or reverse.
F pull briefly on the control lever. F Press the accelerator pedal and release the
clutch pedal.
Confirmation of the instruction is signalled by
flashing of the indicator lamp in the control
Manual operation lever.
With an automatic gearbox
F Press the brake pedal.
Manual release Application of the parking brake F Select position D, M or R.
is confirmed by illumination of the F Release the brake pedal and press the
Ignition on or engine running: accelerator pedal.
brake indicator lamp and the P
F press the brake pedal,
indicator lamp in the control lever,
F while maintaining pressure on the brake
accompanied by the display of the With an automatic gearbox, if the brake
pedal, briefly push the control lever.
message "Parking brake applied". does not release automatically, check that
the front doors are correctly closed.
Automatic operation
Automatic release
The complete release of the parking brake is
Ensure first that the engine is running and the confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the
driver's door is properly closed. P indicator lamp in the control lever going off,
accompanied by the display of the message
"Parking brake released".
162
Driving
Immobilisation of the vehicle The complete release of the parking

When stationary with the engine running,
with the engine running brake is confirmed by the brake
do not depress the accelerator pedal
indicator lamp and the P indicator
unnecessarily, you risk releasing the To immobilise the vehicle with the engine lamp in the control lever going off,
parking brake. running, briefly pull the control lever. accompanied by the display of the
message "Parking brake released".
Application of the parking brake
Automatic application
is confirmed by illumination of the
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake brake indicator lamp and the P F Switch off the ignition.
is automatically applied when the engine is indicator lamp in the control lever,
switched off. accompanied by the display of the
message "Parking brake applied". With an automatic gearbox, mode P is
Application of the parking brake automatically selected when the ignition is
is confirmed by illumination of the switched off. The wheels are blocked.
brake indicator lamp and the P Parking the vehicle with the For more information on the Automatic
indicator lamp in the control lever, brake released gearbox, particularly in relation to leaving
accompanied by the display of the the vehicle in free-wheeling mode, refer to
In very cold conditions (ice), it is
message "Parking brake applied". the corresponding section.
recommended that the parking brake not
6
be applied.
Automatic application does not take place To immobilise your vehicle, engage a gear
if the engine stalls or goes into STOP or fit the chocks supplied against one of
mode of Stop & Start. the wheels.
With an automatic gearbox, when mode
N is engaged, opening the driver's door
With automatic operation, you can also Immobilisation of the vehicle with the
will cause an audible signal to sound. It
manually apply or release the parking parking brake released
will stop when you close the driver's door
brake using the control lever. F Switch off the engine.
again.
Illumination of the indicator lamps in the
instrument panel and control lever confirm
application of the parking brake.
Special cases F Switch on the ignition again, without starting
the engine.
In some situations, you may need to operate
F Release the parking brake manually by
the parking brake manually.
pushing the control lever while keeping your
foot on the brake.
163
Driving
Deactivating automatic F Release the control lever and the brake

pedal.
operation
From now on, the parking brake can only
In some situations, for example when it is be applied and released manually using the If the ABS and DSC systems malfunction,
extremely cold or during towing (caravan, control lever. signalled by the illumination of one or both
breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate
warning lamps in the instrument panel, then
automatic operation of the system. Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic
stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed.
operation.
In this event, stability must be assured by the
Reactivation of automatic operation is
driver by repeating alternate "pull-release"
confirmed by the indicator lamp in the
actions on the control lever until the vehicle is
instrument panel going off.
immobilised.
Emergency braking
6-speed manual gearbox
The emergency braking should only be
used in an exceptional situation. Engaging reverse gear
F Start the engine.
F Apply the parking brake with the control In the event of a failure in braking using the
lever, if it is released. brake pedal or in an exceptional situation (e.g.
F Take your foot off the brake pedal. driver taken ill, driver under instruction, etc.), a
F Push and hold the control lever in the continuous pull on the control lever will brake
release direction for at least 10 seconds and the vehicle. Braking takes place while the
no more than 15 seconds. control lever is being pulled. It is interrupted if
F Release the control lever. the control lever is released.
F Press and hold the brake pedal. The ABS and DSC systems ensure stability of
F Pull the control lever in the application the vehicle during emergency braking.
direction for 2 seconds. If the emergency braking malfunctions, the
message "Parking brake control faulty" will be
displayed in the instrument panel.
Deactivation of the automatic functions
F Raise the trigger under the knob and move
is confirmed by illumination of this
the gear lever to the left then forwards.
indicator lamp in the instrument panel.
164
Driving
Only engage reverse gear when the Gearbox selector positions Push selector
vehicle is stationary with the engine at
idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate

starting of the engine, always select
neutral and depress the clutch pedal.
Engaging 5th or 6th gear

F Move the lever fully to the right to engage 5th
or 6th gear.
A. Button P.
6
P. Park. To set the gearbox to P.
Failure to follow this advice may cause
For parking the vehicle: the front wheels B. Unlock button.
permanent damage to the gearbox
are blocked. To unlock the gearbox and come out of P,
(engagement of 3rd or 4th gear by mistake).
R. Reverse. with foot on the brake pedal, or change
N. Neutral. to R.
For moving the vehicle with the ignition This button should be pressed before
off: in certain car washing machines, pressing the selector.
Automatic gearbox (EAT6/ when towing the vehicle, etc. C. Button M.
EAT8) D. Automatic mode. To change from D to permanent manual
The gearbox manages gear changes mode.
Six or eight-speed automatic gearbox with push according to the style of driving, the road D. Gearbox state indicators (P, R, N, D).
selector. It also offers a manual mode with gear profile and the vehicle load.
changes via steering mounted paddles, located
M. Manual mode.
behind the steering wheel.
The driver changes gear using the
controls at the steering wheel.
165
Driving
Steering mounted controls "Sport" button

In mode M or D, the steering mounted control With the engine running, when the programme
paddles allow the driver to change gear associated with the button is active, the
manually. gearbox delays changing up for a more
dynamic driving style.
The programme is automatically deactivated
Activating the Sport programme or the

Dynamic pack is not recommended in the
following situations:
- One of the special modes (other than the
standard mode) of Advanced Grip Control is
on.
Move the selector by pressing it forward (N or R) - Low fuel level reached.
or rearward (N or D) once or twice, if necessary - Low AdBlue level reached.
going beyond the point of resistance.
The selector returns to its initial position when F Pull the right-hand "+" paddle toward you
released. and release to change up a gear.
Pressing this button has no effect when
F Pull the left-hand "-" paddle toward you and
a trailer is connected.
For example, from P to R, you can optionally release to change down a gear.
push forward twice without crossing the point
of resistance or push once crossing the point of
resistance:
Sport programme
- In the first case, the gearbox goes from P to In mode D, pressing this button
The steering mounted control paddles
N, then from N to R.
cannot be used to engage neutral or to SPORT activates the Sport programme.
- In the second case, the gearbox goes "S" appears in the instrument panel.
select or come out of reverse.
directly from P to R.
Dynamic pack
The orange indicator lamp in the
SPORT button is on while the Dynamic pack
is activated.
166
Driving
You can activate or deactivate the function: General points

If the driver's door is opened with the
- by pressing this button,
ignition on, a message is displayed asking To unlock the gearbox:
or
you to put the gearbox into mode P. - from mode P:
- via the i-Cockpit Amplify function, by
modifying the setting for an ambience in the
The state of the gearbox is displayed in F fully depress the brake pedal,
touch screen.
the instrument panel for a few moments F press the Unlock button,
For more information on the Dynamic Pack
after switching off the ignition. F while continuing to press the brake pedal
and the i-Cockpit Amplify function, refer to and the Unlock button, select another
the corresponding section. mode.
- from neutral N, at a speed below 3 mph
Operation (5 km/h):
Displays in the instrument With the engine running, if it is necessary to F fully depress the brake pedal,
panel press the brake pedal or the Unlock button F while continuing to press the brake pedal,
in order to change mode, an alert message is select another mode.
displayed in the instrument panel. To select reverse:
Only appropriate attempted changes of mode F slow down until you come to a stop,
are accepted. F press the Unlock button,
F push forwards once or twice.
6
With the engine running and the brakes
To select manual mode:
released, if R, D or M is selected, the
F with mode D selected in advance,
vehicle moves off, even without pressing
F press button M; the green indicator lamp in
With the ignition on, the status of the gearbox is the accelerator pedal.
the button comes on.
displayed in the instrument panel: Never leave children unsupervised inside
To quit manual mode:
P: park. the vehicle with the engine running.
F push forwards once to go back to D.
R: reverse.
or
N: neutral.
F press button M; the indicator lamp in the
D1…D6 or D8: automatic mode.
Never press the accelerator and brake button goes off.
S: Sport programme or Dynamic pack.
M1…M6 or M8: manual mode. pedals at the same time – Risk of damage
-: instruction not accepted in manual mode. to the gearbox!
In the event of a battery failure, you
must place the chocks supplied with the
vehicle tools against one of the wheels to
immobilise the vehicle.
167
Driving
To switch off the ignition, the vehicle must be For maximum acceleration without touching From neutral N:
stationary. the selector, press the accelerator fully down F Press the brake pedal firmly.
To put the vehicle in free-wheeling mode, (kick-down). The gearbox changes down F Start the engine.
engine off: automatically or holds the gear selected until F Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal,
F with the vehicle stationary, engine running, the maximum engine speed is reached. push rearward to select the automatic mode
select N, When braking, the gearbox changes down D, or forward, while pressing the Unlock
F switch off the engine, automatically to provide effective engine button to engage reverse R.
F within five seconds, switch the ignition on braking. Then, from P or N:
again, The steering mounted controls allow the driver F Release the brake pedal.
F with your foot on the brake pedal, push the to temporarily select a gear, if the road and F Accelerate progressively to automatically
selector forwards or backwards once to engine speed permit. release the electric parking brake.
confirm N and manually release the electric F With the parking brake released, the vehicle
parking brake, Special aspects of manual mode then moves off.
F switch off the ignition.
If you exceed the time limit of five seconds, The change from one gear to another takes
the gearbox engages mode P; you must then place only if the road speed and engine speed
restart the procedure. permit.
If the engine speed is too high or too low, the
gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then In severe wintry conditions (temperature
the gear actually engaged is displayed. below -23°C), it is recommended that the
If you open the driver's door when mode N
engine be allowed to run for a few minutes
is engaged, an audible signal will sound. It
will stop when you close the driver's door
Moving off before moving off, to ensure the correct
operation and durability of the engine and
again. From mode P:
gearbox.
F Press the brake pedal firmly.
F Start the engine.
F Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal,
Special aspects of automatic press the Unlock button. Stopping the vehicle
mode F Push once or twice rearward to select the
automatic mode D, or forward to engage Whatever the state of the gearbox when the
The gearbox selects the gear that offers
reverse R. ignition is switched off, mode P is engaged
optimum performance, taking account of the
automatically, with the exception of N, in which
exterior temperature, the profile of the road, the
case mode P will be engaged after a delay of
load on the vehicle and the style of driving.
5 seconds (allowing the change to free-wheel).
168
Driving
Check that mode P has been engaged and Malfunction of the selector This system only operates when:
that the electric parking brake was applied - the vehicle has been brought to a complete
In the event of a minor fault
automatically; if not, apply it manually. stop, with your foot on the brake pedal,
You are alerted by this warning lamp - certain slope conditions are met,
lighting up, accompanied by the - with the driver's door closed.
The corresponding indicator lamps
display of a message and an audible
for the selector panel and the
signal.
electric parking brake control lever Do not leave the vehicle while it is being
must be on, as well as the ones in In certain cases, the selector lamps may not held temporarily by hill start assist.
the instrument panel. come on, but the state of the gearbox is still If you need to leave the vehicle with the
displayed in the instrument panel. engine running, apply the parking brake
Drive cautiously and go to a PEUGEOT or manually then ensure that the parking
a qualified workshop. brake warning lamp and the indicator lamp
P in the lever of the electric parking brake
In the event of a serious fault
Operating faults control are on fixed (not flashing).
You are alerted by the illumination of
Malfunction of the gearbox this warning lamp.
6
This is signalled by the illumination The hill start assist function cannot be
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, away
of this warning lamp, accompanied deactivated. However, use of the parking
from the traffic, and call a PEUGEOT
by the display of a message and an brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts
audible signal, when the ignition is its function.
When the ignition is switched off, the
switched on.
gearbox goes into mode P automatically.
The gearbox switches to back-up mode: drive
mode D is locked in third gear, the steering-
mounted control paddles are inoperative,
mode M is no longer available. You may feel Hill start assist
a pronounced jolt when engaging reverse. This
System which keeps your vehicle immobilised
does not present any risk for the gearbox.
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h),
starting on a gradient, the time it takes to
keeping to the speed limit.
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
accelerator pedal.
workshop.
169
Driving
Operation Malfunction For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify

If the orange indicator lamp flashes,

activation is not available (e.g. if Park
Assist is selected).
If a fault in the system occurs, these warning
If the indicator lamp continues flashing for
lamps come on. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer
a long time, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
or a qualified workshop to have the system
checked.
Dynamic pack Displays

On an ascending slope, with the vehicle
This pack influences: To show this information on the instrument
stationary, the vehicle is held for a short
- the acoustic ambience of the engine, panel, select the "PERSONAL" mode and then
time when you release the brake pedal:
- the level of power assistance for the the type of information required.
- if you are in first gear or in neutral with
steering,
a manual gearbox,
- acceleration.
- provided you are in mode D or M with an This telemetry information (power
- handling gear transitions with the automatic
automatic gearbox. output, turbocharger pressure, torque,
gearbox,
- the display on the instrument panel of longitudinal and lateral acceleration, etc.)
information about the dynamic parameters is given as a guide only.
of the vehicle ("PERSONAL" mode).
Activation/Deactivation
F Press this button; the orange
SPORT indicator lamp in the button
Gear shift indicator
comes on to confirm activation (Depending on engine.)
of the function. System which reduces fuel consumption by
recommending the most appropriate gear.
On a descending slope, with the vehicle The Dynamic pack is also managed
stationary and reverse gear engaged, the by the i-Cockpit Amplify function.
vehicle is held for a short time when you
release the brake pedal.
170
Driving
Operation The system adapts its gear efficiency Operation

recommendation according to the driving
Depending on the driving situation and your Going into engine STOP mode
conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise
driver's requirements (power, acceleration,
you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can
braking, etc.). This indicator lamp comes on in the
follow this instruction without engaging the
The system never suggests: instrument panel and the engine
intermediate gears.
- engaging first gear, goes into standby automatically:
Gear efficiency recommendations are for
- engaging a lower gear,
information only. In fact, the road layout, the
- engaging reverse. - with a manual gearbox, at a speed below
traffic density and safety remain the deciding
2 mph (3 km/h) for 1.5 BlueHDi versions, or
factors when choosing the best gear. The driver
with the vehicle stationary for 1.2 PureTech,
therefore remains responsible for deciding
1.6 BlueHDi and 2.0 BlueHDi 150 versions,
whether or not to follow the indications issued
by the system.
Stop & Start when you place the gear lever in neutral and
release the clutch pedal,
This function cannot be deactivated. The Stop & Start system puts the engine
- with an automatic gearbox, at a speed
temporarily into standby – STOP mode – during
below 12 mph (20 km/h) for 1.5 BlueHDi
stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, etc.).
and 2.0 BlueHDi 180 versions, or with the
6
With an automatic gearbox, the system is The engine restarts automatically – START
vehicle stationary for other versions, when
only active in manual mode. mode – as soon as you want to move off.
you depress the brake pedal or place the
The restart takes place instantly, quickly and
gear selector to mode N.
silently.
The information is displayed in the instrument Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system
A time counter calculates the time spent in
panel in the form of an arrow. reduces fuel consumption and exhaust
STOP mode during the journey. It is reset to
emissions as well as the noise level when
zero every time the ignition is switched on with
stationary.
With a manual gearbox, the arrow may be the key or the "START/STOP" button.
accompanied by the gear recommended.
Never refuel with the engine in STOP

mode; you must switch off the ignition with
the key or the "START/STOP" button.
171
Driving
In this case, this indicator lamp - the speed of the vehicle exceeds 16 mph
For your comfort, during parking
flashes for a few seconds then goes (25 km/h) with the 2.0 BlueHDi 180 version
manoeuvres, STOP mode is not available
off. with automatic gearbox in mode D, or 2 mph
for a few seconds after coming out of
(3 km/h) with other versions,
reverse gear.
This operation is perfectly normal. - the electric parking brake is being applied,
The Stop & Start does not affect the
- some specific conditions (battery charge,
operation of vehicle systems such as
engine temperature, braking assistance, air
braking, power steering, etc.
Going into engine START mode conditioning setting, etc.) require it for the
control of a system or the vehicle.
This indicator lamp goes off and the
Special cases: STOP mode not engine starts automatically:
available In this case, this indicator lamp
- with a manual gearbox, when you fully flashes for a few seconds, then goes
STOP mode is not invoked when:
depress the clutch pedal, off.
- the vehicle is on a steep slope (rising or
- With an automatic gearbox:
falling),
• gear selector in mode D or M, when you This operation is perfectly normal.
- the driver's door is open,
release the brake pedal,
- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
• or gear selector in mode N
- the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
and brake pedal released, when you Deactivation/Reactivation
(10 km/h) since the last engine start (with
place the gear selector in mode D or M,
the key or the "START/STOP" button), In certain circumstances, such as the need
• or when you engage reverse.
- the electric parking brake is applied or being to maintain the temperature in the passenger
applied, compartment, it may be useful to deactivate the
- the engine is needed to maintain Stop & Start system.
Special cases: START mode
a comfortable temperature in the passenger The system can be deactivated at any time,
triggered automatically
compartment, once the ignition is switched on.
- demisting is active, As a safety measure or to maintain comfort If the engine is in STOP mode, it restarts
- some temporary conditions (battery charge, levels in the vehicle, START mode is triggered immediately.
engine temperature, braking assistance, automatically when: The Stop & Start system is reactivated
exterior temperature, etc.) make this - you open the driver's door, automatically every time the ignition is switched
necessary to ensure control of a system. - you unfasten the driver's seat belt, on.
172
Driving
With the button on the Select the "Driving functions" then the "Stop Operating fault
dashboard & Start" tab.
Deactivation is confirmed by the

In the event of a fault with the
illumination of this indicator lamp
system, this warning lamp
and the display of a message in the
flashes for a few moments in the
instrument panel.
instrument panel, then remains
A new selection reactivates the system. on, accompanied by the display of
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes a message.
off, accompanied by the display of a message.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
Opening the bonnet If a fault occurs in STOP mode, the engine may
Before doing anything under the bonnet, stall.
deactivate the Stop & Start system to All of the instrument panel warning lamps come on.
F Press this button; the associated orange avoid any risk of injury resulting from an It is then necessary to switch off the ignition and
indicator lamp comes on. automatic change to START mode. start the engine again with the key or the
"START/STOP" button.
6
Deactivation is confirmed by the
illumination of this indicator lamp
The Stop & Start system requires a 12 V
and the display of a message in the
battery of specific technology and
instrument panel.
specification.
Pressing the button again reactivates the All work on this type of battery must be
system; the associated indicator lamp goes off. carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or
Driving on flooded roads
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes a qualified workshop.
Before driving in a flooded area, it is
off, accompanied by the display of a message. For more information on the 12 V battery,
strongly recommended that you deactivate
With the button on the touch the Stop & Start system.
screen For more information on Driving
Activation and deactivation of the recommendations, particularly on
system is done in the Vehicle/ flooded roads, refer to the corresponding
Driving menu of the touch screen. section.
173
Driving
Under-inflation detection Driving with under-inflated tyres Under-inflation alert

increases fuel consumption.
System which automatically checks the This warning is indicated by
pressures of the tyres while driving. continuous illumination of this lamp,
an audible signal and, depending on
The system monitors the pressures in the four the equipment installed, a message
tyres, once the vehicle is moving. The inflation pressures defined for your displayed on the screen.
It compares the information given by the wheel vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure
speed sensors with reference values, which label. F Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive
must be reinitialised every time the tyre For more information on the steering movements and sudden braking.
pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. Identification markings, refer to the F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
The system triggers an alert as soon as it corresponding section. so.
detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one
or more tyres. The loss of pressure detected does not
always cause visible bulging of the tyre.
Checking tyre pressures Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual
This check should be done when the tyres check.
are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or
after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km)
The under-inflation detection system does at moderate speeds). F If you have a compressor, such as the one
not replace the need for vigilance on the Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures in the temporary puncture repair kit, check
part of the driver. shown on the label. the pressures of the four tyres when cold.
This system does not avoid the need to F If it is not possible to make this check
check the tyre pressures (including the immediately, drive carefully at reduced
spare wheel) every month as well as speed.
before a long journey. Snow chains or
Driving with under-inflated tyres worsens The system does not have to be F In case of a puncture, use the temporary
road-holding, lengthens braking distances, reinitialised after fitting or removing snow puncture repair kit or the spare wheel
causes premature wear of the tyres, chains. (depending on equipment).
particularly in adverse conditions (heavy
loads, high speeds, long journeys).
The alert is kept active until the system is
reinitialised.
174
Driving
Reinitialisation F Select the "Tyre inflation" menu. In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the
F Select the "Reinitialisation" function. tyres is no longer assured.
The system must be reinitialised after any F Select "Yes" to confirm. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
adjustment to the pressures of one or more Reinitialisation is confirmed by an audible dealer or a qualified workshop.
tyres, and after changing one or more wheels. signal.
Before doing anything to the system,

Touch screen the pressures of the four tyres must be
checked and the system reinitialised.
Reinitialisation of the function is
done in the Vehicle/Driving menu
of the touch screen.
Before reinitialising the system, ensure
that the pressures of the four tyres F In this menu, select the "Vehicle settings"
are correct for the conditions of use
of the vehicle and conform to the
tab. Memorising speeds
F In the page, select the "Under-inflation
recommendations on the tyre pressure initialisation" function. Linked to the speed limiter/programmable
label. F Select "Yes" to confirm. cruise control, this function allows speed
The under-inflation alert can only be relied The reinitialisation is confirmed by the display settings to be registered which will then be
6
on if the reinitialisation of the system has of a message and an audible signal. offered as settings for two systems: the speed
been done with the pressures in the four limiter (a maximum speed) and the cruise
tyres correctly adjusted. control (cruising speed).
The under-inflation detection system You can memorise up to 5 speed limits in the
does not give a warning if a pressure is Operating fault system.
incorrect at the time of reinitialisation. By default, some speed settings are already
memorised.
Monochrome screen C The flashing and then fixed illumination of the

Reinitialisation of the function is under-inflation warning lamp accompanied
done in the "Personalisation- by illumination of the Service warning lamp As a safety measure, the driver must
configuration" menu of the screen. indicates a fault with the system. only modify the speed settings when
A message appears, accompanied by an stationary.
F Select the "Define the vehicle audible signal.
parameters" menu.
F Select the "Driving assistance" menu.
175
Driving
Memorising speeds "MEM" button The units for the speed limits (mph or
km/h) depend on the country you are
driving in.
This function can be accessed in the
It should be taken into account so that you
Vehicle/Driving menu of the touch
observe the speed limit.
screen.
For the system to operate correctly when
you change country, the units for speed in
F Select the "Driving functions" tab.
the instrument panel must be those for the
F Select the "Adjusting Speeds" function.
country you are driving in.
F Press "ON" to activate the function.

F Tick the speed settings 1 to 5 that you want
to use. With this button, you can select a memorised
F Select the speed setting you want to speed setting to use with the speed limiter or The automatic reading of road signs is
change. the programmable cruise control. a driving assistance system and does not
always display speed limits correctly.
For more information on the Speed limiter or The speed limit signs present on the road
Cruise control, refer to the associated section. always take priority over the display by the
system.
The system cannot in any circumstances
Recognition of replace the need for vigilance on the part
speed limit signs and of the driver.
recommendation The driver must observe the driving
regulations and must adapt the speed of
This system allows the speed limit detected by the vehicle to suit the weather and traffic.
the camera to be displayed in the instrument It is possible for the system not to display
panel. the speed limit if it does not detect a speed
Specific speed limits, such as those for heavy limit sign within a preset period.
F Enter the new value using the numeric
goods vehicles, are not displayed. The system is designed to detect signs
keyboard and confirm.
The display of the speed limit in the instrument that conform to the Vienna Convention on
F By default, some speed settings are already
panel is updated as you pass a speed limit sign road signs.
memorised.
intended for cars (light vehicles).
176
Driving
Activation/Deactivation The system is active but is not detecting speed

To maintain correct operation of the
limit information.
system: regularly clean the area in front of The system is activated or deactivated via the
the camera. vehicle configuration menu.
Displays on the instrument

Principles panel
On detection of speed limit information, the

system displays the value.
This system allows the speed limit detected by

1.
2.
Speed limit indication.
or
Indication of the end of the speed limit.
6
the camera to be displayed in the instrument
panel.
The system also processes speed limit details
from the navigation system mapping.
It is necessary to update your navigation "MEM" flashes, accompanied by a message –

mapping regularly in order to receive with speed limiter or cruise control activated – the
accurate information on speed limits from system suggests recording the speed limit as
the system. a new speed setting.
177
Driving
Operating limits Memorising the speed 1. Select speed limiter/cruise control mode.
2. Memorise a speed setting.
The legislation on speed limits is specific to setting
each country. This memorise function is in addition to the
The system does not take account of reduced display of Recognition of speed limit signs. Display on the instrument panel
speed limits in the following cases:
- poor weather (rain, snow),
- atmospheric pollution,
- trailer, caravan,
- driving with a space-saver type spare wheel
or snow chains fitted,
- puncture repair using the temporary repair The driver can choose to adapt the speed
kit, setting to the speed limit suggested, by
- young drivers, etc. pressing the memorise button for the speed
limiter, the standard cruise control and the
The following situations may interfere with the adaptive cruise control with Stop function.
operation of the system or prevent it working: This speed setting then replaces the previous
3. Speed limit indication.
- poor visibility (inadequate street lighting, speed setting for the speed limiter and/or cruise
4. Offer to memorise the speed.
falling snow, rain, fog), control.
5. Current speed setting.
- windscreen area located in front of the
camera dirty, misted, frost-covered, snow-
For more information on the Speed
covered, damaged or covered by a sticker,
limiter, Cruise control, or Adaptive
- fault with the camera, Memorising the speed
cruise control with Stop function, refer
- obsolete or incorrect mapping,
to the corresponding sections.
- hidden road signs (other vehicles,
vegetation, snow),
- speed limit signs that do not conform to the
standard, are damaged or distorted. Steering mounted controls
F Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control.
Speed limiter/cruise control information is
displayed.
178
Driving
A message is displayed to confirm the request. Steering mounted control
On detection of a sign offering a new speed

limit, the system displays the value and MEM
flashes for a few seconds to offer to make it F Press button 2 again to confirm and save
a new speed setting. the new speed setting.
After a predetermined period, the screen 1. Select speed limiter mode.
returns to the current display. 2. Decrease the programmed value.
If there is a difference of less than 6 mph 3. Increase the programmed value.
4. Speed limiter On/Pause.
6
(10 km/h) between the speed setting and
the speed displayed by the speed limit Speed limiter 5. Depending on version:
sign recognition system, the MEM symbol System which prevents the Display of speed thresholds in the
is not displayed. vehicle from exceeding the speed memory with the programmable speed
programmed by the driver. limiter
or
The speed limiter is switched on manually. Use the speed suggested by the speed
The minimum programmed speed is 19 mph limit signs recognition system.
(30 km/h).
The programmed speed remains in the system For more information on Memorising speeds
memory when the ignition is switched off. or Recognition of speed limit signs and
recommendation, refer to the associated
sections.
The speed limiter is a driving aid that
F Make an initial press on button 2 to request cannot, in any circumstances, replace the
saving of the speed suggested. need to observe speed limits or the need
for vigilance on the part of the driver.
179
Driving
Displays on the instrument F press button 5 to display the six memorised
panel speed settings,
F press the button for the desired speed
setting.
This setting becomes the new limit speed.
F If the speed setting is suitable (last speed
To modify the speed limiter setting using
setting programmed in the system), press
the speed suggested by the speed limit sign
button 4 to switch the speed limiter on.
recognition system:
F the speed suggested is displayed in the
instrument panel,
F make a first press on button 5; a message
is displayed to confirm the memorisation
request,
6. Speed limiter On/Off indication.
F press button 5 again to save the suggested
7. Speed limiter mode selection indication.
F Pressing button 4 again temporarily speed.
8. Programmed speed value. interrupts the function (pause). The speed displays immediately in the
9. Speed suggested by the speed limit instrument panel as the new speed setting.
sign recognition system (depending on
version). Adjusting the limit speed
setting Temporarily exceeding the
programmed speed
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on
Switching on in order to set the speed. F If you want to temporarily exceed the
programmed limit speed, press firmly on
To modify the limit speed setting from the the accelerator pedal, going beyond the
current speed of the vehicle: point of resistance.
F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily
successive short presses on button 2 or 3, and the displayed programmed speed flashes.
F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h),
press and hold button 2 or 3.
F Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "LIMIT" position To modify the limit speed setting using
to select the speed limiter; the function is memorised speeds and from the touch screen:
paused.
180
Driving
On a steep descent or in the event of Speed regulation remains active after

sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will changing gear on vehicles fitted with
not be able to prevent the vehicle from a manual gearbox and Stop & Start.
exceeding the programmed speed.
The use of mats not approved by

When the limit speed is exceeded but this is not PEUGEOT may interfere with the The operation of the cruise control can be
due to action by the driver, there is an audible operation of the speed limiter. interrupted (pause):
signal to complete the alert. To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - by pressing control 4 or by pressing the
Once the speed of the vehicle returns to - ensure that the mat is positioned brake pedal,
the programmed setting, the speed limiter correctly, - automatically, if operation of the dynamic
functions again: the display of the programmed - do not fit one mat on top of another. stability control system is triggered.
speed setting becomes steady again.
Switching off the ignition cancels any

programmed speed setting.
Cruise control
6
System which automatically
maintains the cruising speed of the The cruise control system is a driving aid
Switching off vehicle at a setting programmed by that cannot, in any circumstances, replace
the driver, without any action on the the need to observe speed limits, nor the
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position:
accelerator pedal. need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
the display of information on the speed
As a safety measure, you are advised to
limiter disappears. The cruise control is switched on manually. keep your feet near the pedals at all times.
It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
Malfunction (40 km/h).
With a manual gearbox, it requires the
Flashing dashes indicate a fault with the speed engagement of third gear or higher.
limiter. With an automatic gearbox, it requires the
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or engagement of the selector in mode D or of
a qualified workshop. second gear or higher in mode M.
181
Driving
Steering mounted control Displays on the instrument

panel
F To start the cruise control and set a cruise

speed, once the vehicle has reached the
desired speed, press button 2 or 3: the
current speed of your vehicle becomes the
cruise speed setting.
You can release the accelerator pedal.
1. Select cruise control mode. 6. Cruise control pause/resume indication.

2. Set the current speed of the vehicle as 7. Cruise control selection indication.
the cruise setting or lower the cruise 8. Value of the speed setting.
setting. 9. Speed suggested by the speed limit
3. Set the current speed of the vehicle as sign recognition system (depending on
F Pressing button 4 temporarily interrupts the
the cruise setting or raise the cruise version).
function (pause).
setting.
4. Pause/Resume cruise control.
5. Depending on version:
Display of speed thresholds in the
Switching on
memory with the programmable cruise
control
or F Pressing button 4 again restores operation
Use the speed suggested by the speed of the cruise control (ON).
limit signs recognition system.
For more information on Memorising speeds

Modifying the cruise speed
or Recognition of speed limit signs and
F Turn thumbwheel 1 to "CRUISE" to select setting
cruise control mode; the function is paused.
recommendation, refer to the associated The cruise control must be active.
sections.
182
Driving
To modify the cruise speed setting from the F make a first press on button 5; a message
When descending a steep hill, the cruise
current speed of the vehicle: is displayed to confirm the memorisation
control system cannot prevent the vehicle
F in steps of + or - 1 mph (km/h), make request,
from exceeding the programmed speed.
repeated short presses on button 2 or 3, F press button 5 again to save the suggested
F continuously, in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h), speed.
press and hold button 2 or 3. The speed displays immediately in the
instrument panel as the new speed setting. You may have to brake to control the speed of
Take care: pressing and holding button your vehicle. In this case, the cruise control is
2 or 3 results in a rapid change in the Temporarily exceeding the automatically paused.
speed of your vehicle. programmed speed To activate the system again, with the speed
of the vehicle above 25 mph (40 km/h), press
If needed (for overtaking, etc.) it is possible to button 4.
exceed the programmed speed by pressing the
As a precaution, it is recommended accelerator pedal.
that the cruise speed chosen be close The cruise control is temporarily overridden Switching off
to the current speed of your vehicle, so and the programmed speed setting flashes.
as to avoid any sudden acceleration or F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position:
the cruise control information disappears
6
deceleration of the vehicle.
from the screen.
To modify the cruise speed setting using

memorised speed settings and from the touch Malfunction
screen: Flashing dashes indicate a fault with the cruise
F press button 5 to display the six memorised To return to the programmed speed, simply control system.
speed settings, release the accelerator pedal. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
F press the button for the desired speed Once the vehicle has returned to the a qualified workshop.
setting. programmed speed, the cruise control takes
This setting becomes the new cruise speed. over again: the display of the programmed
speed setting becomes steady again.
To modify the cruise speed setting using
the speed suggested by the speed limit sign
recognition system:
F the speed suggested is displayed in the
instrument panel,
183
Driving
Use the cruise control only where the Adaptive cruise control Primarily designed for driving on main
driving conditions allow running at roads and motorways, this system only
a constant speed and at an adequate safe works on moving vehicles, driving in the
This system provides the following
distance. same direction as your vehicle.
functions:
Do not activate the cruise control in urban
- Automatic regulation of the
areas, in heavy traffic, on winding or steep
vehicle speed at the value
roads, on slippery or flooded roads, or in
programmed by the driver.
conditions of poor visibility (heavy rain, Principle of operation
- With a manual gearbox,
fog, falling snow, etc.).
automatic adjustment of the
In some circumstances, it may not be The system automatically adapts the speed of
distance between your vehicle
possible to maintain or reach the cruise your vehicle to that of the vehicle in front, to
and the one in front.
speed set: towing, vehicle heavily loaded, maintain a constant distance.
- With an automatic gearbox,
steep climb. If the vehicle in front is driving more slowly, the
automatic adjustment of the
system slows, or even stops your vehicle, using
distance between your vehicle
engine braking and the braking system (for
and the one in front, which may
versions fitted with an automatic gearbox).
cause your vehicle to come to
If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes
a complete stop.
lane, the cruise control progressively
The use of mats not approved by accelerates your vehicle to return to the
PEUGEOT may interfere with the programmed speed.
It manages the acceleration and deceleration
operation of the cruise control. If the driver operates a direction indicator to
of the vehicle by automatically acting on the
To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise control
engine and the braking system.
- ensure that the mat is positioned allows your vehicle to temporarily approach
correctly, the vehicle in front to assist the overtaking
- do not fit one mat on top of another. manoeuvre, though never exceeding the
programmed speed.
To do so, it has a camera located at the top of

the windscreen and a radar located in the front
The brake lamps illuminate as soon as
bumper.
the braking system is activated with
deceleration of the vehicle.
184
Driving
4. Pause/Resume cruise control. If a vehicle is detected, the symbol 7 is filled

The adaptive cruise control system
5. Use the speed suggested by the speed with the colour associated with the cruise
is a driving aid that cannot, in any
limit signs recognition system (MEM). control mode. By default, the symbol 7 is
circumstances, replace the need to observe
6. Display and adjustment of the empty.
speed limits and safety distances, nor the
programmed inter-vehicle distance. In cruise control activated mode, the
need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
symbol 8 appears in green. By default,
It is recommended that you always keep
the symbol 8 appears in grey.
your feet close to the pedals. For more information on Recognition of
The driver must be ready to take back speed limit signs and recommendation,
control of their vehicle at any time, using the refer to the corresponding section.
brake or accelerator pedal as appropriate.
Displays on the instrument

panel
Steering mounted control
12. Inter-vehicle distance setting.

13. Position of vehicle detected by the radar.
6
This information is visible in the instrument
panel in the "DRIVING" display mode.
7. Indication of the presence/absence of

a target vehicle. Switching on
1. Select cruise control mode.
8. Indication of cruise control activation/ The cruise control is switched on manually.
2. Use the current speed as the speed deactivation.
setting/Lower the speed setting. The speed of the vehicle must be between
9. Value of the speed setting. 19 and 112 mph (30 and 180 km/h).
3. Use the current speed as the speed
10. Indication that vehicle is held stationary. With an automatic gearbox: in mode D or M.
setting/Raise the speed setting.
11. Speed suggested by the speed limit
recognition system.
185
Driving
- or automatically, if operation of the ESC Modification of the speed

system is triggered for reasons of safety.
setting
When the cruise control is paused, it
can only be reactivated when all of the
safety conditions are met. The message
F With the engine running, turn the "Activation not possible, conditions
thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position to unsuitable" is displayed while reactivation is
select cruise control mode: the function is not possible.
paused (displayed in grey). To reactivate the function, the driver
F Vehicle moving, press one of the buttons Engine running and cruise control on (green),
must accelerate to reach at least 19 mph
2 or 3: the current speed of your vehicle you can modify the speed setting.
(30 km/h), then press one of the
becomes the cruise speed setting. buttons 2, 3 or 4.
The cruise control starts operating (displayed As a safety measure, wait until the current Modification from the current
in green). speed reaches the speed setting to speed
By default, the inter-vehicle distance is set at reactivate the function by pressing button 4. F By successive short presses on button 2 or
"Normal" (2 dashes). 3, to raise or lower the setting in steps of
Otherwise, the last setting made will be used 1 mph (km/h).
when switching on the system. F By a maintained press on button 2 or 3, to
Switching off the ignition cancels any speed raise or lower the setting in steps of 5 mph
setting value chosen by the driver. Versions fitted with an automatic
(km/h).
gearbox
Following braking of the vehicle bringing it
Pause to a complete stop, the system holds the Take care: the maintained press on button
vehicle stationary; the cruise control is 2 or 3 will cause a very quick change in
The adaptive cruise control can be paused the speed of your vehicle.
paused.
manually by:
The driver should press the accelerator
- action by the driver:
pedal to move off, then reactivate the
• On button 4 (Pause).
system above 19 mph (30 km/h) by
• On the brake pedal.
pressing button 2, 3 or 4. Modification from the speed limit
• On the electric parking brake control. sign recognition system
If the driver takes no action following
• By changing from mode D to N with an
this immobilisation, the electric parking
automatic gearbox. F The suggested speed is displayed in the
brake is applied automatically after a few
instrument panel.
minutes.
186
Driving
F Make an initial press on button 5; a Simply release the accelerator pedal to return
message is displayed to confirm the to the programmed speed.
memorisation request.
If the programmed speed setting is exceeded,
F Press button 5 again to save the suggested
the display of the speed setting disappears
speed.
and a message "Cruise control suspended"
The speed displays immediately in the
is displayed until the accelerator pedal is
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
released.
For more information on Recognition of
speed limit signs and recommendation, Driving situations and
associated alerts
Engine running and cruise control selected To benefit from all necessary information on
(grey), you can change the inter-vehicle the instrument panel, you must previously
As a precaution, it is recommended distance setting: select the "DRIVING" display mode.
that you select a cruise speed close to F Press button 6 to display the selection The table below describes the alerts and
the current speed of your vehicle, so screen for inter-vehicle distance. messages displayed depending on the driving
as to avoid any sudden acceleration or F By pressing button 6 repeatedly, cycle situation.
6
deceleration of the vehicle. through the predefined settings. The display of these alerts is not sequential.
The selection screen closes after a few
seconds.
The change then takes effect.
Modification of the This setting remains in memory, whatever the
programmed inter-vehicle state of the system and when the ignition is
distance switched off.
Three threshold settings are suggested for the
inter-vehicle distance: Exceeding the programmed
- "Distant" (3 dashes), setting
- "Normal" (2 dashes),
It is possible to exceed the speed setting
- "Close" (1 dash).
temporarily by depressing the accelerator
pedal.
The cruise control no longer manages the
braking system during this period.
187
Driving
Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments
"Cruise control paused" System paused.

No vehicle detected.
"Cruise control paused" System paused.

A vehicle has been detected.
"Cruise control on" System activated.
70 No vehicle detected.
according to the inter-vehicle

distance selected
"Cruise control on" System activated.
70 A vehicle has been detected.
according to the inter-vehicle

distance selected
"Cruise control suspended" System activated.

The driver has temporarily taken control of the vehicle
or by accelerating.
188
Driving
"Take back control of the vehicle" The driver must take back control of the vehicle
70 + by accelerating or braking, depending on the

circumstances.
(orange)
"Take back control of the vehicle" The system cannot manage the critical situation
70 + alone (emergency braking of the target vehicle,

rapid insertion of another vehicle between the two
(red) vehicles).
The driver must immediately take back control of
the vehicle.
70
"Activation not possible, conditions
unsuitable"
The system refuses to activate the cruise control
(speed outside the operating range, winding road). 6
or (orange)
70
189
Driving
Versions fitted with an automatic gearbox
"Cruise control paused" The system has brought the vehicle to a complete
(for a few seconds) stop and is holding it immobilised.
The driver must accelerate to move off again.
or The cruise control remains paused until the driver
reactivates it with the speed of the vehicle above
according to the inter-vehicle 19 mph (30 km/h).
distance selected and the actual
distance from the target vehicle
Following braking of the vehicle bringing it to a complete stop, the system holds the vehicle stationary; the cruise control is paused.
The driver must press the accelerator pedal to move off again, then reactivate the system above 19 mph (30 km/h), by pressing button 2, 3 or 4. If the
driver takes no action following the immobilisation, the electric parking brake is applied automatically after a few minutes.
190
Driving
Operating limits Be particularly careful:

The system cannot exceed the limits of the - When motorcycles are present and
laws of physics. when there are vehicles staggered onto
Certain situations cannot be managed by the the traffic lane.
system and require the driver to take back - When following a narrow vehicle. - When you enter a tunnel or cross
control of the vehicle. Reactivate cruise control when conditions a bridge.
Cases of non-detection by the system: permit.
- Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals. The cruise control operates by day and
- Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown, Cases where the driver is encouraged to night, in fog or moderate rainfall.
etc.). take back control immediately: However, it is strongly recommended that
- Excessively sharp deceleration of the you always keep a safe distance from
vehicle in front of you. vehicles ahead, according to the driving
conditions, the weather and the road
surface.
Use the cruise control only where
the driving conditions allow running
- Vehicles crossing the road lanes. at a constant speed and keeping an
6
- Vehicles driving in the opposite direction. adequate safety distance.
- When a vehicle sharply cuts in between Do not activate the cruise control in an
When the driver must suspend the cruise
your vehicle and the one in front. urban area where pedestrians are likely to
control system:
cross the road, in heavy traffic, on winding
The system must not be activated in the or steep roads, on slippery or flooded
following situations: roads, when there is snowfall, if the front
- Use of the "space-saver" type spare wheel bumper or the windscreen is damaged, or
(depending on version). when the brake lamps have failed.
- Towing. In certain circumstances, it may not
- Carrying long objects on roof bars. be possible for the speed setting to be
- Following an impact on the windscreen maintained or even attained: loaded
- Vehicles in a tight bend. close to the camera or on the front bumper vehicle, ascending a steep hill, etc.
- When approaching a roundabout. (versions with radar).
191
Driving
The camera may be disrupted or not work The system is not intended for the If the front bumper is to be repainted or
in the following situations: following situations: touched up, contact a PEUGEOT dealer
- poor visibility (inadequate street - if the front end of the vehicle has or a qualified workshop. Certain types of
lighting, falling snow, heavy rain, dense been modified (addition of long-range paint could interfere with the operation of
fog, etc.), headlamps, painting of the front the radar.
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming bumper),
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp - driving on a racing circuit,
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating - running on a rolling road,
shade and light, etc.), - use of snow chains, non-slip covers or Operating fault
- camera or radar obstructed (mud, frost, studded tyres.
snow, condensation, etc.). The use of mats not approved by In the event of a fault with the cruise
In these situations, detection performance PEUGEOT may interfere with the control, you are alerted by the
may be reduced. operation of the cruise control. illumination of this warning lamp
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: and the display of a message in the
- ensure that the mat is secured instrument panel, accompanied by
correctly, an audible signal.
- do not fit one mat on top of another.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
Operation of the radar, located in the

front bumper, may be impaired by the Distance Alert and Active
accumulation of dirt (dust, mud, etc.) or in Safety Brake
certain weather conditions (snow, frost,
etc.).
Clean the front bumper regularly.
Clean the windscreen regularly,
particularly the area in front of the
This system is a driving aid that includes three
detection camera.
functions:
Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
- Distance Alert (alert if there is a risk of
bonnet or roof of the vehicle, as this could
collision),
obscure the camera.
- Intelligent emergency braking assistance,
192
Driving
- Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency The system is active from about 4 mph (7 km/h) - when carrying long objects on roof bars or
braking). and is deactivated below about 3 mph (5 km/h). a roof rack,
Distance Alert: it warns the driver if their It takes account of: - before using an automatic car wash, with
vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in - vehicles running in the same direction or the engine running,
front or a pedestrian present in their traffic lane. stationary, - before placing the vehicle on a rolling road
Intelligent emergency braking assistance: - pedestrians in the traffic lane (bicycles, in a workshop,
it supplements the braking action taken by the motorcycles, animals and objects on the - when the vehicle is being towed, with the
driver if this is inadequate. road are not necessarily detected). engine running,
Active Safety Brake: it intervenes following - when a "space-saver" type spare wheel is
the alert if the driver does not react quickly fitted (depending on version),
enough and does not operate the vehicle's This system is designed to assist the - following impact damage to the windscreen
brakes. driver and improve road safety. close to the detection camera,
If the driver fails to act, it contributes It is the driver's responsibility to - if the front bumper has been damaged
towards avoiding a collision or limiting continuously monitor the state of the (version with radar),
its severity by reducing the speed of your traffic, observing the driving regulations. - if the brake lamps are not working.
vehicle. This system does not avoid the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
6
Activation and operating It is possible that warnings are not given,
are given too late or seem unjustified.
conditions Consequently, always stay alert and be
As soon as the system detects a potential
The vehicle has a camera located at the top of obstacle, it prepares the braking circuit in prepared to react at any time to avoid an
the windscreen, and depending on the version, case automatic braking is needed. This accident.
a radar located in the front bumper. may cause a slight noise and a sense of
deceleration.
Operating limits Distance Alert

In the following cases, deactivating the system Depending on the degree of risk of collision
via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised: detected by the system and the alert threshold
- when towing a trailer, chosen by the driver, different levels of
alert can be triggered and displayed in the
instrument panel.
193
Driving
Level 1 (orange): visual alert only, Modifying the alert trigger

signalling to you that the vehicle in threshold
front is very close.
The message "Vehicle close" is This threshold determines how you wish to be
displayed. warned of the presence of a vehicle moving
or stationary in front of you, or a pedestrian
present in your traffic lane.
This level of alert is based on the inter-vehicle The current threshold can be modified via the
time between your vehicle and the vehicle in vehicle configuration menu.
front. You can select one of three predefined
thresholds:
Level 2 (red): visual and audible - "Distant",
alert, warning you that a collision is - "Normal",
imminent. - "Close". This function, also called automatic emergency
The message "Brake!" is displayed. The last threshold selected is kept in memory braking, aims to reduce the speed of impact or
when the ignition is switched off. avoid a frontal collision by your vehicle where
This level of alert is based on the time before the driver fails to react.
collision. It takes account of the vehicle Using a camera and, depending on the version,
dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the Intelligent emergency radar, this function acts on the vehicle's braking
one in front, the environmental conditions, the
operation of the vehicle (cornering, pedals
braking assistance system.
pressed, etc.) to trigger the alert at the best If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid
moment. a collision, this system will supplement the If the camera and/or radar have
braking, within the limits of the laws of physics. confirmed the presence of a vehicle
This assistance will only be provided if you or a pedestrian, this warning lamp
Where the speed of your vehicle is too press the brake pedal. flashes once the function is acting
high approaching another vehicle, the first
on the vehicle's brakes.
level of alert may not be displayed: the
level 2 alert may be displayed directly.
Important: if operation of the
Important: alert level 1 is never displayed
when the "Close" trigger threshold has
Active Safety Brake automatic emergency braking is
triggered, you should take back
been selected.
control of your vehicle and brake
with the pedal to add to or finish the
automatic braking action.
194
Driving
The driver can take back control of the vehicle Specific conditions for operation Deactivation of the system is
at any time by sharply turning the steering signalled by the illumination of this
wheel and/or pressing the accelerator pedal. The vehicle's speed must be between 3 mph indicator lamp, accompanied by the
and 53 mph (5 km/h and 85 km/h) (versions display of a message.
with camera alone) or 87 mph (140 km/h)
(versions with camera and radar) when
The point at which braking is triggered a moving vehicle is detected. The camera may be disrupted or not work
may be adjusted depending on the driving The vehicle's speed must not exceed 50 mph in the following situations:
actions of the driver, such as movement (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle is detected. - poor visibility (inadequate street
of the steering wheel or actions at the The vehicle's speed must not exceed 37 mph lighting, falling snow, heavy rain, dense
accelerator pedal. (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected. fog, etc.),
The ESC system must not be faulty. - dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
The DSC system must not be deactivated. vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
Operation of the function may be felt by All passenger seat belts must be fastened. road, leaving a tunnel, alternating
slight vibration in the brake pedal. Driving at a steady speed on roads with few shade and light, etc.),
If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, bends is required. - camera or radar obstructed (mud, frost,
the automatic braking is maintained for snow, condensation, etc.).
1 to 2 seconds.
6
On versions with camera alone, this
message indicates to you that the camera
is obstructed: "Driving aids camera:
After an impact, the function automatically
visibility limited, see user guide".
stops operating. Consult a PEUGEOT
With a manual gearbox, in the event of In these situations, detection performance
dealer or a qualified workshop to have the
automatic emergency braking until the may be reduced.
system checked.
vehicle comes to a complete stop, the
engine may stall.
With an automatic gearbox, in the event
of automatic emergency braking until the
vehicle comes to a complete stop, keep Deactivation/Activation
the brake pedal pressed down to prevent
By default, the system is automatically
the vehicle from starting off again.
activated at every engine start.
The system can be deactivated or activated via
the vehicle settings menu.
195
Driving
Malfunction The state of the system stays in memory when

Clean the windscreen regularly,
the ignition is switched off.
particularly the area in front of the camera.
In the event of a fault with the
The internal surface of the windscreen can
system, you are alerted by the
also become misted around the camera.
illumination of this warning lamp,
In humid and cold weather, demist the
accompanied by the display of
Driving time warning
windscreen regularly.
a message and an audible signal. The system triggers an alert once it
Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified detects that the driver has not taken
conceal the detection camera. workshop to have the system checked. a break after two hours of driving at
Clean the front bumper, especially around a speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
the radar, removing mud, snow, etc.
Fatigue detection system
It is recommended that you take a break as
soon as you feel tired or at least every two
hours.
Depending on version, the function either
has the "Driving time warning" only, or this
If the front bumper is to be repainted or
combined with the "Driver inattention alert".
touched up, contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop. Certain types of
paint could interfere with the operation of
the radar. The system cannot in any circumstances
replace the need for vigilance on the part
of the driver.
This alert is issued via the display of
Do not take the wheel if you are tired.
a message encouraging you to take a break,
The system is automatically deactivated accompanied by an audible signal.
after the use of the "space-saver" type If the driver does not follow this advice, the
spare wheel is detected, or if a fault with Activation/Deactivation alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is
the side brake lamps is detected. stopped.
The system is activated or deactivated via the
vehicle configuration menu. The system resets itself if one of the following
For more information on the menu, refer conditions is met:
to the section covering your screen in the - engine running, the vehicle has been
"Instruments" section. stationary for more than 15 minutes,
196
Driving
- the ignition has been switched off for a few Using a camera placed at the top
In certain driving conditions (poor road
minutes, of the windscreen, the system
surface or strong winds), the system may
- the driver's seat belt is unfastened and their assesses the driver's level of
give alerts independent of the driver's
door is open. vigilance by identifying variations
level of vigilance.
in trajectory compared to the lane
markings.
As soon as the speed of the vehicle drops
below 40 mph (65 km/h), the system goes This system is particularly suited to fast roads
into standby. (speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)). The following situations may interfere with
The driving time is counted again once the the operation of the system or prevent it
speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h). working:
- poor visibility (inadequate lighting of
the roadway, falling snow, heavy rain,
dense fog, etc.),
Driver inattention alert - dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
Depending on version, the "Driving time road, leaving a tunnel, alternating
warning" may be combined with the "Driver
6
shade and light, etc.),
inattention alert". - windscreen area located in front of the
camera: dirty, misted up, frost-covered,
snow-covered, damaged or covered by
a sticker,
When the system interprets the behaviour of
- lane markings absent, worn, hidden
the vehicle as indicating a certain fatigue or
(snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks,
inattention threshold on the part of the driver, it
etc.),
triggers the first level of alert.
- close to the vehicle ahead (lane
The driver is then alerted by the message
markings not detected),
"Take care!", accompanied by an audible
- roads that are narrow, winding, etc.
signal.
After three first level alerts, the system triggers

a new alert with the message "Take a break!",
accompanied by a more pronounced audible
signal.
197
Driving
Activation and deactivation of the

Lane Departure Warning system is done in the Vehicle/
The detection may be impeded:
System Driving menu of the touch screen.
- if the markings on the road are worn,
- if there is little contrast between the
System which, using a camera which markings on the road and the road
Select the "Driving functions" then the "Lane
recognises solid or broken lines, detects the surface,
departure warning system" tab.
involuntary crossing of longitudinal traffic lane - if the windscreen is dirty,
markings on the ground. The system state remains in memory when the - in certain weather conditions: fog,
To provide safe driving, the camera analyses ignition is switched off. heavy rain, snow, shade, bright
the image then, if the driver's attention drops sunlight or direct exposure to the sun
and the speed is higher than 37 mph (60 km/h), (low sun, leaving a tunnel, etc.).
triggers a warning if there is an unexpected
change of direction. Detection
This system is particularly useful on motorways
and main roads. If an unexpected change of direction
is detected, you are alerted by
this warning lamp flashing in the
instrument panel and an audible
Active Lane Departure
signal. Warning System
No warning is transmitted while the direction Using a camera placed at the top of the
indicator is active and for approximately windscreen to identify lane markings on the
20 seconds after the direction indicator is ground, this system corrects the trajectory of
switched off. the vehicle while alerting the driver if it detects
This system is a driving aid which cannot,
a risk of involuntary crossing of a line.
in any circumstances, replace the need for
This system is particularly useful on motorways
vigilance on the part of the driver. Operating fault and main roads.
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp

comes on in the instrument panel,
Activation/Deactivation accompanied by a message and an
audible signal.
This function cannot be deactivated on
versions without a touch screen. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
198
Driving
Conditions for operation Operation While the direction indicators are on and for
a few seconds after switching them off, the
The speed of the vehicle must be between Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle system considers that any change of trajectory
40 and 112 mph (65 and 180 km/h). involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings is voluntary and no correction is triggered
The carriageway must have at least one lane detected, it makes the correction to the during this period.
marking (solid or broken) on the ground. trajectory required to return the vehicle to its However, with the "Blind Spot Monitoring
The driver must hold the wheel with both initial path. System" activated, if the driver starts changing
hands. The driver will then notice a turning movement lane and another vehicle is detected in the
The change of trajectory must not be of the steering wheel. vehicle's blind spot, the system will correct
accompanied by operation of the direction the trajectory of the vehicle even though the
indicators. This warning lamp flashes during direction indicators are on.
The ESC system must be activated. trajectory correction. For more information on the Blind Spot
Monitoring System, refer to the corresponding
section.
This system is a driving aid which cannot,
in any circumstances, replace the need If the driver wishes to maintain the
for vigilance on the part of the driver. trajectory of the vehicle, they can prevent
The driver should remain in control of the If the system detects that the driver is not
6
the correction by keeping a firm grip on
vehicle in all circumstances. the wheel (during an avoiding manoeuvre, holding the wheel firmly enough during
The system helps the driver only when for example). an automatic correction of trajectory,
there is a risk of the vehicle involuntarily The correction is interrupted if the it interrupts the correction. An alert is
wandering from the lane it is being driven direction indicators are operated. triggered to encourage the driver to take
on. It does not manage the safe driving back control of the vehicle.
distance, the speed of the vehicle or the
brakes.
The driver must hold the steering wheel
with both hands in a way that allows
control to be taken back in circumstances
where the system is not able to intervene
(if lane markings disappear, for example).
It is necessary to observe the driving
regulations and take a break every two
hours.
199
Driving
Driving situations and associated alerts

To benefit from all necessary information on the instrument panel, you must previously select the "DRIVING" display mode.
The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed depending on the driving situation.
The display of these alerts is not sequential.
Status of the function Indicator lamp Display and associated message Comments
OFF System deactivated.
(grey)
ON System active, conditions not met:

- speed below 40 mph (65 km/h),
- no lane marking recognised,
- ESC deactivated or operation triggered,
- "sporty" driving.
ON Automatic deactivation/standby of the system (for example: detection

of a trailer, use of the "space-saver" spare wheel provided with the
vehicle).
200
Driving
Status of the function Indicator lamp Display and associated message Comments
ON Detection of lane markings.

Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
(green)
ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the risk of
involuntary crossing is detected (orange line).
(orange)/(green)
ON - If, during correction, the system detects that the driver has not held
the wheel for a few seconds, it interrupts the correction and returns
control to the driver.
6
- During correction of the trajectory, if the system determines that the
"Take back the wheel". correction will not be enough and that a solid line is crossed (orange
line): the driver is warned that they must complete the correction of
the trajectory.
201
Driving
Operating limits The system is not intended for driving in the

The following situations may interfere with
following situations:
the operation of the system or prevent it
The system goes into standby automatically in - driving on a speed circuit,
working:
the following cases: - driving with a trailer,
- conditions of poor visibility (inadequate
- ESC deactivated or operation triggered, - driving on a rolling stand,
street lighting, snowfall, rain, fog),
- Speed below 40 mph (65 km/h) or greater - driving on unstable surfaces.
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
than 112 mph (180 km/h),
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
- connected electrically to a trailer,
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating
- use of the "space-saver" spare
shade and light),
wheel detected (as detection is not
- windscreen area located in front of the Activation and deactivation of the
immediate, deactivation of the system is
camera: dirty, misted, frost-covered, system is done in the Vehicle/
recommended),
snow-covered, damaged or covered by Driving menu of the touch screen.
- dynamic driving style detected, pressure on
a sticker,
the brake or accelerator pedal,
- lane markings absent, worn, hidden
- driving where there are no lane markings, Select the "Driving functions" then the "Lane
(snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks),
- activation of the direction indicators, assist" tab.
- running close to the vehicle in front
- crossing the inside line on a bend,
(the lane markings may not be
- driving in a tight corner,
detected), The system state remains in memory when the
- inactivity by the driver detected during
- roads that are narrow, winding, etc. ignition is switched off.
correction.
Operating fault
Risk of undesirable operation
Deactivation of the system is recommended in
the following situations: In the event of a fault with the system, you are
- driving on a road surface in poor condition, alerted by the illumination of these warning
- unfavourable climatic conditions, lamps in the instrument panel, accompanied by
- driving on slippery surfaces (ice). the display of a message and an audible signal.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
202
Driving
- after a delay of about one second, when Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers
Blind Spot Monitoring overtaking a vehicle slowly. monitor the blind spots.
System The system state remains in memory when the
ignition is switched off.
This driving aid system is designed to
improve safety when driving and is in no
To deactivate the system, once
circumstances a substitute for the use
again select "Blind spot sensors"
of the interior rear view mirror and door
in the "Driving functions" tab.
mirrors. It is the driver's responsibility to
The indicator lamp goes off.
constantly check the traffic, to assess the
distances and relative speeds of other
vehicles and to predict their movements
before deciding whether to change lane.
This system warns the driver of the presence of This system is a driving aid which cannot, The system is automatically deactivated
another vehicle in the blind spot angle of their in any circumstances, replace the need for when towing with a towbar approved by
vehicle (areas hidden from the driver's field vigilance on the part of the driver. PEUGEOT.
of vision), as soon as this presents a potential
danger.
Activation and deactivation of the
Operation
Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers
6
system is done in the Vehicle/ monitor the blind spots.
Driving menu of the touch screen. The alert is given by an orange warning lamp
coming on in the relevant door mirror, as soon
as a vehicle – car, lorry, bicycle – is detected.
Select the "Driving functions" then the "Blind
The following conditions must be met for this:
spot sensors" tab.
- all vehicles are moving in the same direction
and in adjacent lanes,
This indicator lamp lights up on the
instrument panel.
A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on
the side in question:
- immediately, when being overtaken,
203
Driving
- the speed of the vehicle must be between Operating fault

7 and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h),
- you overtake a vehicle with a speed
difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h),
- a vehicle overtakes you with a speed
difference of less than 16 mph (25 km/h),
- the traffic is flowing normally, In the event of a fault with the system, this warning
- in the case of an overtaking manoeuvre, lamp flashes for a few moments in the instrument
if this is prolonged and the vehicle being panel, accompanied by the Service warning lamp
overtaken remains in the blind spot, coming on and the display of a message.
- you are driving on a straight or slightly
curved road, Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
- your vehicle is not towing a trailer, a workshop to have the system checked.
caravan, etc.
The system may suffer temporary
No alert will be given in the following situations: interference in certain weather conditions
- in the presence of non-moving objects (rain, hail, etc.).
(parked vehicles, safety barriers, street In particular, driving on a wet surface
lamps, road signs, etc.), or moving from a dry area to a wet area
- with vehicles moving in the opposite can cause false alerts (for example,
direction, the presence of a fog of water droplets
- driving on a winding road or a sharp corner, in the blind spot angle is interpreted as
- when overtaking or being overtaken by a vehicle).
a very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) which is In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
also in the rear blind spot and present in the sensors are not covered by mud, ice or
driver's front field of vision, snow.
- when overtaking quickly, Take care not to cover the warning zone in
- in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in the door mirrors or the detection zones on
front and behind are confused with a lorry or the front and rear bumpers with adhesive
a stationary object. labels or other objects; they may hamper
the correct operation of the system.
204
Driving
The system is automatically deactivated Parking sensors Rear parking sensors

when towing with a towbar approved by The system is switched on by engaging reverse
PEUGEOT. gear.
This is confirmed by an audible signal.
The system is switched off when you come out
of reverse gear.
High pressure jet wash
When washing your vehicle, direct the
lance at least 30 cm away from the
sensors.
Audible assistance
Active Blind Spot
Using sensors located in the bumper, this
Monitoring System
function warns of the proximity of obstacles
In addition to the fixed warning lamp in the door (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) entering
mirror on the side in question, a correction of their field of detection.
6
trajectory will be felt if you cross a lane marking
with the direction indicators on, to help you
This function is a manoeuvring aid which
avoid a collision.
cannot, in any circumstances, replace the
need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The proximity information is given by an
Conditions for operation The driver must remain attentive and stay intermittent audible signal, the frequency of
in control of their vehicle. which increases as the vehicle approaches the
The following systems must be activated:
They must always check the vehicle's obstacle.
surroundings before undertaking The sound emitted by the speaker (right or
a manoeuvre. left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is
During the entire manoeuvre, the driver located.
- Blind Spot Monitoring System, When the distance between the vehicle and
- Active Lane Departure Warning System. must ensure that the space remains clear.
the obstacle becomes less than approximately
thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes
For more information on the Blind Spot continuous.
Monitoring System and the Active Lane
Departure Warning System, refer to the
corresponding sections.
205
Driving
Visual assistance The sound emitted by the speaker (front or Deactivation/Activation

rear) locates the obstacle in relation to the
The system is activated or deactivated via the
vehicle – in the vehicle trajectory, in front
vehicle parameters menu in the screen.
or behind.
The state of the system stays in the memory
Side parking sensors

The rear parking sensors system will
be deactivated automatically if a trailer
or bicycle carrier is connected to
a towing device installed in line with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
It supplements the audible signal by displaying

bars on the screen that move progressively
nearer to the vehicle (white: more distant The parking sensors are deactivated while the
obstacles; orange: close obstacles; red: very Using four additional sensors located on the Park Assist system is measuring a space.
close obstacles). sides of the front and rear bumpers, the system For more information on Park Assist, refer to
When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger" records the position of fixed obstacles during the corresponding section.
symbol is displayed on the screen. the manoeuvre and signals them when they are
located by the sides of the vehicle.
Operating limits
Front parking sensors - Certain obstacles located in the sensors'
Only fixed obstacles are signalled blind spots may not be detected or no
In addition to the rear parking sensors, the
correctly. Moving obstacles detected longer be detected during the manoeuvre.
front parking sensors are triggered when an
at the beginning of the manoeuvre may - Sounds such as those emitted by noisy
obstacle is detected in front and the speed of
be signalled mistakenly, while moving vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries,
the vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h).
obstacles which appear at the sides of pneumatic drills, etc.) may interfere with the
The front parking sensors are interrupted if
the vehicle and which were not previously vehicle's sensors.
the vehicle stops for more than three seconds
in forward gear, if an obstacle is no longer recorded will not be signalled.
detected or when the speed of the vehicle
exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
206
Driving
- Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound With the engine running, these systems allow
High pressure washing
waves: pedestrians may not be detected. views of your vehicle's close surroundings to
When washing your vehicle, direct the
- Accumulated snow or dead leaves on the be displayed on the touch screen using one
lance at least 30 cm away from the
road surface can interfere with the vehicle's camera for Visiopark 1 and two cameras for
sensors.
sensors. Visiopark 2.
- A front or rear impact to the vehicle can
distort the settings of the sensors, which is
not always detected by the system: distance
measurements may be incorrect.
- The tilting of the vehicle if the boot is
Operating fault
very loaded can affect the distance If a fault occurs when shifting
measurements. to reverse, this warning lamp
- The sensors may be affected by poor comes on in the instrument panel,
weather conditions (heavy rain, thick fog, accompanied by a message and an
snowfall, etc.). audible signal (short beep).
6
workshop to have the system checked.
The screen is divided into two parts: on the

Recommendations on care Visiopark 1 – Visiopark 2 left, a contextual view; on the right, a view from
above the vehicle in its close surroundings.
The parking sensors supplement the
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the information on the view from above the vehicle.
sensors are not covered with mud, ice or
snow. When reverse gear is engaged, an
Different contextual views can be displayed in
audible signal (long beep) indicates that
the left-hand part:
the sensors may be dirty.
- standard view,
- 180° view,
- zoom view.
207
Driving
The display is immediately updated with the When the function is activated, it is possible
type of view selected. that the central view is not displayed. If the
system is activated after the vehicle has
The state of the system is not kept in memory
already been driven, the central view may be
completely displayed.
Principle of operation This system is a visual aid that cannot in

any circumstances replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
The blue lines 1 represent the width of your

vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their The images provided by the camera(s)
direction changes depending on the position of may be distorted by the relief.
the steering wheel. In the presence of areas in shade, or in
The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate
from the bumper; the two blue lines 3 and lighting, the image may be darkened and
4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively. with lower contrast.
Using one or two cameras, the close
surroundings of the vehicle are recorded whilst
AUTO mode is activated by default. manoeuvring at low speed.
In this mode, the system chooses the best view An image from above your vehicle in its close Recommendations on care
to display (standard or zoom) according to the surroundings is created in real time, as the In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
information from the parking sensors. vehicle manoeuvre progresses. sensors and camera lenses are not covered
You can change the type of view at any time This representation facilitates the alignment of with mud, ice or snow.
during a manoeuvre. your vehicle when parking and allows obstacles Check the cleanliness of the camera lenses
F Press the button in the bottom left-hand close to the vehicle to be seen. regularly.
corner of the touch screen. This image is automatically deleted if the If necessary, clean the cameras with a soft, dry
F Select the type of view: vehicle remains stationary for too long. cloth.
• "Standard view".
• "180° view", With Visiopark 2, the image is created using When washing your vehicle at high pressure,
• "Zoom view", both cameras, when going forward and when direct the lance at least 30 cm away from the
• "AUTO view". reversing. cameras and parking aid sensors.
208
Driving
Visiopark 1 AUTO mode The blue lines 1 represent the width of your
vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their
Rear vision direction changes depending on the position of
the steering wheel.
The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm
from the bumper; the two blue lines 3 and
4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively.
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
view selection menu.
This mode is activated by default. Zoom view

Using sensors in the rear bumper, the
To activate the camera, located in the tailgate, automatic view changes from a rear view
engage reverse and keep the speed of the to a view from above, as an obstacle is
vehicle below 6 mph (10 km/h). approached at the level of the red line (less
6
The system is deactivated: than 30 cm) during a manoeuvre.
- automatically above about 6 mph (10 km/h),
- automatically on opening the tailgate,
- when shifting out of reverse (the image Standard view
remains displayed for 7 seconds),
- by pressing the red cross in the top left-
hand corner of the touch screen.
The camera records the vehicle's surroundings

during the manoeuvre in order to create
a view from above the rear of the vehicle in its
near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be
manoeuvred around obstacles nearby.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the
screen.
209
Driving
It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and right C. The system is deactivated:

Obstacles may appear further away than
This view is available only from the view - automatically above about 6 mph (10 km/h),
they actually are in reality.
selection menu. - when shifting out of reverse (the rear view
It is important to check the sides of the
image is replaced by the front view image
vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the
for 7 seconds),
mirrors.
The rear parking sensors also provide Visiopark 2 - by pressing the red cross in the top left-
hand corner of the touch screen.
information on the vehicle's surroundings. The vehicle has a camera at the front, fitted
in the grille, and a camera at the rear, located
close to the tailgate opening control.
Using these cameras, the system displays If a trailer or a bicycle carrier is fitted to
180° view the vehicle's near surroundings in the touch the towball, the zone behind the vehicle on
screen, offering views from the rear of the the top view goes dark.
vehicle (rear vision), when reverse gear is The surroundings are reconstructed by the
engaged and views from the front of the vehicle front camera only.
(front vision), when the gearbox is in neutral or
a gear is engaged.
The rear vision views are similar to those for

the Visiopark 1.
For more information on Visiopark 1, refer to
Rear vision the corresponding section.
Front and rear vision
The 180° view facilitates reversing out of

a parking bay, making it possible to see the
approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.
This view is not recommended for carrying out
a complete manoeuvre. The system activates automatically when
reverse gear is engaged.
210
Driving
With the engine running and the Standard view Zoom view
speed below 12 mph (20 km/h), the
system is activated via the Vehicle/
Driving menu of the touch screen:
F Select "Panoramic visual aid".

AUTO mode is displayed by default, with front
vision, if the gearbox is in neutral or with a gear
engaged, or with rear vision, if reverse is
engaged.
The system is deactivated:

- automatically above about 19 mph (30 km/h)
(the image disappears temporarily from The area in front of your vehicle is displayed in The camera records the vehicle's surroundings
12 mph (20 km/h)), the screen. during the manoeuvre in order to create
- by pressing the red cross in the top left- The blue lines 1 represent the width of your a view from above the front of the vehicle in its
hand corner of the touch screen. vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be
6
direction changes depending on the position of manoeuvred around obstacles nearby.
the steering wheel. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm view selection menu.
AUTO mode from the front bumper; the two blue lines 3 and
4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively.
Obstacles may appear further away than
they actually are in reality.
It is important to check the sides of the
vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the
mirrors.
This mode is activated by default. The front and rear parking sensors also
Using sensors in the front bumper, the provide information on the vehicle's
automatic view changes from front view to the surroundings.
view from above as an obstacle is approached
during a manoeuvre.
211
Driving
180° view Park Assist The Park Assist system cannot work with
the engine off.
This system provides active assistance with
parking: it detects a parking space then
operates the steering system to park in this
space.
With a manual gearbox, the driver manages
the accelerator, brakes, gears and clutch.
With an automatic gearbox (EAT6/EAT8), the
driver manages the accelerator, brakes and
gears.
During phases of entry into and exit from
a parking space, the system provides visual
The Park Assist system provides assistance for
and audible information to the driver in order
the following manoeuvres:
to make the manoeuvres safe. It may be
necessary to move forwards and backwards A. Entry into a parallel parking space.
more than once. B. Exit from a parallel parking space.
C. Bay parking.
The 180° view assists with exiting from a parking The driver can take control at any time by
bay in forward gear, making it possible to see the gripping the steering wheel.
approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. During manoeuvring phases, the steering
This view is not recommended for carrying out wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold
a complete manoeuvre. the steering wheel, do not put your hands
It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and right C. This manoeuvring assistance system between the spokes of the steering wheel.
This view is available only from the view selection cannot, in any circumstances, replace the Watch out for any object that could block
menu. need for vigilance on the part of the driver. the manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarves,
The driver must remain in control of their ties, etc.) - Injury risk!
vehicle ensuring that the space remains
clear throughout the manoeuvre.
In some circumstances, the sensors may When the Park Assist is active, it prevents
not detect small obstacles located in their the Stop & Start going into STOP mode.
blind spots. In STOP mode, activating Park Assist
restarts the engine.
212
Driving
The Park Assist system takes control You should always check the surroundings During parking and exit from parking
of the assistance for a maximum of of your vehicle before starting manoeuvres, Visiopark 1 and Visiopark 2
4 manoeuvre cycles. The function is a manoeuvre. functions may come into operation. They
deactivated after these 4 cycles. If you facilitate monitoring of the surroundings
think that your vehicle is not positioned of the vehicle, by displaying additional
correctly, you should then take control of The parking sensors function is information in the instrument panel.
the steering to carry out the manoeuvre. not available during parking space For more information on Visiopark 1 and
measurement. It intervenes later when Visiopark 2, refer to the corresponding
manoeuvring to warn you that your vehicle section.
is approaching an obstacle: the audible
signal becomes continuous when the
The sequence of manoeuvres and the
obstacle is less than thirty centimetres
driving instructions are displayed in the
away.
instrument panel.
If you have deactivated the parking
The assistance is activated: sensors, they are automatically
the display of this symbol and reactivated during assisted parking Operation
a speed limit indicate that
6
manoeuvres.
the steering manoeuvres are Assistance with parallel parking
controlled by the system: do not manoeuvres
touch the steering wheel.
F When you have detected a parking space.
Activation of the Park Assist deactivates
the Blind Spot Monitoring System. F Select "Park Assist" in the
The assistance is deactivated: Vehicle/Driving menu of the
the display of this symbol touch screen to activate the
indicates that the steering function.
manoeuvres are no longer
controlled by the system: This indicator lamp comes on in
you must take control of the the instrument panel to confirm the
steering. activation of the system.
213
Driving
F Operate the direction indicator on the F Move forwards slowly until a message is
parking side chosen to activate the displayed, accompanied by an audible
measurement function. You should drive at signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from
the row of parked vehicles.
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to

a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h)
and select "Enter parallel
parking space" on the touch
screen.
To enter a parking space, the system does

not identify spaces that are clearly smaller F Drive slowly following the instructions until F Select reverse, release the steering wheel
or larger than the vehicle. the system finds a free space. and start moving without exceeding 4 mph
(7 km/h).
214
Driving
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in F Select "Park Assist" in the

progress. Vehicle/Driving menu of the
Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), move touch screen to activate the
forwards and backwards, aided by the function.
warnings from the "Parking sensors"
system, until the end of the manoeuvre is This indicator lamp comes on in
indicated. the instrument panel to confirm the
activation of the system.
F Press "Exit parallel parking

space" on the touch screen.
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
progress.
Without exceeding 3 mph (5 km/h), move
forwards and backwards, aided by the
warnings from the "Parking sensors"
system, until the end of the manoeuvre is
indicated.
F At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator

lamp goes off in the instrument panel,
accompanied by the display of a message
6
and an audible signal.
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
F Operate the direction indicator for the exit
over control.
side chosen.
F Engage reverse or forward gear and release
Assistance in exiting from the steering wheel.
a parallel parking space
F When you want to leave a parallel parking
space, start the engine.
The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's
front wheels are clear of the parking space.
215
Driving
At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp F Operate the direction indicator on the F Move forwards slowly until a message is
in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied parking side chosen to activate the displayed, accompanied by an audible
by the display of a message and an audible measurement function. You should drive at signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
signal. a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from
The assistance is deactivated: you can take the row of parked vehicles.
over control.
Assistance with bay parking

manoeuvres
F When you have detected a parking space.
F Select "Park Assist" in the

Vehicle/Driving menu of the
touch screen to activate the
function.
This indicator lamp comes on in F Drive slowly following the instructions until F Select reverse, release the steering wheel
the instrument panel to confirm the the system finds a free space. and start moving without exceeding 4 mph
activation of the system. (7 km/h).
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to When several successive bays are found,
a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) the vehicle will be directed towards the
and select "Enter bay parking last one.
space" on the touch screen.
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in

progress.
216
Driving
Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), follow Deactivation Switching off

the instructions displayed in the instrument
panel, aided by the warnings from the The system is deactivated by pressing the The system is switched off automatically:
"Parking sensors" system, until the end of the control. - when towing a trailer, connected electrically,
manoeuvre is indicated. The system is deactivated automatically: - if the driver's door is opened,
- on switching off the ignition, - if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 mph
- if the engine stalls, (70 km/h).
- if no manoeuvre is performed within To switch the system off for a prolonged period,
5 minutes of selecting the type of contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
manoeuvre workshop.
- after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during
a manoeuvre,
- if the wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) is
triggered,
- if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the Operating faults
stated limit,
- when the driver interrupts movement of the In the event of a fault, this warning
At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp lamp flashes for a few seconds,
steering wheel,
6
goes off in the instrument panel, accompanied accompanied by an audible signal.
- after 4 manoeuvre cycles,
by the display of a message and an audible
- on opening the driver's door, If the fault occurs during the use of the system,
signal.
- if one of the front wheels encounters an the warning lamp goes off.
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
obstacle.
over control.
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes In the event of a fault with the
During a bay parking manoeuvre, the Park off and a message is displayed accompanied power steering, this warning lamp
Assist system is automatically deactivated by an audible signal. is displayed in the instrument panel,
once the rear of the vehicle is within The driver should then take back control of the accompanied by a message.
20 inches (50 cm) of an obstacle. vehicle's steering.
workshop.
If the system is deactivated during
a manoeuvre, the driver should reactivate
it to repeat the measurement.
217
Driving
If the lateral distance between your vehicle

and the space is too great, the system may
not be able to measure the space.
Any object projecting beyond the
dimensions of the vehicle (e.g. a ladder on
the roof or a towball) will not be taken into
account by the Park Assist system during
a manoeuvre.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure that

the sensors are not covered by dirt, ice or
snow.
In the event of a fault, have the system
High pressure jet washing

When washing your vehicle, keep the lance at
least 12 inches (30 cm) away from the sensors.
218
PEUGEOT & TOTAL
A PARTNERSHIP FOR
PERFORMANCE!
The PEUGEOT TOTAL team knows how to push back the limits
of performance to win victories in the most difficult conditions,
as confirmed by the first three places achieved in 2017.
To obtain these exceptional results, the Peugeot Sport teams
chose TOTAL QUARTZ for the Peugeot 3008 DKR, a high-tech
lubricant that protects the engine in the most severe conditions.
TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the effects

of time.
TOTAL QUARTZ Ineo First is an ultra-high performance
lubricant, the result of collaboration between Peugeot and
Total's R&D teams. Specially formulated for the engines
in Peugeot vehicles, its innovative technology significantly
reduces CO2 emissions and provides efficient protection to
keep your engine clean.
Practical information
Fuel Refuelling
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 56 litres.
Reserve level: 6 litres.
Low fuel level

When the low fuel level is reached
in the fuel tank, this warning lamp
comes on in the instrument panel, To refuel in complete safety:
accompanied by the display of F You must switch off the engine.
a message and an audible signal. F With the vehicle unlocked, press the rear
When it first comes on, about part of the filler flap.
6 litres of fuel is left in the tank. F Turn the filler cap to the left.
A label on the inside of the fuel filler flap F Remove the filler cap and hook it onto the
Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp clip located on the inside of the filler flap,
reminds you of the type of fuel to use,
appears every time the ignition is switched on, F Fill up the tank completely, but do not
depending on your engine type.
accompanied by the display of a message and continue after the 3 rd cut-off of the nozzle;
Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres, in
an audible signal. When driving, this message this could cause malfunctions.
order to be registered by the fuel gauge.
and audible signal are repeated with increasing
Opening the filler cap may create a noise Once you have finished refuelling:
frequency as the fuel level drops towards 0.
caused by an inrush of air. This vacuum is F Refit the filler cap.
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out
entirely normal, resulting from the sealing of the F Turn it to the right.
of fuel.
fuel system. F Close the fuel filler flap.
For more information on Running out of fuel
(Diesel), refer to the corresponding section.
If you have put in the wrong fuel for your

vehicle, you must have the fuel tank
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, drained and filled with the correct fuel
never refuel with the engine in STOP before starting the engine.
mode; you must switch off the ignition
using the key, or the START/STOP button
if your vehicle has K eyless Entry and
Starting.
220
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) It remains possible to use a fuel can to fill

the tank.
(Depending on the country of sale.)
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
Mechanical device which prevents filling the
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in
tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It helps
direct contact with the flap of the misfuel
avoid the risk of engine damage that can result
prevention device and pour slowly.
from filling with the wrong fuel.
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel
prevention device appears when the filler cap
is removed. Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be
different in other countries, the presence
of the misfuel prevention device may make
refuelling impossible.
Operation Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with
misfuel protection, so before travelling
abroad, we recommend that you check
with the PEUGEOT dealer network,
whether your vehicle is suitable for the
fuel pumps in the country in which you
intend to travel.
7
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into
your Diesel tank, it comes into contact with the
flap. The system remains closed and prevents
filling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
filler nozzle.
221

Compatibility of fuels
Fuel used for Diesel
engines
The use of B20 or B30 fuel meeting recommend using winter-type Diesel fuel and
The Diesel engines are compatible with standard EN16709 is possible in your keeping the fuel tank more than 50% full.
biofuels that conform to current and future Diesel engine. However, this use, even If, despite this, at temperatures below -15°C
European standards and which can be occasional, requires strict application of (+5°F) the engine has problems starting,
obtained from filling stations: the special servicing conditions referred just leave the vehicle in a garage or heated
to as "Arduous conditions". workshop for a little while.
Diesel fuel that meets standard

EN590 mixed with a biofuel that meets
standard EN14214 (possibly containing
For more information, contact a PEUGEOT
up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
Fuel used for petrol engines
The petrol engines are compatible with biofuels
Diesel fuel that meets standard The use of any other type of (bio) fuel that conform to current and future European
EN16734 mixed with a biofuel that (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, standards and which can be obtained from
meets standard EN14214 (possibly domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited filling stations:
containing up to 10% Fatty Acid Methyl (risk of damage to the engine and fuel
Ester). system).
Petrol that meets standard EN228,

Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets mixed with a biofuel that meets
The only Diesel additives authorised
standard EN15940 mixed with a biofuel standard EN15376.
for use are those that meet the
that meets standard EN14214 (possibly
B715000 standard.
containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl
Ester).
Diesel at low temperature
At temperatures below 0°C (+32°F), the The only petrol additives authorised
formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel for use are those that meet the
fuels could entail an abnormal operation B715001 standard.
of the fuel supply circuit. To avoid this, we
222
Travelling abroad Use towing devices and their genuine Observe the maximum authorised towable
Certain fuels could damage the engine of harnesses approved by PEUGEOT. It weight, indicated on your vehicle's
your vehicle. is recommended that the installation registration certificate, the manufacturer's
In certain countries, the use of a particular be performed by a PEUGEOT dealer or label as well as in the Technical data
fuel may be required (specific octane a qualified workshop. section of this guide.
rating, specific trade name, etc.) to ensure If the towbar is not fitted by a PEUGEOT Complying with the maximum
correct operation of the engine. dealer, it must still be fitted in accordance authorised nose weight (ball joint)
For any additional information, contact a dealer. with the vehicle manufacturer's also includes the use of accessories
instructions. (bicycle carriers, tow boxes, etc.).
Important: for versions equipped with
Towing device the motorised tailgate with Hands-Free
Load distribution Tailgate Access function, if a towing
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the device other than a genuine PEUGEOT
Observe the legislation in force in the
heaviest items are as close as possible to one is installed, it is imperative to visit
country in which you are driving.
the axle and the nose weight approaches a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
the maximum permitted without exceeding workshop to recalibrate the detection
it. system: risk of Hands-Free Tailgate
Air density decreases with altitude, thus Access function failure.
Certain driving assistance or manoeuvring Vehicle equipped with motorised tailgate
reducing engine performance. The maximum with "Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
towed load must be reduced by 10% for every assistance functions are automatically
disabled if an approved towbar is used. function
7
1,000 metres of altitude. To avoid unwanted opening of the tailgate
when using the towing device:
- deactivate the Hands-Free Tailgate
Access function in advance in your
vehicle's configuration menu,
- or remove the electronic key from the
recognition zone, with the tailgate closed.
223
Towbar with quickly To know the Technical data, and, in

detachable towball particular, the towable weights for your
vehicle, refer to the corresponding section.
No tools are required to install or remove the To ensure complete safety while driving
towball on this genuine towbar system. with a Towbar system, refer to the
Presentation
Before each use

A. Locked position (the green marks are Check that the towball is correctly fitted,
opposite each other); the wheel is in verifying the follow points:
contact with the towball (no gap). - the green mark on the locking wheel
B. Unlocked position (red mark opposite is in line with the green mark on the
the green mark); the wheel is no longer towball,
in contact with the towball (gap of around - the locking wheel is in contact with the
5 mm). towball (position A),
- the security key lock is on and the key
1. Carrier. removed; the locking wheel can no
2. Protective plug. longer be operated,
3. Connection socket. - the towball must not be able to move in
Trailers with LED lamps are not
4. Safety eye. compatible with the wiring harness of this its carrier; test by shaking it with your
5. Detachable towball. device. hand.
6. Locking/unlocking wheel. If the towball is not locked, the trailer can
detach – accident risk!
7. Security key lock.
8. Key reference label.
224
During use Fitting the towball

Never release the locking system with
a trailer or load carrier on the towball.
Never exceed the maximum authorised
weight for the vehicle – the Gross Train
Weight or GTW.
It is essential that the maximum
authorised load be complied with on the
towing device: if it is exceeded, this device
may detach from the vehicle, which is
a serious accident risk.
Check that the trailer lamps work F The locking wheel 6 turns a quarter of
correctly. a turn anti-clockwise; take care to keep your
Before setting off, check the adjustment of F Below the rear bumper, remove the hands clear!
the headlamp beam height. protective plug 2 from the towball carrier 1.
For more information on Headlamp
adjustment, refer to the corresponding
section.
7
Following use
When travelling without a trailer or load
on a towbar-mounted carrier, the towball
must be removed and the protective plug
inserted in the carrier. This measure
applies particularly where the towball
might obscure visibility of the number
plate or its lighting. F Check that the mechanism has correctly
F Insert the end of towball 5 into carrier 1 and locked in to place (position A).
push it upwards; the locking will take place F Close the lock 7 using the key.
automatically.
225
Removing the towball F Remove the cap from the lock and press it
onto the head of the key.
F Always remove the key. The key cannot be

removed when the lock is open.
F Clip the cap onto the lock. F Give a quarter turn and pull the trailer plug
to disconnect it from socket 3 of the carrier. F Insert the key into the lock 7.
F Detach the cable on the trailer from the F Open the lock using the key.
safety eye 4 on the carrier.
F Detach the trailer from the towball.
F Refit the protective cover to the towball.
F Remove the protective cover from the

towball.
F Attach the trailer to the towball.
F Attach the cable on the trailer to the safety F Hold towball 5 firmly in one hand; using
eye 4 on the carrier. the other hand, pull and turn locking wheel
F Insert the trailer plug and give it a quarter 6 fully in a clockwise direction; do not
turn to connect it to socket 3 of the carrier. release the locking wheel.
226
Maintenance Energy economy mode

Correct operation is only possible if the towball System which manages the duration of use of
and its carrier are kept clean. certain functions to conserve a sufficient level
Before cleaning the vehicle with a high- of charge in the battery.
pressure jet wash, the towball must be removed After the engine has stopped, you can
and the protective plug fitted to the carrier. still use functions such as the audio and
telematics system, windscreen wipers, dipped
beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for
Apply the label provided to a clearly visible
a maximum combined duration of about forty
area, close to the carrier or in the boot.
minutes.
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
F Extract the towball from the bottom of its workshop for any work on the towbar
carrier 1. system. Switching to this mode
F Release the locking wheel; this
A message appears in the instrument panel
automatically stops in the unlocked position
screen indicating that the vehicle has switched
(position B).
to economy mode and the active functions are
Load reduction mode put on standby.
System which manages the use of certain If a telephone call is being made at this
functions according to the level of charge time, it will be maintained for around
remaining in the battery. 10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-free
7
When the vehicle is being driven, the load system of your audio system.
reduction function temporarily deactivates
certain functions, such as air conditioning,
heated rear screen, etc. Exiting the mode
The deactivated functions are reactivated
automatically as soon as conditions permit. These functions will be automatically restored
the next time the vehicle is used.
F Refit protective plug 2 to carrier 1.
In order to restore the use of these functions
F Carefully stow the towball in its bag away
immediately, start the engine and let it run:
from knocks and dirt.
- for less than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for approximately five minutes,
227
- for more than ten minutes, to use the Removing

For fitting and removing the screen, it is
equipment for up to approximately thirty
recommended that you get in touch with
minutes.
Let the engine run for the duration specified to
ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.
Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the
Before fitting or removing a screen,
engine in order to charge the battery.
ensure that the engine is off and the
cooling fan has stopped.
A flat battery prevents the engine from

starting. Fitting
For more information on the 12 V battery,
refer to the corresponding section. F Insert a finger into the notch in the upper
part of the screen.
F Pull towards you to unclip the unit.
Repeat these operations for the other screen.
Very cold climate screen

(Depending on country of sale.) The very cold climate screen must be
removed:
Prevents snow from accumulating at the - when the exterior temperature exceeds
radiator cooling fan. F Offer up the corresponding screen to the 10°C,
This removable device consists of two lower grille in the bumper. - when towing,
elements to be attached to the front bumper. F First insert the two lower fixing brackets into - at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
the bumper.
F Tilt the screen upwards until the three upper
fixing brackets click into the bumper.
F Check that the unit is firmly held by pressing
Snow chains
its edge. In wintry conditions, snow chains
Repeat these operations for the other screen. improve traction as well as the
behaviour of the vehicle when
braking.
228
Snow chains must be fitted only to the Installation tips Fitting roof bars
front wheels. They must never be fitted to F If you have to fit the chains during a journey,
"space-saver" type spare wheels. stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side As a safety measure and to avoid
of the road. damaging the roof, it is essential to use
F Apply the parking brake and position any the transverse bars approved for your
wheel chocks to prevent movement of your vehicle.
Take account of the legislation in force in vehicle. Observe the instructions on fitting and use
your country on the use of snow chains F Fit the chains following the instructions contained in the guide supplied with the
and the maximum authorised speed. provided by the manufacturer. roof bars.
F Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 31 mph
(50 km/h).
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow Fitting on longitudinal bars
type of wheel fitted to your vehicle: chains are correctly tightened.
It is strongly recommended that before

you leave, you practise fitting the snow
Original tyre size Maximum link size chains on a level and dry surface.
7
215/65 R17 9 mm
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
225/55 R18 9 mm
that have been cleared of snow to avoid
205/55 R19 9 mm damaging your vehicle's tyres and the
235/50 R19 cannot be fitted with chains road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with
alloy wheels, check that no part of the The transverse bars must be fixed at the
chain or its fixings is in contact with the engraved markings on the longitudinal bars.
For more information on snow chains, contact
wheel rim.
229
Fitting directly to the roof Maximum load distributed across the Sunroof
transverse roof bars, for a load height not Check that the load does not pass below
exceeding 40 cm (except bicycle carrier): the roof bars so that it does not impede
80 kg. the movements of the sunroof.
For more information, contact
workshop.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the Bonnet
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
road to avoid damaging the roof bars and Before doing anything under the bonnet,
the vehicle's anchorage points. deactivate the Stop & Start system to
For transporting objects which are longer avoid any risk of injury resulting from an
than the vehicle, refer to local legislation. automatic change to START mode.
The location of the interior bonnet release

lever prevents opening of the bonnet when
Recommendations the left-hand front door is shut.
Distribute the load uniformly, taking care
to avoid overloading one of the sides.
You must only attach the transverse bars to Arrange the heaviest part of the load as When the engine is hot, handle the
the four fixing points located in the roof frame. close as possible to the roof. exterior safety catch and the stay with
These points are concealed by the vehicle Lash the load securely. care (risk of burns), using the protected
doors when the doors are closed. Drive gently: the vehicle will be more area.
The roof bar fixings have a stud which must be susceptible to the effects of side winds When the bonnet is open, take care not to
inserted into the opening of each fixing point. and the stability of the vehicle may be damage the safety catch.
affected. Do not open the bonnet under very windy
On a long journey, check the security of conditions.
the load at every stop.
Remove the roof bars once they are no The cooling fan may start after
longer needed. switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might be
caught by the fan blades.
230
Opening Engine compartment

This engine example is given for illustration
purposes only.
The positions of the following elements may
change:
- Air filter.
- Engine oil dipstick.
- Engine oil filler cap.
- Priming pump.
- Degassing screw.
F Unclip the stay from its housing and place it 1. Screenwash fluid tank.
F Open the left-hand front door. in the support slot to hold the bonnet open. 2. Coolant tank.
F Pull the release lever, located at the bottom 3. Brake fluid tank.
of the door aperture, towards you. Closing 4. Battery/Fuses.
5. Remote earth point (-).
F Take the stay out of the support slot.
F Clip the stay in its housing. 6. Fusebox.
F Lower the bonnet and release it near the 7. Air filter.
end of its travel. 8. Engine oil dipstick.
F Pull on the bonnet to check that it is fully 9. Engine oil filler cap.
7
latched. 10. Priming pump*.
11. Degassing screw*.
Because of the presence of electrical The Diesel fuel system operates under
equipment under the bonnet, it is very high pressure.
recommended that exposure to water All work on this circuit must be carried out
F Lift the safety catch and raise the bonnet.
(rain, washing, etc.) be limited. only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
* Depending on engine.
231
Petrol engine(s) Checking levels

Check all of these levels regularly, in line with
the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them
up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the
corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT
The fluid must comply with the

manufacturer's recommendations and with
the vehicle's engine.
Take care when working under the bonnet,

as certain areas of the engine may be
Diesel engine(s) extremely hot (risk of burns) and the
cooling fan could start at any time (even
with the ignition off).
Used products
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
fluids with the skin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to health
or indeed very corrosive.
232
F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and Oil grade

Do not discard used oil or fluids into
pull it out completely.
sewers or onto the ground. Before topping up the oil or changing the oil,
F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean
Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or check that the oil is the correct grade for your
non-fluffy cloth.
a qualified workshop and dispose of it in engine and conforms to the manufacturer's
F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then
the containers reserved for this purpose. recommendations.
pull it out again to make the visual check:
the correct level is between marks A and B.
Topping up the engine oil level
Engine oil level The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the
corresponding underbonnet layout view.
The check is carried out either when F Unscrew the oil filler cap to access the filler
the ignition is switched on using the opening.
oil level indicator in the instrument F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
panel for vehicles equipped with an spills on engine components (risk of fire).
electric gauge, or using the dipstick. A = MAX
F Wait a few minutes before checking the
B = MIN
level again using the dipstick.
F Add more oil if necessary.
To ensure that the reading is correct, your F After checking the level, carefully refit the oil
vehicle must be parked on a level surface filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
with the engine stopped for more than
30 minutes.
7
If you find that the level is above the A mark or
below the B mark, do not start the engine.
- If the level is above the MAX mark (risk of
It is normal to top up the oil level between damage to the engine), contact a PEUGEOT
two services (or oil changes). PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
recommends that you check the level, and top - If the level is below the MIN mark, you must
up if necessary, every 3,000 miles (5,000 km). top up the engine oil. After topping up the oil, the check
when switching on the ignition with the
Checking using the dipstick oil level indicator in the instrument panel
The location of the dipstick is shown in the is not valid during the 30 minutes after
corresponding underbonnet layout view. topping up.
233
Engine oil change A low coolant level presents a risk of serious Screenwash fluid level
damage to your engine.
In order to maintain the reliability of the engine The coolant level should be close to the "MAX"
and emissions control system, never use mark but should never exceed it. Top up to the required level when
additives in the engine oil. If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark, necessary.
it is essential to top up.
Brake fluid level Capacity of the tank:
When the engine is hot, the temperature of the
The brake fluid level should be close coolant is regulated by the fan. - 5.3 litres for the "very cold climate"
to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check In addition, as the cooling system is versions.
the brake pad wear. pressurised, wait at least one hour after - 2.2 litres for other versions.
switching off the engine before carrying out any
Changing the fluid work. Fluid specification
To avoid the risk of scalding when you need to
The screenwash fluid must be topped up with
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule top up in an emergency, place a cloth around
a ready for use mix.
for details of the interval for this operation. the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to
In winter (temperatures below zero), a fluid with
allow the pressure to drop.
antifreeze must be used that is appropriate for
Fluid specification Once the pressure has dropped, remove the
the prevailing conditions, in order to preserve the
cap and top up to the required level.
elements of the system (pump, tank, ducts, etc.).
This fluid must conform to the manufacturer's
Filling with pure water is prohibited under all
recommendations.
The cooling fan may start after circumstances (risk of freezing, limestone
switching off the engine: take care deposits, etc.).
with articles and clothing that might be
caught by the fan blades.
Coolant level Diesel fuel additive level
(Diesel with particle filter)
Check the coolant level regularly. Fluid specification
It is normal to top up the fluid The additive reservoir low level is
This fluid must conform to the manufacturer's indicated by fixed illumination of this
between two services.
recommendations. warning lamp, accompanied by an
The check and top up must only be done with audible signal and a message that
the engine cold. the particle filter additive level is
too low.
234
Topping up For more information on the precautions Air filter

The reservoir must be topped up without delay to take before starting work on the 12 V
Depending on the environment
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. battery, refer to the corresponding
(e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the
section.
use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving),
replace it twice as often, if
AdBlue level necessary.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are
An alert is triggered once the reserve level is
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of
reached.
specific technology and specification.
To avoid the vehicle being immobilised as per
Its replacement should be carried out
Oil filter
regulations, you must top up with AdBlue.
only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Change the oil filter each time the
For more information on AdBlue and the SCR
workshop. engine oil is changed.
system, and in particular topping it up, refer to
the corresponding section.
Checks Passenger compartment filter Particle filter (Diesel)

Unless otherwise indicated, check these The start of saturation of the particle
Depending on the environment
components in accordance with the filter is indicated by the temporary
(e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the
manufacturer's service schedule and illumination of this warning lamp
use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving),
7
depending on your engine. accompanied by a message about
replace it twice as often, if
Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT the risk of the filter clogging up.
necessary.
As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
regenerate the filter by driving at a speed
A clogged passenger compartment of at least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the
12 V battery filter may have an adverse effect on warning lamp goes off.
the performance of the air conditioning If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates
The battery does not require any maintenance. system and generate undesirable odours. a low Diesel additive level.
However, check regularly that the terminals For more information on Checking levels,
are correctly tightened (versions without quick refer to the corresponding section.
release terminals) and that the connections
are clean.
235
On a new vehicle, the first particle Brake pads For more information on the Electric
filter regeneration operations may be parking brake, refer to the corresponding
Brake wear depends on the style
accompanied by a "burning" smell, which section.
of driving, particularly in the case
is perfectly normal.
of vehicles used in town, over short
Following prolonged operation of the
distances. It may be necessary to
vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
have the condition of the brakes Wheels and tyres
you may, in exceptional circumstances,
checked, even between vehicle
notice the emission of water vapour at the
services. The pressure must be checked on
exhaust on acceleration. This does not
all tyres, including the spare wheel,
affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in when the tyres are "cold", at least
environment. the brake fluid level indicates that the brake once a month and before a long
pads are worn. journey.
The pressures given on the tyre pressure label

are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven for
Manual gearbox Brake disc wear more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles
(10 kilometres) at more than 31 mph (50 km/h),
The gearbox does not require any For information on checking brake 0.3 bar (30 kPa) should be added to the values
maintenance (no oil change). disc wear, contact a PEUGEOT given on the label.
dealer or a qualified workshop. Under-inflation increases fuel consumption.
Non-compliant tyre pressure causes premature
wear on tyres and has an adverse effect on the
vehicle's road holding – Risk of an accident!
Automatic gearbox Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces
The gearbox does not require any Electric parking brake braking efficiency and control of the vehicle's
maintenance (no oil change). steering. Regular inspections of the condition
This system does not require any of tyres (tread and sides) and rims are
routine servicing. However, in the recommended as well as making sure that
event of a problem, have the system valves are fitted.
236
Using different size wheels and tyres from

those specified can affect the lifetime of tyres,
AdBlue® (BlueHDi Once the AdBlue ® tank is empty, a system
wheel rotation, ground clearance and the engines) required by regulations prevents starting
of the engine.
speedometer reading and have an adverse To respect the environment and ensure If the SCR system is faulty, the level of
effect on road holding. compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without emissions from your vehicle will no longer
Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles adversely affecting the performance or fuel meet the Euro 6 standard: your vehicle
can cause the ESC to mistime. consumption of Diesel engines, PEUGEOT becomes polluting.
has taken the decision to equip its vehicles In the event of a confirmed fault with the
with a system that associates SCR (Selective SCR system, you must go to a PEUGEOT
Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel particle filter dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as
Only use products recommended by (DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases. possible: after travelling the distance of
PEUGEOT or products of equivalent 685 miles (1,100 km), a system preventing
quality and specification. the engine starting will be triggered
In order to optimise the operation of SCR system automatically.
components as important as those in the In either case, a range indicator gives you
braking system, PEUGEOT selects and Using a liquid called AdBlue ® that contains
the distance you can travel before the
offers very specific products. urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of
vehicle is immobilised.
After washing the vehicle, dampness, or the nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and
in wintry conditions, ice can form on the water, which are harmless to health and the
brake discs and pads: braking efficiency environment.
may be reduced. Make light brake
7
applications to dry and defrost the brakes. For more information on the Warning
The AdBlue ® is contained in and indicator lamps and the associated
a special tank holding about alerts, refer to the corresponding section.
17 litres.
Freezing of the AdBlue ®

An alert system is triggered automatically once AdBlue ® freezes at temperatures below
the reserve level is reached: you can then drive around -11°C.
for a further 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the The SCR system includes a heater for the
tank is empty. AdBlue ® tank, allowing you to continue
driving in very cold conditions.
237
Supply of AdBlue® Recommendations on storage Ammonia vapour has an irritant effect on

mucous membranes (eyes, nose and throat).
AdBlue ® freezes at about -11°C and
deteriorates above 25°C. Bottles should be
It is recommended that the AdBlue ® be stored in a cool area and protected from direct
topped up as soon as the first alert is sunlight.
issued indicating that the reserve level has Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept
been reached. for at least a year. Keep AdBlue ® out of the reach of children,
If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it in its original container.
has completely thawed out.
In order to ensure that the SCR system
operates correctly:
- Use only AdBlue ® fluid that meets the Procedure
ISO 22241 standard. Never store AdBlue ® containers in your
Before starting the top up procedure, ensure
- Never transfer AdBlue ® to another vehicle.
that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level
container: it would lose its purity. surface.
- Never dilute AdBlue ® with water.
In winter, check that the temperature of the
Precautions for use vehicle is above -11°C. If not, in freezing
AdBlue ® is a urea-based solution. This fluid weather, the AdBlue ® cannot be poured into the
®
is non-flammable, colourless and odourless tank. Park your vehicle somewhere warmer for
You can obtain AdBlue from a PEUGEOT
(stored in a cool place). a few hours before topping up.
In the event of contact with the skin, wash the
affected area with soap and running water. In
the event of contact with the eyes, immediately In the event of an AdBlue ® breakdown,
You can also visit a service station rinse the eyes with large amounts of water confirmed by the message "Add AdBlue:
equipped with AdBlue ® pumps specially or with an eye wash solution for at least Starting impossible", you must top up with
designed for private vehicles. 15 minutes. If a burning sensation or irritation at least 5 litres.
persists, get medical attention.
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
Never top up from an AdBlue ® dispenser In certain conditions (high temperature, for
reserved for heavy goods vehicles. Never pour AdBlue ® into the Diesel fuel
example), the risk of release of ammonia
tank.
cannot be excluded: do not inhale the fluid.
238
If any AdBlue ® is splashed, or if there are Important:

any spillages on the side of the bodywork, - To avoid overflowing the AdBlue ® tank,
rinse immediately with cold water or wipe it is recommended:
with a damp cloth. • To top up between 10 and 13 litres
If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off using AdBlue ® containers.
using a sponge and hot water. Or
• Not to keep on trying after the
nozzle's first automatic stop if you
Important: in the event of a top-up after are refuelling at a filling station.
a breakdown because of a lack of - If your vehicle's AdBlue ® tank is
AdBlue, you must wait around 5 minutes completely empty – which is confirmed
before switching on the ignition, without by the alert messages and the
opening the driver's door, locking the impossibility of starting the engine –
vehicle, introducing the key into the you must add at least 5 litres.
ignition switch, or introducing the key of
the Keyless Entry and Starting system
into the passenger compartment.
Switch on the ignition, then wait for
10 seconds before starting the engine. F With the vehicle unlocked and the fuel filler
flap open, turn the blue cap of the AdBlue ®
7
tank 1/6 of a turn anti-clockwise.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key F Release the blue cap.
After refilling
from the switch to switch off the engine.
or F Obtain an AdBlue ® container. After first F Refit the blue cap to the tank filler and turn it
F With K
eyless Entry and Starting, press the checking the use-by date, read the 1/6 of a turn clockwise, to its stop.
"START/STOP" button to switch off the instructions on the label carefully before F Close the fuel filler flap.
engine. pouring the contents of the container or
bottle into your vehicle's AdBlue tank.
Or Do not dispose of AdBlue ® containers in
the household waste.
F Insert the AdBlue ® pump nozzle and refill
Place them in a suitable container or
the tank until the nozzle stops automatically.
take them to your dealer.
239
In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle Assembling the triangle For more information on Misfuel

For versions supplied with a triangle as original prevention (Diesel), refer to the
As a safety precaution, before leaving your corresponding section.
vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch equipment:
on the hazard warning lamps and put on your F remove the triangle from its case,
high visibility vest. F unfold the legs,
F open out the two sides of the triangle,
F clip them together to complete the With 1.6 BlueHDi and
assembly. 2.0 BlueHDi 150 S&S engines
Storage compartment F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
For other versions, refer to the instructions Diesel.
provided with the triangle. F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
engine).
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the
ignition.
F Repeat the operation 10 times.
Positioning the triangle F Operate the starter to run the engine.
F Place the triangle behind the vehicle, as

required by local legislation.
With 1.5 BlueHDi and
2.0 BlueHDi 180 S&S engines
Running out of fuel
There is a compartment in the interior trim of F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
the tailgate to store a triangle.
(Diesel) Diesel.
F Open the tailgate. On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
F Release the cover by turning the screw system must be primed if you run out of fuel. engine).
a quarter turn anti-clockwise. If the engine does not start first time, do not F Wait around 1 minute and switch off the
keep trying, but start the procedure again from ignition.
the beginning. F Operate the starter to run the engine.
If the engine does not start, repeat the
procedure.
240
With 2.0 HDi engines List of tools For versions with a temporary

puncture repair kit:
F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
Diesel.
F Open the bonnet.
F If necessary, unclip the cover to access the
priming pump.
F Loosen the degassing screw.
F Use the priming pump until fuel appears in
the transparent tube.
F Retighten the degassing screw.
F Operate the starter until the engine starts (if
the engine does not start at the first attempt,
wait around 15 seconds before trying 1. Chocks to immobilise the vehicle
again). (depending on equipment).
F If the engine does not start after a few 2. Socket for the security bolts (located in 4. Temporary puncture repair kit.
attempts, operate the priming pump again the glove box) (depending on equipment). Contains a 12 V compressor and
then start the engine. Used for adapting the wheelbrace to the a cartridge of sealant to temporarily repair
F Put it back in place, clip in the cover and special "security" bolts. the wheel and adjust the tyre pressure.
ensure it is clipped in.
3. Removable towing eye.
F Close the bonnet. For more information on the Temporary
For more information on Towing the vehicle puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding
and using the removable towing eye, refer to section.
Tool kit the corresponding section.
8
This is a set of tools provided with the vehicle.
Its content depends on your vehicle's
equipment:
- temporary puncture repair kit,
- spare wheel.
241
For versions with a spare wheel: Some of the tools are stored beneath the floor
All of these tools are specific to your
against the boot sill.
vehicle and may vary depending on
The left box contains the wheelbrace and its
equipment.
extension piece.
Do not use them for any other purposes.
The right box contains the wheel chocks and
the towing eye.
To gain access to them:
The jack must only be used to change F open the boot,
a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. F fold the concertina boards back,
Do not use any jack other than the one F install the third row seats,
supplied with this vehicle. F unclip the required tools from the boot sill
If the vehicle does not have its original trim.
jack, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop to obtain the correct
jack for it.
5. Wheelbrace. The jack meets European standards, For versions with a temporary
For removing the hub cap and removing as defined in the Machinery Directive puncture repair kit
the wheel bolts. 2006/42/CE.
6. Jack with integrated handle. The jack does not require any
Used to raise the vehicle. maintenance.
7. Wheel bolt cover remover (depending on
equipment). Access to the tools
For removing the wheel bolt head finishers
on alloy wheels.
8. Wheelbrace extension.
For slackening/tightening the spare wheel
carrier nut.
For more information on the Spare wheel, refer Model without storage box
to the corresponding section. This kit, stored in a bag, is installed behind the
second row left-hand seat.
F Fold the seat backrest onto the cushion to
access the bag.
242
Model with storage box Composition of the kit

This kit is installed in the storage box, located
Temporary puncture
in front of the left-hand seat on the second row. repair kit
F Open the storage box cover to access the
kit.
Scan the QR code on page 3 to view

explanatory videos.
For versions with a spare wheel
Comprising a compressor and a sealant

cartridge, it allows the temporary repair of
a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest
garage. 1. 12 V compressor, with integral pressure
It is designed to repair most punctures which gauge.
could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread 2. Sealant cartridge, with integral hose.
or shoulder. 3. Speed limit sticker.
The vehicle's electric system allows the Repair procedure

connection of the compressor for long
This tool box is installed at the centre of the F Park the vehicle without obstructing any
spare wheel beneath the vehicle. enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
traffic and apply the parking brake.
repair.
It contains the jack and the wheel bolt cover F Follow the safety instructions (hazard
removal tool. warning lamps, warning triangle, wearing
8
F First, access the spare wheel. high visibility vest, etc.) according to the
For more information on the Spare wheel, refer legislation in force in the country where you
to the corresponding section. are driving.
F Switch off the ignition.
F Press the tab to unlock the cover.
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
F While keeping the tab pressed in, slide the
compressor.
cover to the middle and remove it.
243
F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
repaired, and place it in a clean area. the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Only the 12 V sockets located at the front

of the vehicle and in the boot can be used
to power the compressor.
The 12 V socket located at the back of
the centre console is not suitable for this
purpose.
F Connect the pipe from the compressor to

the bottle of sealant.
F Affix the speed limit sticker.
Avoid removing any foreign bodies which F Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant
have penetrated into the tyre. to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and
tighten firmly.
F Check that the compressor switch is at The speed limit sticker must be secured
position "O". to the interior of the vehicle in the driver's
F Fully uncoil the electric cable, stowed under field of vision, to remind you that a wheel
the compressor. is in temporary use.
The tyre inflation pressures are given on

F Turn the sealant bottle over and secure it in this label.
the notch provided on the compressor.
244
F Switch on the ignition. F Remove the kit.

Do not exceed the speed of 50 mph
F Remove and then store the bottle of sealant.
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired
using this type of kit.
Take care, the sealant product is harmful

if swallowed and causes irritation to the
eyes. Checking/adjusting tyre
Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
pressures
The use-by date of the fluid is marked on
the bottle. You can also use the compressor,
After use, do not discard the bottle in without injecting sealant, to check and, if
standard waste, take it to a PEUGEOT necessary, adjust the tyre pressures.
F Start the compressor by turning the switch
dealer or an authorised waste disposal
to position "l" until the pressure of the tyre
site.
reaches 2.0 bars. The sealant product is F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and
Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of
injected under pressure into the tyre; do not keep it in a clean place.
sealant, available from a PEUGEOT
disconnect the pipe of the valve during this F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
operation (risk of blowback). compressor.
If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after

about 7 minutes, this indicates that the
tyre is not repairable; contact a PEUGEOT
8
dealer or a qualified workshop for
assistance.
F Drive immediately for approximately three miles

F Place the switch in the "O" position.
(five kilometres), at reduced speed (between 12 and
F Disconnect the compressor's electric plug
37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to plug the puncture. F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten
from the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Stop to check the repair and measure the tyre
F Refit the cap on the valve. firmly.
pressure using the kit.
245
F Check that the compressor switch is at F Once the correct pressure is reached, put
position "O". the switch to the "O" position.
F Fully uncoil the electric cable, stowed under F Remove the kit then stow it.
the compressor.
The tyre inflation pressures are given on
this label.
Do not drive more than 125 miles (200 km)
with the repaired tyre; see a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop to change
the tyre.
Should the pressure of one or more tyres

be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise
the under-inflation detection system.
For more information on Under-inflation
detection, refer to the corresponding
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to section.
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Switch on the ignition.
F Start the compressor by placing the switch
at position "I" and adjust the pressure to the
Only the 12 V sockets located at the front value shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure
of the vehicle and in the boot can be used label. To deflate: press the black button Spare wheel
to power the compressor. located on the compressor pipe, near the
The 12 V socket located at the back of valve connection.
Scan the QR code on page 3 to view
the centre console is not suitable for this explanatory videos.
purpose.
If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after Procedure for changing a damaged wheel with
7 minutes, this indicates that the tyre is not the spare wheel using the tools provided with
repairable; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or the vehicle.
a qualified workshop for assistance.
246
Access to the spare wheel F Fold the concertina board and install the
third row seat, on the left-hand side (if your
vehicle is equipped with it).
F Lift the pre-cut section of carpet to remove
the fixing winch nut from the spare wheel.
F With extension piece 8 put on the edge of
wheelbrace 5, turn the nut in the "tightening"
direction to unwind the winch cable until the
spare wheel is flat on the ground. Unwind
the length needed for an easy access to the
wheel.
F Detach the connecting piece from the cover
The spare wheel is held by a winch system of the tool box (B – C).
underneath the back of the vehicle. F Pass the connecting piece through the
wheel hub to release it (D).
Only a "space-saver" type spare wheel

may be fixed beneath the vehicle. Tool storage
Taking out the spare wheel
8
F Pull out the wheel and box assembly from
the rear of the vehicle.
F Straighten the spare wheel to access the
tool box (A).
F Refit the appropriate tools in the box and

close the cover again.
F Place the tool box on the ground.
247
F Insert the connecting piece into the tool box F Centre and position the spare wheel on the
When the spare wheel is fitted in place of
hole (B – C). tool box (D).
a wheel with a punctured tyre, the winch
F Reel in the winch by loosening the winch
and tool box must be placed beneath the
control nut with wheelbrace 5 and extension
vehicle again before restarting.
piece 8: once the cable is completely reeled
in, you should no longer feel any resistance.
F Store the rest of the tools in the storage
areas in the boot sill trim.
The punctured wheel cannot be stored

beneath the vehicle.
It must be placed in the boot. Use a pad to F Insert the centring guide into the wheel hub.
protect the inside of the boot. F Place the wheel/box assembly beneath the
rear end of the vehicle.
F Straighten the wheel.
F Pass the connecting piece through the
Putting the winch and spare wheel hub (A).
wheel back in place
F Refit the wheel/box assembly beneath the

vehicle by "loosening" the winch control nut
F Place the appropriate tools in the box and
with wheelbrace 5 and extension piece 8.
close the cover again. F Insert the connecting piece into the tool box
F Place the tool box on the ground. hole (B – C).
248
F Tighten it fully. When the cable is

Parking the vehicle
completely reeled in, turning the nut no
Immobilise the vehicle where it does not
longer encounters resistance.
block traffic: the ground must be level,
F Check that the wheel is properly flattened
stable and non-slippery.
against the floor.
Apply the parking brake, unless it is
programmed to be in automatic mode;
switch off the ignition and with a manual
Removing a wheel gearbox, engage first gear so as to lock
the wheels.
Apply the parking brake, unless it is
Wheel with wheel trim
programmed to be in automatic mode;
When removing the wheel, first remove
switch off the ignition and with an
the wheel trim by pulling at the valve
automatic gearbox, select mode P so as to
aperture using the wheelbrace.
lock the wheels.
When refitting the wheel, after tightening
Check that the parking brake warning F To remove the wheel bolt cover on each of
the wheel bolts, refit the wheel trim,
lamps in the instrument panel are on fixed the bolts, use tool 7 (alloy wheels).
starting by placing its aperture in line with
(not flashing). F Fit the security socket 2 on the wheelbrace
the valve and then pushing it into place all
The occupants must get out of the vehicle 5 to slacken the security bolt.
round its edge with the palm of your hand.
and wait where they are safe. F Slacken the other bolts using the
If necessary, place a chock under the wheelbrace 5 only.
wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
changed.
Never go underneath a vehicle raised
using a jack; use an axle stand.
249
F Extend the jack 6 until its head comes

Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
into contact with the jacking point A or B,
ground is slippery or loose, the jack may
whichever is used; the contact area A or
slip or drop – Risk of injury!
B on the vehicle must be properly inserted
Take care to position the jack strictly at
into the central part of the head of the jack.
one of the jacking points A or B under
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
the vehicle, ensuring that the head of the
space between the wheel and the ground
jack is centred under the contact area on
to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel
the vehicle. Otherwise, there is a risk of
easily.
damage to the vehicle and/or of the jack
dropping – Risk of injury!
Fitting a wheel
F Place the foot of the jack 6 on the ground

and ensure that it is directly below the front
A or rear B jacking point provided on the
underbody, whichever is closest to the
wheel to be changed.
F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean

place.
Fitting a steel or "space-saver" spare
F Remove the wheel.
wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels,
when tightening the bolts on fitting it is
normal to notice that the washers do not
come into contact with the steel or "space-
saver" spare wheel. The wheel is secured
by the conical contact of each bolt.
250
After changing a wheel
With a "space-saver" type spare wheel
The following is recommended:

- deactivate some driving aid functions
F Put the wheel in place on the hub. F Tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace
(Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise
F Screw in the bolts by hand as far as 5 fitted with the security socket 2.
control with Stop function, etc.), as
possible. F Tighten the other bolts using wheelbrace
indicated on the label attached to the
F Pre-tighten the security bolt using the 5 only.
wheel,
wheelbrace 5 fitted with the security socket 2. F Refit the bolt covers to the bolts (depending
- do not exceed the maximum
F Pre-tighten the other bolts using wheelbrace on equipment).
authorised speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
5 only. F Store the tools.
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified

workshop as soon as possible to have the
tightness of the bolts and the pressure of
8
the spare wheel checked.
Have the punctured tyre examined. After
inspection, the technician will advise you
on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it
must be replaced.
F Lower the vehicle again fully.

F Fold jack 6 and detach it.
251
Changing a bulb In some weather conditions (e.g. low Front lamps

temperature or humidity), the presence
The headlamps have polycarbonate of misting on the internal surface of the
Model with "Full LED" headlamps
lenses with a protective coating: glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is
F do not clean them using a dry or normal; it disappears after the lamps have
abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent been on for a few minutes.
or solvent product,
F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH
neutral product,
F when using a high pressure washer Light emitting diodes (LED)
on persistent marks, do not keep the For the replacement of this type of bulb,
lance directed towards the lamps or you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
their edges for too long, so as not to a qualified workshop.
damage their protective coating and
seals.
Halogen bulbs
1. Direction indicators (LED).
To ensure good quality lighting, check
2. Main beam/dipped beam headlamps
that the bulb is correctly positioned in its
(LED).
Changing a bulb must only be done with housing.
3. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps
the ignition off and after the headlamp has
(LED).
been switched off for several minutes –
4. Light-emitting diodes (LED).
Risk of serious burns!
F Do not touch the bulb directly with your
Do not touch the "Full LED" headlamps.
fingers, use a lint-free cloth.
Risk of electrocution!
It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet
Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
(UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the
workshop.
headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a new
bulb with the same type and specification.
252
Model with halogen headlamps Changing direction indicator To refit, close the protective cover very
bulbs (on models with halogen carefully to guarantee the leak-tightness
headlamps) of the lamp.
Quicker flashing of the direction indicator

lamp (left or right) indicates the failure of
one of the bulbs on the corresponding Changing dipped beam headlamp
side. bulbs (on models with halogen
headlamps)
1. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps

(LED).
2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7).
3. Main beam headlamps (HB3).
4. Direction indicators (PWY24W).
5. Foglamps (H11).
Opening the bonnet/Access to bulbs

Engine warm, proceed with caution – Risk F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull F Remove the protective cover by pulling the
of burns! it out. tongue.
Take care with objects or clothing that F Turn the bulb a quarter turn, pull it out and F Pull the connector back to disconnect it.
8
could be caught in the blades of the fit a new bulb. F Pull the bulb back to extract it.
engine fan – Risk of strangulation! To refit, carry out these operations in reverse F Replace the bulb.
order. To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
Amber colour bulbs, such as the direction

indicators, must be replaced by bulbs with
identical colour and specifications.
253
Changing main beam headlamp Changing foglamp bulbs (on F Disconnect the bulb holder connector.
bulbs (on models with halogen models with halogen headlamps) F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull
headlamps) it out.
F Change the assembly.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
To replace this type of bulb, you can also

contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Direction indicator side repeaters

F Remove the protective cover by pulling the F Introduce a flat screwdriver in the hole in (LED)
tongue. the trim.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull F Pull and lever to unclip the foglamp trim.
it out. F With a Torx screwdriver, remove the two
F Pull the bulb out and replace it. module fixing screws.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse F Remove the module from its housing.
order.
254
Side spotlamps (LED) 1. Brake lamps (LED). F Manually unscrew and remove the lamp
2. Sidelamps/daytime running lamps fixing nut.
(LED). F Disengage the retaining clip, while pushing
3. Direction indicators (WY16W amber). the lamp out slightly.
4. Reversing lamps (W16W).
5. Foglamp (P21W).
LEDs: light-emitting diodes.
Direction indicators (on the

wings)
Rear lamps
F From the outside, carefully remove the lamp

by pulling it to the rear, then up.
F Disconnect the lamp connector.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn using
a standard pair of pliers and pull it out.
F Pull the bulb out and replace it.
8
order.
F Open the tailgate then unclip the access
cover on the side in question.
F Unblock the lamp fixing nut with a 10 mm
box spanner.
F To avoid losing the nut if it drops into the
wing trim, first place a cloth below it.
255
Reversing lamps (on the tailgate) F From the outside, carefully remove the lamp
If changing a bulb within a few minutes
by pulling it to the rear.
of switching off the ignition, take care not
F Disconnect the lamp connector by pressing
to touch the exhaust – there is a risk of
on each side.
burns!
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull
it out.
F Pull the bulb out and change it.
Third brake lamp (LED)
order.
Foglamps
F Open the tailgate, then insert a flat

screwdriver into the cut-out to unclip the
access cover on the side in question.
F Unblock the lamp fixing nut with a 10 mm
box spanner.
F Manually unscrew and remove the lamp
fixing nut.
Licence plate lamps
F Disengage the retaining clip, while pushing
the lamp out slightly. These bulbs are replaced from outside the rear
bumper:
F Pass your hand under the bumper,
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and
remove it,
F Turn the bulb a quarter turn, pull it out and
change it.
F Insert a thin screwdriver into the slot in the
lens.
order.
F Push it out to unclip it.
F Remove the lens.
F Pull the bulb out and change it.
256
Changing a wiper blade After refitting a front wiper

F Switch on the ignition.
F Operate the wiper control stalk again to
Before removing a front park the wiper blades.
wiper
Changing a fuse
Access to tools
The extraction tweezers are located behind the
fusebox cover.
F Open the glove box.
F Press on the centre handle of the fusebox
cover.
F Lower the cover completely.
F Take the tweezers from their housing.
F Within one minute after switching off the

ignition, operate the wiper control stalk to Changing a fuse
position the wiper blades in the middle of
Before changing a fuse:
the windscreen (maintenance position).
F identify the cause of the failure and correct
it,
Removing F switch off all electrical consumers,
8
F Lift the corresponding wiper arm away from F immobilise the vehicle and switch off the
the windscreen. F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, ignition,
F Unclip and remove the wiper blade. then right. F identify the defective fuse using the current
F Disengage the cover completely and turn it allocation tables and diagrams.
Refitting over.
F Take the tweezers from their housing.
F Position and clip the new wiper blade to the
arm.
F Carefully lower the wiper arm.
257
To work on a fuse, you must:

PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility for
F use the special tweezers to extract the fuse
the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle
from its housing and check the condition of
or for rectifying malfunctions resulting
its filament,
from the installation of accessories
F always replace the defective fuse with
not supplied and not recommended by
a fuse of the same rating (same colour);
PEUGEOT and not installed in accordance
using a different rating could cause Good Faulty
with its instructions, in particular when
a malfunction (risk of fire).
the combined consumption of all of the
If the fault recurs after replacing a fuse, have
additional equipment connected exceeds
the electrical system checked by a PEUGEOT
10 milliamperes.
Tweezers Fuses in the dashboard

The fuse allocation tables and the
The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard
corresponding diagrams are available
(left-hand side).
from a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Installing electrical accessories To access the fuses, follow the same procedure
workshop. Your vehicle's electrical system is as that described for accessing the tool kit for
designed to operate with standard or changing fuses.
optional equipment. For more information on Access to tools,
The replacement of a fuse not shown Before installing other electrical refer to the corresponding section.
in the allocation tables may cause equipment or accessories on your vehicle,
a serious malfunction of your vehicle. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
workshop.
258
Version 1 (Full)
Box 1
Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions

F1 3 A Keyless Entry and Starting.
F2 5 A Multifunction screen.
F5 5 A Reversing camera, parking sensors.
F7 10 A Hi-Fi amplifier.
F8 20 A Rear wiper.
F10 30 A Locks.
F11 30 A Locks.
F17 10 A Boot 12 V accessory socket.
F18 5 A Emergency and assistance calls.
F22 3 A Glove box lighting.
F26 3 A Seat belts not fastened warning lamps display.
F27 3 A Rain/sunshine sensor.
F31 5 A Airbags.
F33 15 A Front 12 V accessory socket
8
F35 5 A Instrument panel.
F36 20 A Audio system, touch screen, CD player, audio/
navigation system.
Box 2

F17 10 A Storing driving positions.
259
Version 2 (Eco)

F4 15 A Horn.
F5 20 A Front screenwash pump.
F6 20 A Rear screenwash pump.
F7 10 A 12 V accessory socket.
F8 20 A Rear wiper.
F10 30 A Locks.
F11 30 A Locks.
F14 5 A Alarm siren.
F17 5 A Instrument panel.
F22 3 A Rain/sunshine sensor.
F24 5 A Reversing camera, parking sensors.
F25 5 A Airbags.
F27 5 A Alarm.
F28 5 A Emergency and assistance calls.
F29 20 A Audio system, touch screen, CD player, audio/
navigation system.
F32 15 A Cigarette lighter.

F36 5 A Glove box lighting.
260
Engine compartment fuses Version 1 (Full)

The fusebox is placed in the engine Box 1
compartment near the battery.
F14 15 A Screenwash pump.
F15 5 A Power steering.
Access to the fuses
F20 25 A Screenwash pump.
F22 15 A Horn.
F23 15 A Right-hand main beam headlamp.
F24 15 A Left-hand main beam headlamp.
Box 2

F8 30 A Diesel emissions control system (AdBlue)
F12 15 A Automatic gearbox.
F Release the two latches A. F14 5 A Automatic gearbox.
F Remove the cover.
F Change the fuse.
F When you have finished, close the cover
carefully then engage the two latches A, to
Version 2 (Eco)
8
ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.
F16 25 A Front foglamps.
F18 10 A Right-hand main beam headlamp.
F19 10 A Left-hand main beam headlamp.
261
12 V battery Access to the battery Starting using another

Procedure for starting the engine using another The battery is located under the bonnet.
battery
battery or charging a discharged battery. When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a backup battery
(external or from another vehicle) and jump
leads or using a battery booster.
General points
Lead-acid starter batteries
Never try to start the engine by connecting
Batteries contain harmful substances a battery charger.
such as sulphuric acid and lead. Never use a 24 V or higher battery
They must be disposed of in accordance booster.
with regulations and must not, in any Check beforehand that the backup
circumstances, be discarded with battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and
For access to the (+) terminal:
household waste. a capacity at least equal to that of the
F release the bonnet using the interior release
Take used remote control batteries and discharged battery.
lever, then the exterior safety catch.
vehicle batteries to a special collection The two vehicles must not be in contact
F lift the bonnet, then hold it in place with its
point. with each other.
prop.
Switch off all the electrical consumers
(+) Positive terminal. on both vehicles (audio system, wipers,
It has a quick-release clamp. lighting, etc.).
Protect your eyes and face before
Make sure that the jump leads are not
handling the battery. (-) Negative terminal. close to moving parts of the engine (fan,
All operations on the battery must be As the battery's negative terminal is not belts, etc.).
carried out in a well ventilated area and accessible, a remote earth point is placed near Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while
away from naked flames and sources of the battery. the engine is running.
sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion
or fire.
Wash your hands afterwards.
262
F Wait for it to return to idle.

If you wish to charge your vehicle's battery
F Disconnect the jump lead cables in reverse
yourself, use only a charger compatible
order.
with lead-acid batteries with a nominal
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
voltage of 12 V.
your vehicle has one.
F Allow the engine to run for at least
30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle
stationary, so that the battery reaches an
adequate state of charge. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the charger.
Never reverse polarities.
F Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox,
your vehicle has one. do not try to start the engine by pushing
the vehicle. It is not necessary to disconnect the
F Connect the red cable to the positive
battery.
terminal (+) of flat battery A (at the metal
elbow) then to the positive terminal (+) of
backup battery B or the booster.
Charging the battery using
F Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the negative terminal (-) of backup
a battery charger
battery B or the booster (or an earth point For optimum service life of the battery, it is
on the other vehicle). essential to maintain an adequate state of
F Connect the other end of the green or black charge.
cable to earth point C on the broken down In some circumstances it may be necessary to
vehicle. charge the battery:
8
F Start the engine of the vehicle with the - if you only use your vehicle for short
good battery and leave it running for a few journeys,
minutes. - if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for
F Operate the starter on the broken down several weeks. F Switch off the ignition.
vehicle and let the engine run. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
If the engine does not start straight away, workshop. system, lighting, wipers, etc.).
switch off the ignition and wait a few moments F Switch off charger B before connecting the
before trying again. cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
dangerous sparks.
263
F Ensure that the charger cables are in good Quick-release terminal clamp
Never try to charge a frozen battery – risk
condition.
of explosion! Disconnecting the (+) terminal
F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has
If the battery has frozen, have it checked
one, on the (+) terminal.
by a PEUGEOT dealer or by a qualified
F Connect charger B cables as follows:
workshop who will check that the internal
- the positive (+) red cable to the (+)
components have not been damaged and
terminal of battery A,
that the container has not cracked, which
- the negative (-) black cable to earth point
would mean a risk of toxic and corrosive
C on the vehicle.
acid leaking.
F At the end of the charging operation, switch
off charger B before disconnecting the
cables from battery A. Some functions, including Stop & Start,
are not available if the battery is not
sufficiently charged. F Raise the lever A fully to release the
clamp B.
F Remove the clamp B by lifting it off.
Disconnecting the battery Reconnecting the (+) terminal
In order to maintain an adequate state

If this label is present, it is essential to of charge for starting the engine, it is
use only a 12 V charger to avoid causing recommended that the battery be disconnected
irreversible damage to the electrical if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long
components related to the Stop & Start period.
system. Before disconnecting the battery:
F close all openings (doors, tailgate, windows,
sunroof),
F switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, wipers, lighting, etc.),
F Raise the lever A fully.
F switch off the ignition and wait for four
F Refit the open clamp B on the (+) terminal.
minutes.
F Push the clamp B fully down.
At the battery, it is only necessary to
F Lower the lever A to lock the clamp B.
disconnect the (+) terminal.
264
Depending on version, the towing eye is stored

Do not force the lever as locking will not The Stop & Start system may not be
either in the interior trim of the boot sill, left
be possible if the clamp is not positioned operational during the trip following the
hand side, or in a bag behind the left rear seat.
correctly; start the procedure again. first engine start.
For more information on Access to the tools,
In this case, the system will only be
available again after a continuous
period of immobilisation of the vehicle,
Following reconnection of the a period which depends on the exterior
battery temperature and the state of charge of the
battery (up to about 8 hours).
After reconnecting the battery, turn on the
ignition and wait 1 minute before starting Towing your vehicle
the engine, in order to enable the electronic
To access the front screw thread:
systems to initialise.
Towing the vehicle
For right-hand drive vehicles, when the Procedure for having your vehicle towed or
total distance recorder has reached for towing another vehicle using a removable
62 miles (100 km), it is necessary to wait towing eye.
approx. 15 minutes before starting the
engine.
Access to the tools

However, if minor problems persist following
this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
Referring to the corresponding section, you
8
must yourself reinitialise or reset certain Model with halogen headlamps
systems, such as: F Press on the indicated zone until the cover
- the key with remote control or electronic key plate is unclipped.
(depending on version),
- the sunroof and its electric blind,
- the electric windows,
- the date and time,
- the preset radio stations.
265
F Unlock the steering and release the parking

General recommendations
brake.
Observe the legislation in force in your
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
country.
both vehicles.
Ensure that the weight of the towing
F Set off gently and drive slowly for a short
vehicle is higher than that of the towed
distance.
vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel of
the towed vehicle and must have a valid
Towing another vehicle driving licence.
To access the rear screw thread: When towing a vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground, always use an
Model with "Full LED" headlamps
approved towing arm; rope and straps are
F Press on the top right corner, then, while
prohibited.
still pressing, slide your finger to the left
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
until the cover plate is unclipped.
When the vehicle is towed with its engine
F Screw in the towing eye until it tightens fully. off, there is no longer braking and steering
F Install the towbar. assistance.
In the following cases, you must always
call on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or
fast road,
F Place the gearbox in neutral. - four-wheel drive vehicle,
Failure to follow this instruction could - when it is not possible to put the
result in damage to some components F Press the top left corner of the cover plate gearbox into neutral, unlock the
(brakes, transmission, etc.) and the then press the bumper to the right of the steering, or release the parking brake,
absence of braking assistance when the cover plate, until it unclips. - when it is not possible to tow a vehicle
engine is restarted. F Screw the towing eye in fully. with an automatic gearbox, engine
F Install the towbar. running,
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on - towing with only two wheels on the
both vehicles. ground,
Automatic gearbox: never tow the vehicle F Set off gently and drive slowly for a short - where there is no approved towbar,
with front wheels on the ground with the distance. etc. available.
engine off.
266
Technical data
The GTW values and the towable loads

Engine technical data and listed are valid for a maximum altitude of
If the exterior temperature is high, it is
towed loads 1,000 metres. The towable load must be
recommended that the engine be allowed
to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle
reduced by steps of 10% for each additional
Engines 1,000 metres.
comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling.
The engine characteristics are given in the The maximum authorised nose weight
vehicle's registration document, as well as in corresponds to the weight permitted on the
sales brochures. towbar.
GTW: Gross train weight.
The maximum power corresponds to the

When exterior temperatures are high,
value type-approved on a test bed, under
the vehicle performance may be limited
conditions defined in European legislation
in order to protect the engine. When the
(Directive 1999/99/EC).
exterior temperature is higher than 37°C,
limit the towed weight.
Towing using a lightly loaded vehicle can

Weights and towed loads adversely affect roadholding.
The weights and towed loads relating to your Braking distances are increased when
vehicle are given in the registration document, towing a trailer.
as well as in sales brochures. When using a vehicle to tow, never
exceed a speed of approximately 60 mph
These values are also given on the
(100 km/h) (observe the local legislation in
manufacturer's plate or label.
force).
9
267
Technical data
Petrol engines and towed loads

1.2 litre PureTech 1.2 litre PureTech 1.2 litre PureTech 1.6 litre THP 1.6 litre THP 1.6 litre THP
Engines
130 S&S 130 S&S 130 S&S 150 165 165 S&S
BVM6 BVM6 EAT6 EAT6 EAT6 EAT6

Gearboxes (Manual (Manual (Auto (Auto (Auto (Auto
6-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed)
CRQ – CXQ
LHK CRK (EB2DTS KUM KNM KHQ
Codes (EB2ADTS (EB2DTS AT6III STT) (EP6FDTMD (EP6FDTM (EP6FDT
MB6 STT) MCM STT) (EB2DTSM AT6III) AT6III) AT6III STT)
AT6III STT)
RHNYH/S1B RHNYW/S1B
Model codes RHNSJ/S1B RHNYH/S1F RHNYW/S1F 45GXV/S1A 45GYV/S1A 45GZW/S1B
M… RHNSJ/S1F - RHNWW/S1B 45GXW/S1A 45GYW/S1A 45GZW/S1F
RHNYH/S1K RHNWW/S1F
Cylinder capacity (cm³) 1,199 1,199 1,199 1,598 1,598 1,598
Max power: EEC standard (kW) 96 96 96 110 121.4 121.4
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg)

1,150 1,200/1,100 1,000 600 600 1,340
on a 10 or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 690 690 690 600 600 720
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 46 72 72 72 72 72
268
Technical data
Diesel engines and towed loads
Engines 1.5 litre BlueHDi 130 S&S 1.5 litre BlueHDi 130 S&S
BVM6 EAT8
Gearboxes
(Manual 6-speed) (Auto 8-speed)
MAK MA1
Codes
(DV5RC ML6O STT) (DV5RC ATN8 STT)
CYHZJ/S2B CYHZR/S2B
Model codes
CYHZJ/S2F CYHZR/S2F
M…
CYHZJ/S2K CYHZR/S2K
Cylinder capacity (cm³) 1,499 1,499
Max power: EEC standard (kW) 96 96
Fuel Diesel Diesel

1,300 1,200
Unbraked trailer (kg) 750 750
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 72 48
9
269
Technical data
1.6 litre BlueHDi 1.6 litre BlueHDi 1.6 litre BlueHDi 1.6 litre BlueHDi 1.6 litre BlueHDi
Engines
100 S&S 115 S&S 115 S&S 120 S&S 120 S&S
BVM BVM6 BVM6

EAT6 EAT6
Gearboxes (Manual (Manual (Manual
(Auto 6-speed) (Auto 6-speed)
5-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed)
KEJ LAK LAQ KDK KDQ

Codes (DV6FD (DV6FC ML6C (DV6FC AT6III (DV6FC ML6C (DV6FC AT6III
BE4 STT) STT) STT) STT) STT)
CBHZH/S2B
Model codes CBHYB/S2B CBHYB/S2B CBHXW/S2B CBHZH/S2F CBHZW/S2B
M… CBHYB/S2F CBHXH/S2F CBHXW/S2F - CBHZW/S2F
CBHZH/S2K
Cylinder capacity (cm³) 1,560 1,560 1,560 1,560 1,560
Max power: EEC standard (kW) 73 85 85 88 88
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

1,100 1,300 1,100 1,300/1,200 1,100
Unbraked trailer (kg) 710 720 720 720 720
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 72 72 72 72 72
270
Technical data
2.0 litre BlueHDi 2.0 litre BlueHDi

Engines 2.0 litre HDi 150 2.0 litre HDi 150
150 S&S 180 S&S
BVM6 EAT6 BVM6 EAT8

Gearboxes
(Manual 6-speed) (Auto 6-speed) (Manual 6-speed) (Auto 8-speed)
LR6 LRM KBK KA1

Codes
(DW10FD ML6C) (DW10FD AM6III) (DW10FD ML6C STT) (DW10FC AMN8 STT)
JEHZP/S2B
Model codes JAHXH/S2B
JAHXG/S2A JAHXV/S2A JEHZP/S2F
M… JAHXH/S2F
JEHZP/S2K
Cylinder capacity (cm³) 1,997 1,997 1,997 1,997
Max power: EU standard (kW) 110 110 110 130
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

600 600 1,800 1,800
Unbraked trailer (kg) 600 600 750 750
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 72 72 72 72
9
271
Technical data
Dimensions (in mm)

These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.
272
Technical data
Identification markings - the spare tyre pressure.

It also indicates the paint colour code.
Different visible markings for the identification and localisation of your vehicle.
The vehicle may be originally equipped

with tyres with higher load and speed
indices than those indicated on the label,
without affecting inflation pressure.
A. Vehicle identification number (V.I.N.), - the maximum authorised vehicle weight (the
under the bonnet. Gross Vehicle Weight or GVW),
The number is engraved on the bodywork - the maximum authorised vehicle + trailer
structure. weight (the Gross Train Weight or GTW),
B. Vehicle identification number (V.I.N.), on - the maximum weight on the front axle,
the dashboard. - the maximum weight on the rear axle.
The number is on a label, visible through the
windscreen. D. Tyres/paint code label.
C. Manufacturer's label. This label is affixed to the driver's door
This tamperproof label is affixed to the right- aperture.
9
hand door. It bears the following information about the
It bears the following information: tyres:
- the name of the manufacturer, - the tyre pressures, unladen and laden,
- the European Whole Vehicle Type Approval - the tyre specification, made up of the
number, dimensions and type as well as the load and
- the vehicle identification number (V.I.N.), speed indices,
273
274
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
PEUGEOT Connect Nav The different functions and settings

described vary according to the version
and configuration of your vehicle.
As a safety measure and because it

requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free
system of your audio system must be
done with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on.
The system is protected in such a way that

it will only operate in your vehicle.
The display of the message Energy
Contents Economy Mode signals that a change to
GPS satellite navigation – standby is imminent.
First steps 2
Applications – Multimedia Steering mounted controls 3
audio system – Bluetooth® Menus 3
telephone Voice commands 5 The link below gives access to OSS (Open
Navigation 11 Source Software) codes for the system.
Connected navigation 13 https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/
Applications 16 https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/
Radio 21
DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting) 22
Media 23
.
Telephone 25
Settings 29
Frequently asked questions 32
1
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
First steps The touch screen is of the "capacitive" 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13
type.
With the engine running, a press
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
mutes the sound.
abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with
With the ignition off, a press turns
no additional product.
the system on.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
Adjustment of the volume. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
Certain information is displayed permanently in Selecting the audio source (depending on

Use the buttons on either side of or below the
the upper band of the touch screen: version):
touch screen for access to the menus, then
- Reminder of the air conditioning information - FM/DAB*/AM* radio stations.
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.
(depending on version), and direct access to - USB memory stick.
the corresponding menu. - CD player (depending on model).
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or - Go directly to the selection of the audio - Media player connected via the auxiliary
"Menu" buttons on the left-hand side of the source, to the list of radio stations (or list of socket (depending on model).
touch screen for access to the menus, then titles depending on the source). - Telephone connected via Bluetooth* and
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. - Go to the message notifications, emails, Bluetooth multimedia broadcast* (streaming).
map updates and, depending on the
services, the navigation notifications.
You can display the menus at any time by
- Go to the settings for the touch screen and
pressing the screen briefly with three fingers.
All of the touch areas of the screen are white.

Press the cross to go back a level.
Press "OK" to confirm.
* Depending on equipment.
2
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Increase volume. Radio (rotate): automatic search for

In the "Settings" menu you can create
the previous/next station.
a profile for just one person or a group
or Media (rotate): previous/next track,
of people with shared interests, with or
move in a list.
the possibility of entering multiple
Short press: confirm a selection; if
settings (radio presets, audio settings,
nothing selected, access to presets.
navigation history, contact favourites,
Mute/Restore the sound.
etc.); these settings are taken into account
Or
automatically.
Mute by pressing the volume
or
increase and decrease buttons
simultaneously. Radio: display the list of stations.
Restore the sound by pressing one Media: display the list of tracks.
In very hot conditions, the volume may Radio (press and hold): update the
of the two volume buttons.
be limited to protect the system. It may go list of stations received.
into standby (screen and sound off) for at
least 5 minutes.
The return to normal takes place after Decrease volume.
the temperature in the passenger or
Menus
compartment drops. Depending on model/Depending on version
Air conditioning
Manage the different temperature
Media (short press): change the
Steering mounted controls multimedia source.
and air flow settings.
Depending on model. Telephone (short press): start

or telephone call.
Voice commands: 23 °C 12:13
Call in progress (short press):
This control is located on the
access telephone menu.
steering wheel or at the end of the
Telephone (long press): reject an
lighting control stalk (depending on
18,5 21,5
incoming call, end call; when no call
model).
is in progress, access telephone
.
Short press, system voice
menu.
commands.
Long press, smartphone voice
commands via the system.
3
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Connected navigation 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 Telephone

Enter navigation settings and Connect a telephone via Bluetooth ®,
choose a destination. read messages and emails and send
or Use services available in real time, or quick messages.
depending on equipment.
23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13

23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13
Radio Media
Select an audio source, a radio
station, display photographs.
or
Applications 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13

Settings
Operate certain applications on Configure a personal profile and/
a smartphone connected via FM/87.5 MHz
87.5MHz or configure the sound (balance,
or CarPlay ®, MirrorLinkTM or Android ambience, etc.) and the display
Auto. or
(language, units, date, time, etc.).
Check the state of the Bluetooth ®
and Wi-Fi connections.
4
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 Voice commands First steps

Steering mounted controls Example of a "voice command" for
navigation:
Pressing this button activates the "Navigate to address, 11 Regent
voice commands function. Street, London".
Example of a "voice command" for
the radio and media:
"Play artist, Madonna".
To ensure that voice commands are Example of a "voice command" for
always recognised by the system, please the telephone:
observe the following recommendations: "Call David Miller".
Vehicle - speak in a normal tone without
breaking up words or raising your
Activate, deactivate or configure voice. The voice commands, with a choice of
certain vehicle functions. - always wait for the "beep" (audible 12 languages (English, French, Italian,
or signal) before speaking. Spanish, German, Dutch, Portuguese,
- for best operation, it is recommended Polish, Turkish, Russian, Arabic,
that the windows and sunroof be Brazilian), are made using the language
closed to avoid exterior interference previously chosen and set in the system.
23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 (depending on version). For some voice commands, there are
- before making a voice command, ask alternative synonyms.
other passengers not to speak. Example: Guide to/Navigate to/Go to/…
The voice commands in Arabic for:
"Navigate to address" and "Display POI in
the city" are not available.
.
5
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Information – Using the system Global voice commands

Press the Push To Talk voice
command button and tell me These commands can be made from any
what you'd like after the tone. screen page after pressing the "Voice
Remember you can interrupt command" or "Telephone" button located
me at any time by pressing on the steering wheel, as long as there is
this button. If you press it no telephone call in progress.
again while I'm waiting for
you to speak, it'll end the
conversation. If you need to
start over, say "cancel". If you
want to undo something, say Voice commands Help messages
"undo". And to get information
and tips at any time, just say
"help". If you ask me to do
Help There are lots of topics I can help you with.
something and there's some
You can say: "help with phone", "help with
information missing that I need, Voice command help navigation", "help with media" or "help with
I'll give you some examples
radio". For an overview on how to use voice
or take you through it step by Navigation help
controls, you can say "help with voice controls".
step. There's more information
Radio help
available in "beginner" mode.
You can set the dialogue mode Media help
to "expert" when you feel
comfortable. Telephone help
Set dialogue mode as <…> Choose "beginner" or "expert" mode.
Select profile <…> Select profile 1, 2 or 3.
Yes Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no"

and we'll start that again.
No
6
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
"Navigation" voice
Voice commands Help messages
commands
These commands can be made from any
screen page after pressing the "Voice Navigate home To start guidance or add a stopover, say
command" or "Telephone" button located "navigate to" and then the address or contact
on the steering wheel, as long as there is Navigate to work name. For example, "navigate to address
no telephone call in progress. 11 Regent Street, London", or "navigate to
Navigate to preferred address <…>
contact, John Miller". You can specify if it's
Navigate to contact <…> a preferred or recent destination. For example,
"navigate to preferred address, Tennis club",
Navigate to address <…> "navigate to recent destination, 11 Regent
Street, London". Otherwise, just say, "navigate
Show nearby POI <…>
home". To see points of interest on a map, you
can say things like "show hotels in Banbury"
or "show nearby petrol station". For more
information you can ask for "help with route
guidance".
Remaining distance To get information about your current route,

you can say "tell me the remaining time",
Remaining time "distance" or "arrival time". Try saying "help
with navigation" to learn more commands.
Arrival time
Stop route guidance
Depending on the country, give the
.
destination instructions (address) in the
language used by the system.
7
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
"Radio Media" voice

commands
These commands can be made from any
screen page after pressing the "Voice Tune to channel <…> You can pick a radio station by saying "tune
command" or "Telephone" button located to" and the station name or frequency. For
on the steering wheel, as long as there is example "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to
no telephone call in progress. 98.5 FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say
"tune to preset number". For example "tune to
preset number five".
What's playing To display the details of the current "track",

"artist" and "album", you can say "What's
playing".
Play song <…> Use the command "play" or "listen to" to select
the type of music you'd like to hear. You can
Play artist <…> pick by "song", "artist", or "album". Just say ,
for example, "play artist, Madonna", "play song,
Play album <…>
Hey Jude", or "play album, Thriller".
Media voice commands are available only

for a USB connection.
8
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
"Telephone" voice
commands
If a telephone is connected to the system,
these voice commands can be issued Call contact <…>* To make a phone call, say "call" followed by
from any main screen page after pressing the contact name, for example: "Call David
the "Telephone" button on the steering Dial <…>* Miller". You can also include the phone type, for
wheel, as long as there is no telephone example: "Call David Miller at home". To make
Display contacts*
call in progress. a call by number, say "dial" followed by the
If there is no telephone connected by Display calls* phone number, for example, "Dial 07776 835
Bluetooth, a voice message announces: 417". You can check your voicemail by saying
"Please first connect a telephone", and the Call (message box | voicemail)* "call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick
voice session will be closed. message to", followed by the contact, and then
the name of the quick message you'd like to
send. For example, "send quick message to
David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of
calls, say "display calls". For more information
on SMS, you can say "help with texting".
.
* This function is available only if the
telephone connected to the system supports
downloading of contacts and recent calls
and if the download has been done.
9
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
"Text message" voice

commands
If a telephone is connected to the system,
these voice commands can be issued Send text to <…> To hear your messages, you can say "listen to
from any main screen page after pressing most recent message". When you want to send
the "Telephone" button on the steering Listen to most recent message* a text, there's a set of quick messages ready
wheel, as long as there is no telephone for you to use. Just use the quick message
call in progress. name and say, for example, "send quick
If there is no telephone connected by message to Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the
Bluetooth, a voice message announces: phone menu for the names of the supported
"Please first connect a telephone", and the messages.
voice session will be closed. Please say "call" or "send quick message to",
and then select a line from the list. To move
around a list shown on the display, you can
say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or
"previous page". To undo your selection, say
"undo". To cancel the current action and start
again, say "cancel".
* This function is available only if the

telephone connected to the system supports
downloading of contacts and recent calls
and if the download has been done.
The system only sends pre-recorded

"Quick messages".
10
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "OK" to start navigation.

Navigation Zoom out/zoom in using the touch buttons
or with two fingers on the screen.
Choice of a destination
Select "Position" to visualise the arrival
To a new destination point geographically.
In order to be able to use the navigation,
Press Navigation to display the it is necessary to fill in the "City", the
primary page. "Street" and the "Number" on the
or virtual keyboard or take it from the list in To "My home" or "My work"
"Contact" or in the "History" of addresses.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the Press Navigation to display the

secondary page. primary page.
Without confirmation of the street number,
you will be guided to one end of the street. or
Select "Enter address".
To a recent destination Press the "MENU" button to go to the

Select the "Country". secondary page.
Select "My destinations".

Press Navigation to display the
Enter the "City", the "Street" and the primary page.
"Number" and confirm by pressing or Select the "Preferred" tab.
on the suggestions displayed.
Select "My home".
Press "OK" to select the "Guidance
criteria". Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page. Or
And/Or
Select "See on map" to select the Select "My destinations". Select "My work".
"Guidance criteria".
.
Select the "Recent" tab. Or
Press "OK" to start navigation. Select a preset favourite destination.
Select the address chosen in the list to display
the "Guidance criteria".
11
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Towards a contact Select "Points of interest". Press this button to start navigation.

Select the "Travel", or "Leisure" Or
primary page.
or "Commercial" or "Public" or Press this button to save the
or
"Geographic" tab. address displayed.
Or
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
Select "Search" to enter the name A long press on an item opens a list of
secondary page.
and address of a POI. POIs nearby.
Select "My destinations".
Press "OK" to start calculation of
the route. Towards GPS coordinates
Select the "Contact" tab.
primary page.
Select a contact in the list to start navigation. To a point on the map
or
primary page.
Towards points of interest or Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
(POI) screen.
Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Press this button to display the world
categories. screen. map.
Using the grid, select by zoom the
Press Navigation to display the Select the destination by pressing on the map.
desired country or region.
primary page.
or
Tap the screen to place a marker Press this button to enter the GPS
and display the sub-menu. coordinates.
secondary page.
12
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
A marker is displayed in the middle TMC (Traffic Message Network connection provided by
of the screen, with the "Latitude" the user
and "Longitude" coordinates.
Channel)
TMC (Traffic Message Channel)
messages are linked to a European
Press this button to start navigation.
standard on the broadcasting of traffic
information via the RDS system on FM
radio, transmitting traffic information in Connected navigation
Or real time. connection
The TMC information is then displayed
Press this button to save the
on a GPS Navigation system map and As a safety measure and because it
address displayed.
taken into account straight away during requires sustained attention by the driver,
navigation, so as to avoid accidents, traffic using a smartphone when driving is
OR jams and closed roads. prohibited.
Press this button to enter the value All operations must be done with the
for "Latitude" using the virtual vehicle stationary.
keypad. The display of danger zones depends on
the legislation in force and subscription to
And the service. For access to connected navigation, you
Press this button to enter the value can use the connection provided by the
for "Longitude" using the virtual vehicle via the "Emergency or assistance
keypad. Connected navigation call" services or use your smartphone as
a modem.
Depending on version
Activate and enter settings for sharing
Depending on the equipment level of the the smartphone connection.
vehicle
Network connection provided by

the vehicle
OR
.
13
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Network connection provided by Restrictions of use: The processes and standards are
the vehicle - With CarPlay ®, connection sharing is constantly changing; for the communication
The system is automatically only with a Wi-Fi connection. process between the smartphone and the
connected to the modem included - With MirrorLinkTM, connection sharing system to work correctly, we recommend
for the "Emergency or assistance is only with a USB connection. that you update the operating system of
calls" services and does not require The quality of services depends on the the smartphone as well as the date and
a connection provided by the user quality of the network connection. time of the smartphone and the system.
via their smartphone.
Network connection provided by With the arrival of "TOMTOM

the user TRAFFIC", the services are
Settings specific to
USB connection
available. connected navigation
Connect a USB cable. In the "Settings" menu you can create
The smartphone charges when The services offered with connected a profile for just one person or a group
connected by a USB cable. navigation are as follows. of people with shared interests, with
A Connected Services pack: the possibility of entering a multitude of
- Weather, settings (radio presets, audio settings,
Bluetooth connection - Filling stations, navigation history, contact favourites,
Activate the Bluetooth function on - Car park, etc.); these settings are taken into account
the telephone and ensure that it is - Traffic, automatically.
visible to all (see the "Applications" - POI local search.
section). A Danger zone pack (option).
Wi-Fi connection Press Navigation to display the

primary page.
Select a Wi-Fi network found by the
or
system and connect to it (see the
"Applications" section).

secondary page.
14
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Select "Settings". "Danger zones" pack

The display of danger zones depends on
the legislation in force and subscription to updates
the service.
Press Settings to display the
Select "Map".
primary page.
Activate or deactivate: Declaration of "Danger Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the

- "Allow declaration of danger
zones".
zones" secondary page.
- "Guidance to final destination
To distribute information on the Select "System settings".
on foot"
- "Authorise sending declaration of danger zones, you should
information" check the option: "Allow declaration of
These settings must be made danger zones". Select the "System info" tab.
according to each profile.
Select "View" to display the versions
Select "Alerts". primary page.
of the different modules installed in
or the system.
Activate or deactivate "Warn of
danger zones".
Select "Update(s) due".
Press the "Declare a new danger
Select this button.
zone" button located in the upper
bar of the touch screen
Activate: Give an audible warning You can download the system and map
Select the option "Type" to choose updates from the Brand's website.
the type of "danger zone". The update procedure can also be found
on the website.
For access to connected navigation, you
have to select the option: "Authorise Select the "Speed" option and enter
sending information". it using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to save and distribute

the information. .
15
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Display the weather Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay ®,

Applications MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto functions.
Press Navigation to display the Internet Browser
primary page.
or Press Applications to display the
primary page. Applications
or
Press Applications to display the
Press this button to display the list of primary page.
services. Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Internet or
Browser" function.
Select "View map". Press "Internet Browser" to display the Press "Applications" to display the
browser home page. applications home page.
Select your country of residence.

Select "Weather".
CarPlay® smartphone
Press "OK" to save and start the connection
browser.
Press this button to display primary As a safety measure and because it
information. requires sustained attention by the driver,
Connection to the internet is via one of using a smartphone when driving is
the network connections provided by the prohibited.
Press this button to display the vehicle or the user. All operations must be done with the
detailed weather information. vehicle stationary.
Connectivity
The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will Press Applications to display the
be the maximum temperature for the day. primary page.
The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will or
be the minimum temperature for the night.
16
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
From the system, press

The synchronisation of a personal The synchronisation of a personal
"Applications" to display the
smartphone allows users to display smartphone allows users to display
or primary page.
applications compatible with the applications adapted for the smartphone's
smartphone's CarPlay ® technology on the MirrorLinkTM technology on the vehicle
vehicle screen when the smartphone's screen.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay ®
CarPlay ® function has been previously The processes and standards
function.
activated. are constantly changing. For the
As the processes and standards are Press "CarPlay" to display the communication process between the
constantly changing, it is recommended CarPlay ® interface. smartphone and the system to operate,
that you keep your smartphone's it is essential that the smartphone be
operating system updated. unlocked; update the operating system
For the list of eligible smartphones, go of the smartphone as well as the date
to the Brand's internet website in your On connecting the USB cable, the and time of the smartphone and the
country. CarPlay ® function deactivates the system.
system's Bluetooth® mode. For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your
Connect a USB cable. The
country.
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable. MirrorLinkTM smartphone
Press on "Telephone" to display the
connection As a safety measure, applications can
only be viewed with the vehicle stationary;
CarPlay ® interface.
As a safety measure and because it display is interrupted once the vehicle is
or
requires sustained attention by the driver, moving.
using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited.
Or All operations must be done with the The MirrorLinkTM function requires the
Connect a USB cable. The vehicle stationary. use of a compatible smartphone and
smartphone charges when applications.
connected by a USB cable.
.
When connecting a smartphone
to the system, it is recommended
that Bluetooth® be started on the
smartphone.
17
PEUGEOT Connect Nav

There may be a wait for the availability of As a safety measure, applications can
smartphone charges when
applications, depending on the quality of only be viewed with the vehicle stationary;
connected by a USB cable.
your network. display is interrupted once the vehicle is
From the system, press moving.
"Applications" to display the
or primary page. Android Auto smartphone
connection The "Android Auto" function requires
the use of a compatible smartphone and
Press "Connectivity" to go to the MirrorLinkTM As a safety measure and because it applications.
function. requires sustained attention by the driver,
using a smartphone when driving is Connect a USB cable. The
Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the
prohibited. smartphone charges when
application in the system.
All operations must be done with the connected by a USB cable.
vehicle stationary.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be From the system, press
necessary to activate the MirrorLinkTM "Applications" to display the
The synchronisation of a personal
function. or primary page.
In the process, several screen smartphone allows users to display
pages relating to certain functions applications adapted for the smartphone's
are displayed. Android Auto technology on the vehicle
Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Android
Accept to start and complete the screen.
Auto" function.
connection. The processes and standards
are constantly changing. For the Press "Android Auto" to start the
Once connection is established, a page communication process between the application in the system.
is displayed with the applications already smartphone and the system to operate,
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted it is essential that the smartphone be
to MirrorLinkTM technology. unlocked; update the operating system In the process, several screen
of the smartphone as well as the date pages relating to certain functions
Access to the different audio sources remains and time of the smartphone and the are displayed.
accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM system. Accept to start and complete the
display, using touch buttons in the upper bar. For the list of eligible smartphones, go connection.
Access to the menus for the system is possible to the Brand's internet website in your
at any time using the dedicated buttons. country.
18
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Different audio sources remain accessible in Select "Search".

Activate the Bluetooth function on the
the margin of the Android Auto display, using The list of telephones detected is
telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
touch buttons in the upper bar. displayed.
all" (telephone configuration).
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
Procedure from the telephone that you deactivate and then reactivate the
Select the system name in the list of Bluetooth function in your telephone.
devices detected.
In Android Auto mode, the function to
display the menus by pressing the screen Select the name of the chosen
briefly with three fingers is deactivated. telephone in the list.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the telephone.
Depending on the type of telephone, you

To complete the pairing, whichever
There may be a waiting time for the may be asked to accept or not the transfer
procedure used (from the telephone or
availability of applications, depending on of your contacts and messages.
from the system), ensure that the code
the quality of your network. is the same in the system and in the
telephone.
Connection sharing
®
Bluetooth connection The system offers to connect the telephone
Procedure from the system with 3 profiles:
As a safety measure and because they - "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
require prolonged attention on the part only),
primary page.
of the driver, the operations for pairing - "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
or
of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with the audio files on the telephone),
the Bluetooth hands-free system of your - "Mobile internet data".
audio system must be carried out with the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
vehicle stationary and the ignition on. secondary page.
.
Press "Bluetooth connection".
19
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Select the "Secured" or "Not Select the "Activation" tab to activate or

The "Mobile internet data" profile
secured" or "Stored" tab. deactivate sharing of the Wi-Fi connection.
must be activated for connected
navigation (where the vehicle does not And/Or
Select a network.
have "Emergency and assistance call"
Select the "Settings" tab to change the name
services), having first activated sharing of
of the system network and the password.
this connection on your smartphone.
Using the virtual keypad, enter the
"Key" for the Wi-Fi network and the
"Password".
Select one or more profiles.
Press "OK" to start the connection. To protect against unauthorised access
and make your systems as secure as
Press "OK" to confirm. possible, the use of a complex security
code or password is recommended.
The Wi-Fi connection and the sharing of
the Wi-Fi connection are exclusive.
Wi-Fi connection
Network connection by the smartphone's Wi-Fi. Manage connections
Wi-Fi connection sharing
Press Applications to display the Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the primary page.
primary page. system. or
or
primary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the or secondary page.
secondary page.
Select "Manage connection".
Select "Wi-Fi network Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
connection". secondary page.
Select "Share Wi-Fi connection". With this function you can view the access
to connected services, the availability of
connected services and modify the connection
mode.
20
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Enter the values using the virtual Make a long press on one of the
Radio keypad. buttons to preset the station.
Selecting a station First enter the units then click on the
decimals zone to enter the figures
Press Radio Media to display the after the decimal point.
primary page. Activating/Deactivating RDS
or Press "OK" to confirm. Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
or
Press "Frequency". Radio reception may be affected by the
Press one of the buttons for an use of electrical equipment not approved
automatic search for radio stations. by the Brand, such as a USB charger Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
connected to the 12 V socket. secondary page.
The exterior environment (hills, buildings,
Or tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Select "Radio settings".
Move the cursor for a manual search block reception, including in RDS mode.
for frequencies up or down. This is a normal effect of the way in
which radio waves are transmitted and Select "General".
does not indicate any failure of the audio
Activate/Deactivate "Station
Or equipment.
tracking".
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page. Press "OK" to confirm.
or
Presetting a station
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Select a radio station or frequency.
listening to the same station by automatic
secondary page. (refer to the corresponding section)
retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
Press "Presets". in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS
Select "Radio stations" in the station may not be assured throughout the
secondary page.
.
entire country as radio stations do not cover
100% of the territory. This explains the loss
Press "Frequency". of reception of the station during a journey.
21
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Display text Play TA messages Press Radio Media to display the

primary page.
information
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function or
The "Radio Text" function allows gives priority to TA alert messages.
information transmitted by the radio To operate, this function needs good
station and related to the station or the reception of a radio station that carries Select the audio source.
song playing to be displayed. this type of message. While traffic
information is being broadcast, the current
media is automatically interrupted so that
Press "Band" to select the "DAB" waveband.
Press Radio Media to display the the TA message can be heard. Normal
primary page. play of the media previously playing is
or resumed at the end of the message.
DAB-FM auto tracking
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Select "Announcements". "DAB" does not cover 100% of the
secondary page. territory.
Activate/Deactivate "Traffic
When the digital radio signal is poor,
announcement".
Select "Radio settings". "DAB-FM tracking" allows you to
Press "OK" to confirm. continue listening to the same station,
by automatically switching to the
corresponding FM analogue station
Select "General".
(if there is one).
Activate/Deactivate "Display radio
DAB (Digital Audio
text". Broadcasting) radio Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press "OK" to confirm. Terrestrial Digital Radio
or
Digital radio provides higher quality
reception.
The different "multiplexes" offer a choice Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
of radio stations arranged in alphabetical secondary page.
order.
22
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Select "Radio settings". Auxiliary socket (AUX)

Media
USB (depending on model/depending on equipment)
Select "General".
Activate/Deactivate "Station
tracking".
Press "OK".
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"

If "DAB-FM tracking" is activated, there
Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or has been checked in the audio settings.
is a difference of a few seconds when the
connect the USB device to the USB port using
system switches to FM analogue radio Connect the portable device (MP3 player, etc.)
a suitable cable (not supplied).
with sometimes a variation in volume. to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio
Once the digital signal quality is restored, cable (not supplied).
the system automatically changes back To protect the system, do not use a USB
to "DAB". hub. First adjust the volume on your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
audio system.
The system builds playlists (in temporary Display and management of the controls are
memory), an operation which can take from via the portable device.
If the "DAB" station being listened to is a few seconds to several minutes at the first
not available on FM ("DAB-FM" option connection.
greyed out), or "DAB-FM tracking" is not Reduce the number of non-music files and the CD player
activated, the sound will cut out while the number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
digital signal is too weak. The playlists are updated every time the (depending on model/depending on equipment)
ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick
Insert the CD in the player.
is connected. The lists are memorised: if they
are not modified, the subsequent loading time
.
will be shorter.
23
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Selecting the source Connecting Apple® players Information and advice

Press Radio Media to display the Connect the Apple ® player to the USB port
The system supports USB mass storage
primary page. using a suitable cable (not supplied).
devices, BlackBerry ® devices or Apple ®
or Play starts automatically.
players via USB ports. The adapter cable
is not supplied.
Control is via the audio system.
Device management is done by the audio
Select "Source". system controls.
Other peripherals, not recognised on
The classifications available are those of connection, must be connected to the
Choose the source. the portable device connected (artists/ auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
albums/genres/playlists/audiobooks/ supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming,
podcasts).
Bluetooth® audio streaming The default classification used is by
depending on compatibility.
Streaming allows you to listen to music from artists. To modify the classification used,
your smartphone. return to the first level of the menu then
select the desired classification (playlists
The Bluetooth profile must be activated, first
for example) and confirm to go down
adjust the volume on your portable device (to To protect the system, do not use a USB
through the menu to the desired track.
a high level). hub.
Then adjust the volume of your audio system.
If play does not start automatically, it may be The audio equipment will only play audio files
necessary to start the audio playback from the with ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3"
telephone. The version of software in the audio system file extensions and with a bit rate of between
Control is from the portable device or by using may not be compatible with the generation of 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
the system's touch buttons. your Apple ® player. It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma
Once connected in streaming mode, the 9 standard.
telephone is considered to be a media The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and
source. 48 kHz.
24
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
It is advisable to restrict file names to Procedure from the system

20 characters, without using special characters
Telephone
(e.g. " " ?.; ù) so as to avoid any reading or Press Telephone to display the
Pairing a Bluetooth® primary page.
display problems.
telephone or
Use only USB keys in FAT32 format (File
Allocation Table). As a safety measure and because it
Press "Bluetooth search".
It is recommended that the original USB
cable for the portable device be used.
done with the vehicle stationary and the Or
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or ignition on.
Select "Search".
CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or
The list of telephones detected is
Joliet if possible when burning the CD.
displayed.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may
not be played correctly. Activate the Bluetooth function on the
It is recommended that the same burning telephone and ensure that it is "visible to If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
standard be always used on an individual disc, all" (telephone configuration). that you deactivate and then reactivate the
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) Bluetooth function in your telephone.
for the best acoustic quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Procedure from the telephone
Select the name of the chosen
Joliet standard is recommended. Select the system name in the list of telephone in the list.
devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request Connection sharing

from the telephone.
The system offers to connect the telephone
with 3 profiles:
To complete the pairing, whichever
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
procedure is used (from the telephone or
.
only),
from the system), ensure that the code
- "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
is the same in the system and in the
the audio files on the telephone),
telephone.
- "Mobile internet data".
25
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Go to the Brand's website for more information
Activation of the profile; "Mobile internet
secondary page. (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
data" is obligatory for connected
navigation having first activated sharing of Select "Bluetooth connection" to
this connection on your smartphone. display the list of paired devices.
Managing paired telephones
Select one or more profiles. Press the "details" button.

This function allows the connection or
disconnection of a peripheral device as
well as the deletion of a pairing.
Select one or more profiles.
Press Telephone to display the
Depending on the type of telephone, you Press "OK" to confirm. primary page.
may be asked to accept or not the transfer or
of your contacts and messages.
The ability of the system to connect to just
one profile depends on the telephone. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
Automatic reconnection
All three profiles may connect by default. secondary page.
On return to the vehicle, if the last Select "Bluetooth connection" to
telephone connected is present again, it is display the list of paired devices.
automatically recognised and within about The services available depend on
30 seconds of switching on the ignition, the network, the SIM card and the
the connection is established without any compatibility of the Bluetooth devices Press on the name of the telephone
action on your part (Bluetooth activated). used. Check the instructions for your chosen in the list to disconnect it.
telephone and with your service provider Press again to connect it.
for the services to which you have access.
To modify the connection profile:
The profiles compatible with the system
primary page.
are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
or MAP and PAN.
26
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Deleting a telephone Making a call Or make a long press
Select the basket at top right of the

Using the telephone is not recommended
screen to display a basket alongside
while driving.
the telephone chosen. on the steering mounted PHONE
Park the vehicle.
button.
Make the call using the steering mounted
Press the basket alongside the controls.
Select "Contact".
telephone chosen to delete it.
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Calling a new number
Select "Call".
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and primary page.
a superimposed display in the screen.
or
Make a short press on the steering Calling a recently used
mounted PHONE button to accept number
an incoming call. Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
primary page.
And
or
Make a long press Press "Call" to start the call.
Or
on the steering mounted PHONE Make a long press
button to reject the call. Calling a contact
Or
primary page. on the steering mounted button.
Select "End call".
or
.
Select "Calls".
27
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
It is always possible to make a call directly Managing messages Access to "Messages" depends on the
from the telephone; as a safety measure, compatibility of the smartphone and the
first park the vehicle. integral system.
primary page.
Depending on the smartphone, access to
or your messages or email may be slow.
Managing contacts/entries Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the

The services available depend on
secondary page.
the network, the SIM card and the
Press Telephone to display the Select "Messages" to display the list compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
primary page. of messages. used.
or Check in the manual for your smartphone
and with your service provider for the
Select the "All" or "Sent" or services available to you.
"Incoming" tab.
Select "Contact".
Select "Create" to add a new Select the detail of the message

contact. chosen in one of the lists. Managing quick messages
In the "Telephone" tab, enter the telephone Press Telephone to display the
numbers for the contact. Press "Answer" to send a quick
primary page.
message stored in the system.
In the "Address" tab, enter the addresses for or
the contact.
Press "Call" to start the call.
In the "Email" tab, enter the email addresses Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
for the contact. secondary page.
Press " Play" to hear the message. Select "Quick messages" to display
The "Email" function allows email the list of messages.
addresses to be entered for a contact, but
the system is not able to send emails.
28
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Select the "Delayed" or "My arrival" Select the "Incoming" or "Sent" or Or

or "Not available" or "Other" tab "Not read" tab.
"Voice".
with the possibility of creating new
messages. Select the message chosen in one of the lists. Or
"Ringtone".
Press "Create" to write a new
message. Press " Play" to start playing the Press "OK" to save the settings.
message.
Select the message chosen in one

The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
of the lists. Access to "Email" depends on the
with the Arkamys© system) is audio
compatibility of the smartphone and the
processing that allows the quality of the
integral system.
sound to be adapted according to the
Press "Transfer" to select the number of passengers in the vehicle.
addressee(s). Available only with the front and rear
Settings speakers configuration.
Press " Play" to start playing the Audio settings

message. The Ambience (6 optional ambiences)
Press Settings to display the and Bass, Medium and Treble audio
primary page. settings are different and independent for
or each audio source.
Managing email Activate or Deactivate "Loudness".
Press Telephone to display the The settings for "Position" (All
Select "Audio settings". passengers, Driver and Front only) are
primary page.
common to all sources.
or
Activate or Deactivate "Touch tones",
Select "Ambience". "Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary
input".
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Or
secondary page.
"Position".
.
Onboard audio: Arkamys© Sound Staging
Select "Email" to display the list of Or optimises the balance/distribution of
messages.
"Sound". sound in the passenger compartment.
29
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Profile settings Insert a USB memory stick containing Or

the photograph in the USB port.
"Sound".
Select the photograph.
As a safety measure and because it Or
requires the sustained attention of the Press "OK" to accept the transfer of
driver, changes to settings must only be "Voice".
the photograph.
done with the vehicle stationary. Or
Press "OK" again to save the
"Ringtone".
settings.
primary page. Press "OK" to save the settings.
or The location for the photograph is
square; the system reshapes the original
photograph if in another format.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Modifying system settings
secondary page.
Press this button to initialise the
Select "Setting of the profiles". Press Settings to display the
profile selected.
primary page.
or
Initialisation of the profile selected
Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3" activates the English language by default.
or "Common profile".
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
Press this button to enter a name for secondary page.
Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to associate the
the profile using the virtual keypad. "Audio settings" with it. Select "Screen configuration".
Select "Audio settings".

Select "Animation".
Press this button to add Activate or deactivate: "Automatic

Select "Ambience".
a photograph to the profile. scrolling".
Or
"Position". Select "Brightness".
30
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Move the cursor to adjust the Select the language Press "OK" to confirm.
brightness of the screen and/or of
the instrument panel. Press Settings to display the
Select the display format of the date.
primary page.
or
primary page.
or Adjustment of the time and date is only
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the available if "GPS synchronisation" is
secondary page. deactivated.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the The change between winter and summer
secondary page. Select "Languages" to change the time is done by changing the time zone.
language.
Select "System settings".
Setting the date Setting the time

Select "Units" to change the units of distance, Press Settings to display the
fuel consumption and temperature. primary page.
primary page.
Select "Factory settings" to return to the initial or
or
settings.
Returning the system to factory settings Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
activates the English language by default. secondary page. secondary page.
Select "Setting the time-date". Select "Setting the time-date".
Select "System info" to display the versions of

the different modules installed in the system.
Select "Time".
Select "Date".
Press this button to adjust the time
Press on this button to define the
using the virtual keypad.
.
date.
31
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "OK" to confirm. Select "Colour schemes".
Press this button to define the time

zone.
Select a colour scheme in the list
then press "OK" to confirm.
Select the display format for the time
(12h/24h).
Activate or deactivate Every time the colour scheme is changed,

synchronisation with GPS (UTC). the system restarts, temporarily displaying
a black screen.
Frequently asked
The system does not automatically
questions
manage the change between winter and The following information groups together the
summer time (depending on country). answers to the most frequently asked questions
concerning your audio system.
Colour schemes
As a safety measure, the procedure
for changing the colour scheme is only
possible when the vehicle is stationary.

primary page.
or
32
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Navigation
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
The route calculation is not successful. The guidance criteria may be in conflict with Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
the current location (exclusion of toll roads on menu.
a toll road).
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The audible warning of "Danger zones" does The audible warning is not active or the volume Activate the audible warning in the "Navigation"
not work. is too low. menu and check the voice volume in the audio
settings.
The system does not suggest a detour around The guidance criteria do not take account of Select setting for the "Traffic info " function in
an incident on the route. TMC messages. the list of route settings (Without, Manual or
Automatic).
I receive a "Danger zone" alert which is not on Other than guidance, the system announces all Zoom in on the map to see the exact position
my route. "Danger zones" positioned in a cone located in of the "Danger zone". Select "On the route" to
front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for no longer receive alerts other than navigation
"Danger zones" located on nearby or parallel instructions or to reduce the time for the
roads. announcement.
Certain traffic jams along the route are not On starting, it is several minutes before the Wait until the traffic information is being
indicated in real time. system begins to receive the traffic information. received correctly (display of the traffic
information icons on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes This is perfectly normal. The system is
.
(motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic dependent on the traffic information available.
information.
33
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
The altitude is not displayed. On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may Wait until the system has started up completely
take up to 3 minutes to receive more than so that there is GPS coverage by at least
4 satellites correctly. 4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment This behaviour is normal. The system is

(tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of dependent on the GPS signal reception
reception of the GPS signal may vary. conditions.
My navigation is no longer connected. During start-up and in certain geographical Check that the connected services are
areas, the connection may be unavailable. activated (settings, contract).
Radio
The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are the station or no transmitter is present in the short-cut menu to enable the system to check
not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, geographical area. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
etc.). the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not
basement car parks, etc.) block reception, indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
including in RDS mode.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
example when going through a car wash or into
an underground car park).
34
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The station is not received or has changed its Press on the "Update list" button in the "Radio
stations received. name in the list. stations" secondary menu.
The name of the radio station changes. Some radio stations send other information
in place of their name (the title of the song for
example).
The system interprets these details as the
station name.
Media
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only Some files supplied with the memory stick Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). may greatly slow down access to reading and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the structure on the memory stick.
catalogue time).
The CD is ejected every time or is not played. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
not contain audio files or contains audio files of right way up.
a format not recognised by the audio system. Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
The CD has been recorded in a format that is be played if it is too badly damaged.
not compatible with the player (udf, etc.). Check the content in the case of a recorded
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system CD: consult the advice in the "AUDIO" section.
not recognised by the audio system. The audio system CD does not read DVDs.
Due to poor quality, certain burned CDs will not
be read by the audio system.
.
35
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
There is a long waiting period following the Upon insertion of a new key, the system reads This is perfectly normal.
insertion of a CD or connection of a USB a certain amount of data (directory, title, artist,
memory stick. etc.). This may take from a few seconds to
a few minutes.
The CD sound is of poor quality. The CD used in scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are Return bass and treble settings to 0, without
unsuitable. selecting an ambience.
Some information characters in the currently The audio system does not display some types Use standard characters to name tracks and
playing media are not displayed correctly. of characters. folders.
Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically Start playback from the device.
launch playback.
Names of tracks and playing time are not The Bluetooth profile does not allow the
displayed on the audio streaming screen. transfer of this information.
36
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Telephone
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Check that your telephone has Bluetooth
switched off or the telephone may not be switched on.
visible. Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with You can check the compatibility of your
the system. telephone at the Brand's website (services).
The volume of the telephone connected in The sound depends on both the system and Increase the volume of the audio system, to
Bluetooth mode is inaudible. the telephone. maximum if required, and increase the volume
of the telephone if necessary.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
telephone call. reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, etc.).
Some contacts are duplicated in the list. The options for synchronising contacts are Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
synchronising the contacts on the SIM card, telephone contacts".
the contacts on the telephone, or both. When
both synchronisations are selected, some
contacts may be duplicated.
The contacts are not listed in alphabetical Some telephones offer display options. Modify the telephone directory display settings.
order. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts
can be transferred in a specific order.
The system does not receive SMS. The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending
SMS text messages to the system.
.
37
PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Settings
When changing the setting of treble and bass, The selection of an equalizer setting imposes Modify the treble and bass or equalizer settings
the equalizer setting is deselected. the settings for treble and bass and vice versa. to obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing the equalizer setting, the treble
and bass settings are reset.
When changing the balance setting, The selection of a distribution setting imposes Modify the balance setting or the distribution
distribution is deselected. the balance settings and vice versa. setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
When changing the distribution setting, the
balance setting is deselected.
There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the Check that the audio settings are adapted to
the different audio sources. audio settings can be tailored to different the sources listened to. It is recommended
sound sources, which can generate audible that the audio settings (Bass, Treble, Balance)
differences when changing source. be adjusted to the middle position, select the
"None" musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode
or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
When the engine is off, the system switches off When the engine is switched off, the system's Start then vehicle's engine to increase the
after several minutes of use. operating time depends on the state of charge of charge of the battery.
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system automatically
goes into energy economy mode and switches off
to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.
The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available Settings menu/Options/Time-Date setting.
if the synchronisation with the satellites is Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS
deactivated. synchronisation" (UTC).
38
PEUGEOT Connect Radio The different functions and settings


ignition on.
The system is protected in such a way that

it will only operate in your vehicle.
The display of the message Energy
Economy Mode signals that a change to
Contents standby is imminent.
Multimedia audio system –
First steps 2
Applications – Bluetooth® Steering mounted controls 3
telephone Menus 4 The link below gives access to OSS (Open
Applications 5 Source Software) codes for the system.
Radio 6 https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/
DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting) 8 https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/
Media 9
Telephone 11
Settings 16
.
1
Selecting the audio source (depending on version):

First steps The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
- FM/DAB*/AM* radio stations.
type.
With the engine running, a press - Telephone connected via Bluetooth* and
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
mutes the sound. Bluetooth multimedia broadcast* (streaming).
abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with
With the ignition off, a press turns - CD player (depending on model).
no additional product.
the system on. - USB memory stick.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
- Media player connected via the auxiliary
Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
Adjustment of the volume. socket (depending on model).
Use the buttons on either side of or below the * Depending on equipment.

touch screen for access to the menus, then
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.
Certain information is displayed permanently in
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or the upper band of the touch screen:
"Menu" buttons on the left-hand side of the - Reminder of the air conditioning information
touch screen for access to the menus, then (depending on version), and direct access to
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. the corresponding menu.
- Reminder of the Radio Media and
You can display the menus at any time by Telephone menu information.
pressing the screen briefly with three fingers. - Access to the Settings of the touch screen
In the "Settings" menu you can create
and digital instrument panel.
All of the touch areas of the screen are white. a profile for just one person or a group
Press in the grey zone to go back a level or of people with shared interests, with
confirm. the possibility of entering a multitude of
Press the back arrow to go back a level or settings (radio presets, audio settings,
confirm. ambiences, etc.); these settings are taken
into account automatically.
2
Radio: Steering mounted

In very hot conditions, the volume may
Short press: display the list of radio
be limited to protect the system. It may go
stations.
controls – Type 2
into standby (screen and sound off) for at
Long press: update the list.
least 5 minutes
Media:
The return to normal takes place when
Short press: display the list of
the temperature in the passenger
folders.
compartment has dropped. Depending on model.
Long press: display the available
sorting options. Voice commands:
This control is located on the
Change audio source (radio; USB; steering wheel or at the end of the
Steering mounted controls AUX if equipment connected; CD; lighting control stalk (depending on
streaming). model).
Steering mounted Short press, smartphone voice
controls – Type 1 Confirm a selection. commands via the system.
Increase volume.
or
Increase volume.
Radio:
Select the previous/next preset radio
station.
Select the previous/next item in Mute/Restore the sound.
a menu or a list. Decrease volume.
Or
Media: Mute by pressing the volume
Select the previous/next track. or
increase and decrease buttons
Select the previous/next item in simultaneously.
a menu or a list. Mute/Restore sound by Restore the sound by pressing one
simultaneously pressing the of the two volume buttons.
increase and decrease volume
.
buttons.
3
Decrease volume. Radio Media

Menus
or Depending on model/Depending on version Select an audio source or radio
station.
Air conditioning
Manage various temperature and air
Media (short press): change the flow settings.
multimedia source.
or Telephone (short press): start
telephone call.
Call in progress (short press):
access telephone menu.
Telephone (long press): reject an
18,5 21,5
incoming call, end call; when no call
is in progress, access telephone
menu.
Telephone
Radio (rotate): previous/next preset. Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®.
Media (rotate): previous/next track, Operate certain applications on
or move in a list. Applications a smartphone connected via
Short press: confirm a selection; if MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay ® or Android
Access configurable equipment.
nothing selected, access to presets. Auto.
Radio: display the list of stations.

Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio (press and hold): update the
list of stations received.
4
Driving Applications
Activate, deactivate or configure Viewing photos
certain vehicle functions.
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port.
To protect the system, do not use a USB

hub.
The system can read folders and image files

in the formats: ".tiff"; ".gif"; ".jpg/jpeg"; ".bmp";
Settings ".png".
Configure a personal profile and/ Press Applications to display the

or configure the sound (balance, primary page.
ambience, etc.) and the display
(language, units, date, time, etc.). Navigation Press "Photos".
Configure the guidance and select

your destination via MirrorLinkTM,
CarPlay ® or Android Auto. Select a folder.
Select an image to view.
Press this button to display the

details of the photo.
.
Press the back arrow to go back
a level.
5
Managing messages Press one of the buttons for an Changing waveband

automatic search for radio stations.
Press Applications to display the Press Radio Media to display the
primary page. primary page.
Or
Press "SMS". Move the cursor for a manual search Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
for frequencies up or down. secondary page.
Press "Band" to change waveband.
Select the "SMS" tab. Or
Press the frequency.
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Press this button to select the
display settings for messages.
Enter the FM and AM waveband
values using the virtual keypad.
Press this button to search for
a contact. Presetting a station
Select a radio station or frequency.
Select the "Quick messages" tab. Make a short press on the star
Radio reception may be affected by the outline. If the star is solid, the radio
use of electrical equipment not approved station is already preset.
Press this button to select the by the Brand, such as a USB charger
display settings for messages. Or
connected to the 12 V socket.
The exterior environment (hills, buildings, Select a radio station or frequency.
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may
Press "Preset".
block reception, including in RDS mode.
Radio This is a normal effect of the way in Make a long press on one of the
which radio waves are transmitted and buttons to preset the station.
Selecting a station does not indicate any failure of the audio
equipment.
primary page.
6
Activating/Deactivating RDS Press Radio Media to display the Activate/Deactivate "TA".

primary page.
primary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press in the grey zone to confirm.
secondary page.
secondary page. Activate/Deactivate "News"/"Info".
Activate/Deactivate "RDS".
Press in the grey zone to confirm. Audio settings
Press in the grey area to confirm. primary page.
Play TA messages Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the

secondary page.
The RDS, if activated, enables you to continue The TA (Traffic Announcement) function Press "Audio settings".
listening to the same station by automatically gives priority to TA alert messages.
retuning to alternative frequencies. However, To operate, this function needs good
in certain conditions, coverage of this RDS reception of a radio station that carries
station may not be assured throughout the this type of message. While traffic Select the "Tone" or "Balance"
entire country as radio stations do not cover information is being broadcast, the current or "Ringtones" or "Sound" tab to
100% of the territory. This explains the loss of media is automatically interrupted so that configure the audio settings.
reception of the station during a journey. the TA message can be heard. Normal
play of the media previously playing is
resumed at the end of the message. Press the back arrow to confirm.
Display text information

The "Radio Text" function allows Press Radio Media to display the
information transmitted by the radio primary page.
.
station and related to the station or the
song playing to be displayed.
secondary page.
7
In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience audio DAB (Digital Audio FM-DAB Tracking
settings, as well as Bass, Medium and
Treble are different and independent for
Broadcasting) radio "DAB" does not cover 100% of the
each audio source. Terrestrial Digital Radio territory.
In the "Balance" tab, the All passengers, When the digital radio signal is poor,
Driver and Front only settings are the "FM-DAB Tracking" allows you to
Digital radio provides higher quality
common to all sources. continue listening to the same station,
reception.
In the "Sound" tab, activate or deactivate by automatically switching to the
The different "multiplexes" offer a choice
"Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary corresponding FM analogue station
of radio stations arranged in alphabetical
input" and "Touch tones". (if there is one).
order.

Press Radio Media to display the primary page.
The balance/distribution (or spatialisation primary page.
with the Arkamys© system) is audio Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
processing that allows the quality of the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page.
sound to be adapted according to the secondary page.
number of passengers in the vehicle. Activate/Deactivate "FM-DAB
Press "Band" to select the "DAB Tracking".
band".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Onboard audio: the Arkamys© Sound
Staging optimises the balance/distribution Press in the grey zone to confirm.
of sound in the passenger compartment.
If "FM-DAB Tracking" is activated, there

is a difference of a few seconds when the
system switches to FM analogue radio
with sometimes a variation in volume.
When the digital signal quality becomes
good, the system automatically switches
back to "DAB".
8
The playlists are updated every time the Selecting the source
If the "DAB" station being listened to is
ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick
not available on FM, or if the "FM-DAB
is connected. The lists are memorised: if they Press Radio Media to display the
Tracking" is not activated, the sound will
are not modified, the subsequent loading time primary page.
cut out while the digital signal is too weak.
will be shorter.
Press the "SOURCES" button.
Auxiliary socket (AUX) Choose the source.

Media
(depending on model/depending on equipment)
USB port Bluetooth® audio streaming
Streaming allows you to listen to music from
your smartphone.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated, first

adjust the volume on your portable device (to
a high level).
Then adjust the volume of your system.
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
If play does not start automatically, it may be
Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or has been checked in the audio settings.
necessary to start the audio playback from the
connect the USB device to the USB port using
Connect the portable device (MP3 player, etc.) smartphone.
a suitable cable (not supplied).
to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio Control is from the portable device or by using
cable (not supplied). the system's touch buttons.
To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub. First, adjust the volume on your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your Once connected in Streaming mode, the
audio system. smartphone is considered to be a media
The system builds playlists (in temporary
Display and management of the controls are source.
memory), an operation which can take from
via the portable device.
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
connection.
.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
9
Connecting Apple® players Information and advice It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters, without using special characters
Connect the Apple ® player to the USB port (e.g. " " ?.; ù) so as to avoid any reading or
The system supports USB Mass Storage
using a suitable cable (not supplied). display problems.
devices, BlackBerry ® devices or Apple ®
Play starts automatically.
players via USB ports. The adapter cable Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
Control is via the audio system. is not supplied. (File Allocation Table).
Device management is done by the audio
system controls.
It is recommended that the original USB
Other peripherals, not recognised on
The classifications available are those cable for the portable device be used.
connection, must be connected to the
of the portable device connected
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
(artists/albums/genres/playlists/
supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming, In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
audiobooks/podcasts), you can also use
depending on compatibility. CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or
a classification structured in the form of
Joliet if possible when burning the CD.
a library.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may
The default classification used is by artist.
not be played correctly.
To modify the classification used, return
It is recommended that the same burning
to the first level of the menu then select
standard be always used on an individual disc,
the desired classification (playlists for To protect the system, do not use a USB
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum)
example) and confirm to go down through hub.
for the best acoustic quality.
the menu to the desired track.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
The audio equipment will only play audio files Joliet standard is recommended.
with ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3"
file extensions and with a bit rate of between
The version of software in the audio system 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
may not be compatible with the generation of It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
your Apple ® player. No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
9 standard.
Sampling frequencies supported are 11, 22,
44 and 48 kHz.
10
When connecting a smartphone

Telephone As a safety measure, applications can
MirrorLinkTM smartphone that Bluetooth ® be started on the
display is interrupted once the vehicle is
smartphone.
connection moving.
As a safety measure and because it Telephone connected by

The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires
requires sustained attention by the driver, Bluetooth®
using a smartphone when driving is a compatible smartphone and
prohibited. applications. From the system, press
All operations must be done with the "Telephone" to display the primary
vehicle stationary. page.
Telephone not connected by
Bluetooth® Press the "PHONE" button to display the
The synchronisation of a personal secondary page.
smartphone allows users to display Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the
applications adapted for the smartphone's
connected by a USB cable. application in the system.
MirrorLinkTM technology on the vehicle
screen.
The processes and standards
"Telephone" to display the primary Once the connection is established, a page
are constantly changing. For the
page. is displayed with the applications already
communication process between the
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted
smartphone and the system to operate, Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the to MirrorLinkTM technology.
it is essential that the smartphone be application in the system.
unlocked; update the operating system Access to the different audio sources remains
of the smartphone as well as the date accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
and time of the smartphone and the display, using touch buttons in the upper bar.
necessary to activate the "MirrorLink™"
system. Access to the menus for the system is possible
function.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go at any time using the dedicated buttons.
to the Brand's internet website in your During the procedure, several
country. screen pages relating to certain
.
functions are displayed. There may be a wait for the availability of
Accept to start and complete the applications, depending on the quality of
connection. your network.
11
CarPlay® smartphone Or Android Auto smartphone

connection If the smartphone is already connection
connected by Bluetooth ®.
As a safety measure and because it As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the driver, requires sustained attention by the driver,
using a smartphone when driving is Connect a USB cable. The using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited. smartphone charges when prohibited.
All operations must be done with the connected by a USB cable. All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary. vehicle stationary.
"Telephone" to display the primary
The synchronisation of a personal page. On your smartphone, download the
smartphone allows users to display Android Auto application.
Press the "PHONE" button to go to the
applications compatible with the
secondary page.
smartphone's CarPlay ® technology on the
vehicle screen when the smartphone's
Press "CarPlay" to display the The synchronisation of a personal
CarPlay ® function has been previously
CarPlay ® interface. smartphone allows users to display
activated.
As the processes and standards are applications adapted for the smartphone's
constantly changing, it is recommended Android Auto technology on the vehicle
that you keep your smartphone's screen.
On connecting the USB cable, the The processes and standards
operating system updated.
CarPlay ® function deactivates the are constantly changing. For the
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
system's Bluetooth® mode. communication process between the
to the Brand's internet website in your
country. smartphone and the system to operate,
it is essential that the smartphone be
You can go to the CarPlay ® unlocked; update the operating system
Connect a USB cable. The navigation at any time by pressing of the smartphone as well as the date
smartphone charges when the system's Navigation button. and time of the smartphone and the
connected by a USB cable. system.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
From the system, press Telephone to the Brand's internet website in your
to display the CarPlay ® interface. country.
12
As a safety measure, applications can

When connecting a smartphone Pairing a Bluetooth®
that Bluetooth® be started on the
telephone
display is interrupted once the vehicle is
smartphone
moving. As a safety measure and because it
Telephone connected by driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
The "Android Auto" function requires the telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free
use of a compatible smartphone and
Bluetooth®
applications. From the system, press done with the vehicle stationary and the
"Telephone" to display the primary ignition on.
page.
Telephone not connected by
Bluetooth® Press the "PHONE" button to display the
secondary page. Activate the Bluetooth function on the
smartphone charges when telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
Press "Android Auto" to start the
connected by a USB cable. all" (telephone configuration).
application in the system.

"Telephone" to display the primary Procedure from the telephone
Different audio sources remain accessible in
page.
the margin of the Android Auto display, using Select the name of the system in the
touch buttons in the upper bar. list of devices detected.
Press "Android Auto" to start the Access to the menus for the system is possible
application in the system. at any time using the dedicated buttons.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the telephone.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
necessary to activate the "Android Auto"
function.
There may be a wait for the availability of To complete the pairing, whichever
During the procedure, several
applications, depending on the quality of procedure is used (from the telephone or
screen pages relating to certain
.
your network. from the system), ensure that the code
functions are displayed.
is the same in the system and in the
Accept to start and complete the
telephone.
connection.
13
Procedure from the system Automatic reconnection The ability of the system to connect to just
Press Telephone to display the To modify the connection profile: one profile depends on the telephone.
primary page. All three profiles may connect by default.
primary page.
Press "Bluetooth search".
The list of telephones detected is
Press the "PHONE" button to go to the The services available depend on
displayed.
secondary page. the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
Press "Bluetooth connection" to used. Check the instructions for your
Select the name of the chosen display the list of paired devices. telephone and with your service provider
telephone in the list.
for the services to which you have access.
Press the "details" button of a paired

If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended device.
The profiles compatible with the system
that you deactivate and then reactivate the are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
"Bluetooth" function in your telephone. MAP and PAN.
The system offers to connect the telephone
with 3 profiles:
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone Go to the Brand's website for more information
Depending on the type of telephone, you
only), (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
may be asked to accept or not the transfer
of your contacts and messages. - "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
the audio files on the telephone),
- "Internet data".
Managing paired telephones
On return to the vehicle, if the last
telephone connected is present again, it is Select one or more profiles.
This function allows the connection or
automatically recognised and within about disconnection of a peripheral device as
30 seconds of switching on the ignition, well as the deletion of a pairing.
the connection is established without any Press "OK" to confirm.
action on your part (Bluetooth activated).
primary page.
14
Press the "PHONE" button to go to the And Calling a contact

secondary page. Make a long press
Press "Bluetooth connection" to primary page.
display the list of paired devices.
on the steering mounted PHONE Or make a long press
button to reject the call.
Press on the name of the telephone
chosen in the list to disconnect it. Or
Press again to connect it. Press "End call". on the steering mounted PHONE
button.
Press "Contacts".
Deleting a telephone Making a call Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Press the basket at the top right Press "Call".

Using the telephone is not recommended
of the screen to display a basket
while driving.
alongside the telephone chosen.
Park the vehicle.
Make the call using the steering mounted
Press the basket alongside the
controls. Calling a recently used
telephone chosen to delete it. number
Calling a new number Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Receiving a call primary page. Or
An incoming call is announced by a ring and
Make a long press
a superimposed display in the screen. Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
.
Make a short press on the steering
mounted PHONE button to accept
Press "Call" to start the call. on the steering mounted button.
an incoming call.
15
Press "Recent calls". Press the back arrow again to

Settings confirm.
Profile settings
Press this button to initialise the
It is always possible to make a call directly As a safety measure and because it profile selected.
from the telephone; as a safety measure, requires the sustained attention of the
first park the vehicle. driver, changes to settings must only be
done with the vehicle stationary.
Adjust brightness
Press Settings to display the primary page.
Setting the ringtone primary page.
primary page. Press Brightness.
Press "Profiles".

secondary page. Move the cursor to adjust the brightness
Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3" of the screen and/or of the instrument
Press "Ring volume" to display the or "Common profile". panel (depending on version).
volume bar.
Press this button to enter a name for Press in the grey zone to confirm.
the profile using the virtual keypad.
Press the arrows or move the cursor
to set the ring volume.
Press "OK" to save.
Modifying system settings

Press the back arrow to confirm.
primary page.
Press this button to activate the
profile.
16
Press "Configuration" to go to the Press "Screen configuration". Press the back arrow to confirm.
secondary page.
Press "System configuration".

Press "Brightness".
Setting the time
Move the cursor to adjust the
brightness of the screen and/or of Press Settings to display the
Select "Units" to change the units of distance,
the instrument panel (depending on primary page.
fuel consumption and temperature.
version).
Press "Factory settings" to return to the initial
Press "Animation". Press "Configuration" to go to the
settings.
secondary page.
Activate or deactivate: "Automatic
scrolling".
Returning the system to factory settings
activates the English language by default Select "Animated transitions". Press "Date and time".
(depending on version).
Press the back arrow to confirm.

Select "System info" to display the versions of Select "Time".
the different modules installed in the system.
Press this button to adjust the time
using the virtual keypad.
Press the back arrow to confirm. Select the language
Press Settings to display the Press "OK" to save the time.
primary page.
primary page. Press "Configuration" to go to the Press this button to define the time
secondary page. zone.
Press "Configuration" to go to the
.
secondary page.
Select "Language" to change the Select the display format for the time
language. (12h/24h).
17
Activate or deactivate Press the back arrow to save the

synchronisation with GPS (UTC). date.
Press the back arrow to save the Select the display format of the date.
settings.
Press the back arrow again to

confirm.
The system does not automatically manage
the change between winter and summer
time (depending on the country of sale).
Adjustment of the time and date is only
available if "GPS Synchronisation" is
deactivated.
Setting the date The change between winter and summer
Press Settings to display the time is done by changing the time zone.
primary page.
Press "Configuration" to go to the

secondary page. Frequently asked
questions
Press "Date and time".
The following information groups together the
answers to the most frequently asked questions
concerning your audio system.
Select "Date".
Press on this button to define the
date.
18
Radio
The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are the station or no transmitter is present in the upper band to enable the system to check
not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, geographical area. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
etc.). the geographical area.
example when going through a car wash or into
an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The station is not received or has changed its Press the round arrow on the "List" tab of the
received stations. name in the list. "Radio" page.
The name of the radio station changes.
Some radio stations send other information
in place of their name (the title of the song for
example).
The system interprets these details as the
station name.
.
19
Media
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only Some files supplied with the memory stick Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). may greatly slow down access to reading and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the structure on the memory stick.
catalogue time).
Some information characters in the currently The audio system does not display some types Use standard characters to name tracks and
playing media are not displayed correctly. of characters. folders.
Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically Start playback from the device.
launch playback.
Names of tracks and playing time are not The Bluetooth profile does not allow the
displayed on the audio streaming screen. transfer of this information.
20
Telephone
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Check that your telephone has Bluetooth
switched off or the telephone may not be switched on.
visible. Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with You can check the compatibility of your
the system. telephone at the Brand's website (services).
The volume of the telephone connected in The sound depends on both the system and Increase the volume of the audio system, to
Bluetooth mode is inaudible. the telephone. maximum if required, and increase the volume
of the telephone if necessary.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
telephone call. reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, etc.).
The contacts are not listed in alphabetical Some telephones offer display options. Modify the telephone directory display settings.
order. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts
can be transferred in a specific order.
.
21
Settings
When changing the setting of treble and bass, The selection of an equalizer setting imposes Modify the treble and bass or equalizer settings
the equalizer setting is deselected. the settings for treble and bass and vice versa. to obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing the equalizer setting, the treble
and bass settings are reset.
When changing the balance setting, The selection of a distribution setting imposes Modify the balance setting or the distribution
distribution is deselected. the balance settings and vice versa. setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
When changing the distribution setting, the
balance setting is deselected.
There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the Check that the audio settings are adapted
the different audio sources. audio settings can be tailored to different to the sources listened to. Adjust the audio
sound sources, which can generate audible functions to the middle position.
differences when changing source.
When the engine is off, the system switches off When the engine is switched off, the system's Turn the ignition on to increase the charge of
after several minutes of use. operating time depends on the state of charge of the battery.
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system automatically
goes into energy economy mode and switches off
to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.
22
Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system The different functions and settings


ignition on.
Your audio system is coded in such a way

that it will only operate in your vehicle.
All work on the system must be
carried out exclusively by a dealer or a
Contents qualified workshop, to avoid any risk of
First steps 2 electrocution, fire or mechanical faults.
Steering mounted controls 2
Menus 4
Radio 4
DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting) 6 To avoid discharging the battery, the audio
Media 7 system may switch off after a few minutes
Telephone 10
if the engine is not running.
.
1
Select the screen display mode, Abandon the current operation.

First steps between: Go up one level (menu or folder).
Press: On/Off. Date; Audio functions; Trip
Rotate: adjust volume. computer; Telephone.
Access to the main menu.
Confirm or display contextual menu.
Short press: change audio source
(radio; USB; AUX (if equipment Activate/Deactivate TA (traffic
connected); CD; streaming). Buttons 1 to 6. announcements).
Long press: display the Telephone Short press: select the preset radio Long press: select type of
menu (if a telephone is connected). station. announcement.
Long press: preset a radio station.
Selection of FM/DAB/AM
wavebands.
Adjust audio settings: Radio:
Front/rear fader; left/right balance; Automatic step by step search up/
bass/treble; loudness; audio down for radio stations.
Steering mounted controls
ambience. Media:
Activation/Deactivation of automatic Select previous/next CD, USB,
Steering mounted
volume adjustment (linked to the streaming track. controls – Type 1
speed of the vehicle). Scroll in a list.
Radio:
Short press: display the list of radio Radio: Radio:
stations. Manual step by step search up/down Select the previous/next preset radio
Long press: update the list. for radio stations. station.
Media: Select previous/next MP3 folder. Select the previous/next item in
Short press: display the list of Media: a menu or a list.
folders. Select previous/next folder/genre/ Media:
Long press: display the available artist/playlist on the USB device. Select the previous/next track.
sorting options. Scroll in a list. Select the previous/next item in
a menu or a list.
2
Radio: Decrease volume. Other than telephone call:

Short press: display the list of radio Short press: changing audio source
stations. (radio; USB; AUX (if equipment
Long press: update the list. connected); CD; streaming),
Media: Mute/Restore sound by confirmation if the "Telephone"
Short press: display the list of simultaneously pressing the menu is open.
folders. increase and decrease volume Long press: open the "Telephone"
Long press: display the available buttons. menu.
sorting options. In the event of a telephone call:
Short press: accept the call.
Other than telephone call: Steering mounted controls Long press: reject the call.
During a telephone call:
Short press: changing audio source – Type 2 Short press: open the contextual
(radio; USB; AUX (if equipment
connected); CD; streaming), telephone menu.
confirmation if the "Telephone" Long press: end the call.
menu is open.
Long press: open the "Telephone"
menu. Access to the main menu.
In the event of a telephone call: Start voice recognition on your
Short press: accept the call. smartphone via the system.
Long press: reject the call. Increase volume.
During a telephone call:
Short press: open the contextual Radio:
Mute/Restore the sound.
telephone menu. Short press: display the list of radio
Long press: end the call. stations.
Long press: update the list.
Decrease volume. Media:
Confirm a selection. Short press: display the list of
folders.
Long press: display the available
.
sorting options.
Increase volume.
3
Radio: "Connections": Manage Press one of the buttons for an

Select the previous/next preset radio connections, search for devices. automatic search for radio stations.
station.
Select the previous/next item in
a menu or a list. "Personalisation-configuration": Press one of the buttons to carry out
Media: Define the vehicle parameters, a manual search up/down for radio
Select the previous/next track. Choice of language, Display frequencies.
Select the previous/next item in configuration, Choice of units, Date
a menu or a list. and time adjustment.
Press this button to display the list of
Press the thumbwheel: confirm.
stations received locally.
To update this list, press for more
Press the "MENU" button.
than two seconds. The sound is cut
while updating.
Menus Move from one menu to another.
Depending on version.
"Multimedia": Media settings, Radio Enter a menu.

settings. RDS
The exterior environment (hills, buildings,
"Telephone": Call, Directory tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may
management, Telephone Radio block reception, including in RDS mode.
management, Hang up. This is a normal effect of the way in
Selecting a station which radio waves are transmitted and
"Trip computer". Press the SOURCE button does not indicate any failure of the audio
repeatedly and select the radio. equipment.
"Maintenance": Diagnosis, Warning Press this button to select If RDS is not available, the RDS symbol
log, etc. a waveband (FM/AM/DAB). appears struck out in the screen.
4
Select "Frequency tracking Receiving INFO messages

The RDS, if activated, enables you to continue
(RDS)".
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies. However, The INFO function gives priority to TA
Press OK, RDS is displayed on the
in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS alert messages. To be active, this function
screen.
station may not be assured throughout the needs good reception of a radio station
entire country as radio stations do not cover that transmits this type of message. When
100% of the territory. This explains the loss of a message is transmitted, the current
reception of the station during a journey. Play TA messages audio source (Radio, CD, USB, etc.) is
interrupted automatically to receive the
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function INFO message. Normal play of the media
gives priority to TA alert messages. previously playing is resumed at the end
Short procedure
To operate, this function needs good of the message.
In "Radio" mode, press the OK button to reception of a radio station that carries
activate or deactivate RDS directly. this type of message. When a traffic
report is transmitted, the current audio
source (Radio, CD, etc.) is interrupted Make a long press on this button to
Long procedure automatically to play the TA message. display the list of categories.
Press the MENU button. Normal play of the media previously
playing is resumed at the end of the Select or deselect categories.
message.
Select "Audio functions".
Activate or deactivate the reception

Press OK. Take care when increasing the volume
of the corresponding messages.
while listening to TA messages. The
volume may prove too high on return to
Select the "FM waveband the original audio source.
preferences" function.
Display TEXT INFOS
Press the TA button to activate or Radio text is information transmitted by
Press OK.
deactivate traffic messages.
.
the radio station related to the station's
current programme or song.
5
When the radio station is displayed 3 Preset stations, buttons 1 to 6. Terrestrial digital radio
in the screen, press OK to display Short press: select the preset radio
the contextual menu. station.
Long press: memorise a radio station. Digital radio provides a superior audio
quality and also additional categories of
Select "RadioText (TXT) display" 4 Display the name of the "multiplex" service
traffic announcements (TA INFO).
and confirm OK to save. being used, also called "ensemble".
The different "multiplex/ensemble"
5 Display RadioText (TXT) for the current
services offer a choice of radio stations in
radio station.
alphabetical order.
6 Represents the signal strength for the
band being listened to.
DAB (Digital Audio
Broadcasting) radio Change of band (FM1, FM2,
When changing region, an update of the DAB, etc.)
Depending on version
list of preset radio stations is advisable.
Change of station within the same
If the current DAB radio station is not "multiplex/ensemble".
available on FM, "DAB FM" is struck out.
Starting of a search for the previous/
next "multiplex/ensemble".
Long press: selection of the

Display of the list of all radio stations categories of news desired among
and "multiplexes". Transport, News, Entertainment and
Special Flash (available depending
on the station).
When the radio station is displayed in

1 Options display: if active but not available, the screen, press "OK" to display the
the display will be struck out. contextual menu.
2 Display of the name of the current station. (Frequency search (RDS), DAB/FM
auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display,
Information on the station, etc.)
6
DAB/FM station tracking If the "DAB" station you are listening to Any additional equipment connected to
is not available on FM ("DAB/FM" option the system must conform to the standard
"DAB" does not have 100% coverage of struck out), or if "DAB/FM auto tracking" of the product or standard IEC 60950-1.
the country. is not on, the sound will be cut when the
When the digital signal is weak, "DAB/ digital signal is too weak.
FM auto tracking" allows you to
The system builds playlists (in temporary
continue listening to the same station,
memory), an operation which can take from
by automatically switching to the
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
corresponding analogue FM station (if it
exists).
Media connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
When the "DAB/FM auto tracking" is USB port number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
active, the DAB station will be selected
Playlists are updated every time a new USB
automatically.
memory stick is connected.
If "DAB/FM auto tracking" tracking is

enabled, there is a lag of a few seconds When the USB port is used, the portable
when the system switches to the analogue device charges automatically.
FM station sometimes with a change in
volume. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port
or connect the USB device to the USB port
using a suitable cable (not supplied). Play mode
Press the MENU button. The system changes automatically to "USB" The play modes available are:
source. - Normal: the tracks are played in order,
Select "Multimedia" and confirm. depending on the classification of the
To protect the system, do not use a USB selected files.
hub. - Random: the tracks in an album or folder
Select "DAB/FM auto tracking" and are played in a random order.
confirm. - Random on all media: all of the tracks
.
saved in the media are played in random
order.
7
- Repeat: the tracks played are only those Select by "Folder"/"Artist"/ Auxiliary socket (AUX)
from the current album or folder. "Genre"/"Playlist".
Depending on availability and type (depending on model/depending on equipment)
of device used.
Press this button to display the
contextual menu for the Media Press OK to select the desired
function. classification, then press OK again
to confirm.
Press this button to select the
chosen play mode.
Playing files
Make a short press on this button to Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) to
Press this button to confirm. display the chosen classification. the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
(not supplied).
Navigate in the list using the left/

The choice made is displayed at the top of the
right and up/down buttons. Any additional equipment connected to
screen.
the system must conform to the standard
of the product or standard IEC 60950-1.
Choosing a track to play Confirm the selection by pressing
Press one of these buttons to go to OK.
the previous/next track. Press the SOURCE button several
Press one of these buttons to go to
the previous/next track in the list. times in succession and select
Press and hold one of these buttons "AUX".
Press one of these buttons to go to
for fast forward or rewind.
the previous/next folder. First adjust the volume on your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
audio system. Display and management of the
Press one of these buttons controls are via the portable device.
File classification to go to the previous/next
Make a long press on this button to "Folder"/"Artist"/"Genre"/"Playlist"* Do not connect a device to both the
display the different classifications. in the list. auxiliary Jack socket and the USB port at
* Depending on availability and the type of the same time.
device used.
8
CD player Playing an MP3 compilation Press the LIST button to display

the list of directories of the
Insert circular compact discs only. Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player. MP3 compilation.
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs The audio equipment searches for all of the
or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may music tracks, which may take anything between Press and hold one of these buttons
cause faults which are not related to the quality a few seconds and several tens of seconds, for fast forward or rewind.
of the original player. before playback begins.
Insert a CD in the player, playback begins
automatically.
Bluetooth® audio streaming
Streaming allows music files on the telephone
On a single disc, the CD player can to be played via the vehicle's loudspeakers.
read up to 255 MP3 files spread over
External CD players connected via the 8 directory levels.
USB port are not recognised by the However, it is advisable to keep to a limit Connect the telephone.
system. of two levels to reduce the access time (Refer to the "Pairing a Bluetooth ®
before the CD is played. telephone" section).
The folder structure is not observed during Activate the streaming source by
To play a disc which has already
playback. pressing SOURCE.
been inserted, press the SOURCE
All of the files are displayed on a single In certain cases, play of the audio
button several times in succession
level. files must be initiated from the
and select "CD".
keypad.
Press one of the buttons to select To play a disc which has already
Audio files can be selected using the buttons
a track on the CD. been inserted, press the SOURCE
on the audio system control panel and the
button several times in succession
steering mounted controls. The contextual
Press the LIST button to display the and select "CD".
information can be displayed in the screen.
list of tracks on the CD. If the telephone supports the function. The
Press one of the buttons to select
a folder on the CD. audio quality depends on the quality of
Press and hold one of these buttons transmission by the telephone.
.
for fast forward or rewind.
Press one of the buttons to select
a track on the CD.
9
Connecting Apple® players No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
It is recommended that you use genuine
Apple ® USB cables for correct operation.
Connect the Apple ® player to the USB port 9 standard.
using a suitable cable (not supplied). The sampling rates supported are 11, 22,
Play starts automatically. 44 and 48 kHz.
Control is via the audio system.

File names should have fewer than
The classifications available are those of the
20 characters, avoiding special characters Telephone
(e.g. " ?; ù) so as to avoid any reading or
portable device connected (artists/albums/
genres/playlists).
display problems. Pairing a Bluetooth®
telephone
The version of software in the audio system In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
may not be compatible with the generation of CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2, or As a safety measure and because they
your Apple ® player. Joliet, if possible, when burning the CD. require prolonged attention on the part
If the disc is burned in another format, it may of the driver, the operations for pairing
not be played correctly. of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with
Information and advice It is recommended that the same burning the Bluetooth hands-free system of your
standard be always used on an individual disc, audio system must be carried out with the
The CD player can play files with ".mp3",
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
".wma", ".wav" and ".aac" file extensions, with
a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps. for the best acoustic quality.
It also supports TAG mode (ID3 tag, WMA In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
TAG). Joliet standard is recommended.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth
No other file types (".mp"4, etc.) can be read.
To protect the system, do not use a USB hub. function and ensure that it is "visible to all"
(telephone configuration).
9 standard.
The sampling rates supported are 11, 22,
44 and 48 kHz. The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
Via the USB port, the system can play audio
compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone
files with the extension ".mp3", ".wma", ".wav",
Use only USB memory sticks formatted used.
".cbr", ".vbr" with a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps.
FAT 32 (File Allocation Table). Check the instructions for your telephone
and with your service provider for the
services to which you have access.
10
Procedure from the telephone Completing the pairing Manage connections

Select the name of the system in the
To complete the pairing, whichever The telephone connection automatically
list of devices detected.
procedure is used (from the telephone or includes hands free operation and audio
from the system), ensure that the code streaming.
is the same in the system and in the The ability of the system to connect to just
Procedure from the system telephone. one profile depends on the telephone.
Both profiles may connect by default.
Press the MENU button.
If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not
restricted.
Select "Connections". A message appears in the screen confirming Press the MENU button.
the pairing.
Select "Connections".
Confirm with OK. Information and advice
The "Telephone" menu gives access to the
Confirm with OK.
following functions in particular: "Directory", if
Select "Search for a device".
your telephone equipment is fully compatible,
"Call log", "View paired devices". Select "Connections
Depending on the type of telephone, you may management" and confirm. The list
be asked to accept or confirm access by the of paired devices is displayed.
Confirm with OK.
system to each of these functions.
Confirm with OK.
A window is displayed with a search in progress Go to the Brand's website for more
message. Indicates that a device is connected.
information (compatibility, more help, etc.).
In the list of devices detected, select

a telephone to pair. Only one telephone can be
paired at a time. A number indicates the profile of the
.
connection with the system:
- 1 for media or 1 for telephone.
- 2 for media and telephone.
11
Indicates connection of the audio Or

When you delete a pairing in the system,
steaming profile.
remember to delete it from your telephone Select "Calls list".
as well. Confirm with OK.
Indicates the hands-free telephone
profile. Confirm with OK.
Press this button for more than
two seconds for access to your
Select a telephone. directory, then navigate using the
Receiving a call thumb wheel.
An incoming call is announced by a ring and
Confirm with OK. a superimposed display in the screen.
Ending a call
In the "Telephone" menu.
Then select and confirm: Select the "YES" tab in the screen
using the buttons. Select "End call".
- "Connect telephone"/
"Disconnect telephone": Confirm with OK to end the call.
Confirm with OK.
to connect/disconnect the
telephone or the hands-free kit During a call, press one of these
only. buttons for more than two seconds.
Press this button at the steering
- "Connect media player"/ mounted controls to accept the call.
"Disconnect media player":
to connect/disconnect streaming
The system accesses the telephone's contacts
only.
directory, depending on its compatibility, and
- "Connect telephone + media Making a call while it is connected via Bluetooth.
player"/"Disconnect telephone
+ media player": In the "Telephone" menu.
to connect/disconnect the
Select "Call".
telephone (hands-free kit and
streaming). Select "Dial".
- "Delete connection": to delete Or
the pairing.
Select "Directory".
12
In the contextual menu: Interactive voice response

With certain telephones connected by
- select "Micro OFF" to switch off
Bluetooth you can send a contact to the From the contextual menu, select
the microphone.
directory of the audio system. "DTMF tones" and confirm to use
- deselect "Micro OFF" to switch
Contacts imported in this way are saved the digital keypad to navigate in the
the microphone on.
in a permanent directory visible to all, interactive voice response menu.
whatever the telephone connected. Confirm with OK.
The menu for the directory is not
accessible if it is empty. Confirm with OK.
Telephone mode
Consultation call
In the contextual menu:
Managing calls - select "Telephone mode" to From the contextual menu, select
transfer the call to the telephone "Switch" and validate to return to
During a call, press OK to display
(for example, to leave the vehicle a call left on hold.
the contextual menu.
while continuing a conversation).
- deselect "Telephone mode" to
Confirm with OK.
transfer the call to the vehicle.
End call
In the contextual menu, select
"Hang up" to end the call. Directory
Confirm with OK.
To access the directory, press and
Confirm with OK. hold SRC/TEL.
If the contact has been cut off, when you
reconnect on returning to the vehicle,
the Bluetooth connection will be restored Select "Directory" to see the list of
automatically and sound returned to the contacts.
Microphone off
system (depending on the compatibility of the
(so that the caller cannot hear) telephone). Confirm with OK.
.
In some cases, the Telephone mode must be
activated from the telephone.
13
To modify the contacts saved in the To start voice recognition, depending on the
system, press MENU then select type of steering mounted controls:
"Telephone" and confirm.
Make a long press on the end of the lighting
Select "Directory management"
control stalk.
and confirm.
You can: OR
- "Consult an entry",
Press this button.
- "Delete an entry",
- "Delete all entries".
The system accesses the Voice recognition requires the use of

telephone's contacts directory, a compatible smartphone first connected
depending on its compatibility, and to the vehicle by Bluetooth.
while it is connected via Bluetooth.
With certain telephones connected

by Bluetooth you can send a contact Frequently asked
to the directory of the audio system. questions
Contacts imported in this way are
saved in a permanent directory The following information groups together the
visible to all, whatever the telephone answers to the most frequently asked questions
connected. concerning your audio system.
The menu for the directory is not
accessible if it is empty.
Voice recognition
This function allows you to use your
smartphone's voice recognition via the system.
14
With the engine off, the audio system switches When the engine is switched off, the audio Turn the ignition on to increase the charge of
off after a few minutes of use. system operating time depends on the state of the battery.
charge of the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the audio system
switches to economy mode and switches off to
prevent discharging the vehicle's battery.
The message "the audio system is overheated" In order to protect the installation if the Switch the audio system off for a few minutes
appears on the display. surrounding temperature is too high, the audio to allow the system to cool.
system switches to an automatic thermal
protection mode leading to a reduction in
volume or the CD play stopping.
Radio
There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the audio Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
the different audio sources (radio, CD, etc.). settings (Volume, Bass, treble, Ambience, Treble, Ambience and Loudness) are adapted
Loudness) can be tailored to different to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
sound sources, which can generate audible the audio functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
differences when changing source (radio, CD, Balance and Left-Right Balance) to the middle
etc.). position, select the musical ambience "None"
and set the loudness correction to the "Active"
position in CD mode or to the "Inactive"
.
position in radio mode.
15
The preset stations do not function (no sound, An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND button to return to the
87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.). waveband (FM, FM2, DAB, AM) on which the
stations are preset.
The traffic announcement (TA) is displayed. The radio station is not part of the regional Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
I do not receive any traffic information. traffic information network. information.
The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the RDS function to allow the system
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are the station or no transmitter is present in the to see if a more powerful transmitter is within
not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, geographical area. the geographic area.
etc.).
example when going through an automatic car
wash or in an underground car park).
Sound cut-outs of 1 to 2 seconds in radio During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS Switch off the RDS function if the phenomenon
mode. searches for another frequency giving better is too frequent and always on the same route.
reception of the station.
16
Media
The Bluetooth connection is cut. The battery of the peripheral device may not be Charge the battery of the peripheral device.
sufficiently charged.
The message "USB device error" is displayed The USB memory stick is not recognised. Reformat the USB memory stick.
in the screen. The USB memory stick may be corrupt.
The CD is ejected every time or is not played. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does - Check that the CD is inserted in the player
not contain audio files or contains audio files of the right way up.
a format not recognised by the audio system. - Check the condition of the CD: the CD
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system cannot be played if it is too badly damaged.
not recognised by the audio system. - Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio"
section.
- Due to insufficient quality, certain burned
CDs will not be read by the audio system.
The CD sound is of poor quality. The CD used in scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are Return bass and treble settings to 0, without
unsuitable. selecting an ambience.
I am unable to play the music files on my Depending on the smartphone, access by the Manual activate the MTP profile on the
smartphone via the USB port. audio system to music on the smartphone may smartphone (USB settings menu).
have to be approved on the latter.
.
17
Telephone
I am unable to access my voicemail. Few telephones or service providers allow the Call the voicemail, via the telephone menu,
use of this function. using the number provided by your operator.
I am unable to access my directory of contacts. Check the compatibility of your telephone.
You did not give access to your contacts when Accept or confirm access by the system to the
pairing the telephone. contacts on your telephone.
I am unable to continue a conversation when Telephone mode is activated. Deselect telephone mode to transfer the call to
getting into my vehicle. the vehicle.
I am unable to pair my telephone by Bluetooth. Telephones (models, versions of operating Before starting the pairing procedure, delete
systems) have their own specific aspects in the the pairing of the telephone from the system
pairing procedure and some telephones are not and of the system from the telephone, so as to
compatible. see the compatibility of the telephones.
18
Alphabetical index
180° rear vision...................................... 209-210 Assistance, emergency braking............125, 194 CD...................................................... 23-24, 9, 9
Audio streaming (Bluetooth)....................24, 9, 9 CD, MP3............................................. 23-24, 9, 9
Central locking...........................................49, 55
A Changing a bulb............................. 252, 255-256
Changing a fuse............................. 257-258, 261
Accessories...........................................122, 160
Changing a wheel................... 241-243, 246-248
Active Safety Brake..................... 16-17, 192-195
AdBlue ®..............................................20, 32, 237 B Changing a wiper blade.........................120, 257
Changing the remote control battery...............54
Additive, Diesel..............................................235 Backrest, folding.........................................70-71
Adjusting headlamps..................................... 114 Battery...................... 13, 227, 235, 262, 264-265 Charger, induction...................................101-102
Adjusting head restraints................................. 71 Battery charge (warning lamp)........................ 13 Charger, wireless....................................101-102
Adjusting seats.................................69-71, 77-78 Battery, charging.................................... 263-264 Checking the engine oil level...........................31
Adjusting the air distribution...................... 89-92 Battery, remote control..............................52, 54 Checking the levels............................... 232, 234
Adjusting the air flow.................................. 89-92 Blind.................................................................64 Checking tyre pressures
Adjusting the date.......................... 38-40, 31, 18 Blind spot monitoring system........... 24, 203-205 (using the kit).......................................243, 245
Adjusting the height and reach Blind spot monitoring system, active.......24, 205 Checks....................................231-232, 235-237
of the steering wheel..................................... 74 Blind spot sensors........................... 24, 203-204 Child lock.................................................153-154
Adjusting the lumbar support..................... 69-71 Blinds, side.....................................................107 Children.................................. 144, 146-148, 150
Adjusting the seat belt height.................130-131 BlueHDi......................................32, 35, 237, 240 Children (safety)......................................153-154
Adjusting the temperature......................... 89-92 Bluetooth (hands-free)......... 25-26, 13-14, 10-11 Child seats .............133, 138-139, 142, 144, 152
Adjusting the time.......................... 38-40, 31, 17 Bluetooth (telephone).......................25-27, 13-15 Child seats, conventional.......................142, 144
Advanced Grip Control...........................128-129 Bonnet.................................................... 230-231 Child seats, i-Size..........................................150
Advice on driving....................................155-156 Boot.............................................. 59-60, 62, 110 Child seats, ISOFIX........................146-148, 150
Airbags.............................................18, 134, 139 Boot (fittings)..................................................108 Cigarette lighter.............................................100
Airbags, curtain.......................................135-137 Brake discs............................................. 236-237 Closing the boot................................... 47, 50, 59
Airbags, front..................................134-135, 137 Brake lamps...................................................255 Closing the doors........................... 47, 49-50, 59
Airbags, lateral.......................................135, 137 Brakes......................................... 14-15, 236-237 Configurations, seats.......................................82
Air conditioning.......................................... 86-88 Braking assistance system............................125 Configuration, vehicle.......................... 38-42, 44
Air conditioning, automatic..............................85 Braking, automatic emergency.... 16-17, 192-195 Connection, Bluetooth.........19, 25-27, 13-15, 11
Air conditioning, dual-zone automatic.......89, 93 Braking, emergency.......................................164 Connection, MirrorLink..........................17, 11-12
Air conditioning, manual................ 85-86, 92-93 Brightness........................................................16 Connection, Wi-Fi network..............................20
Air conditioning, mono-zone................ 87-88, 93 Bulbs..............................................................252 Connectivity...................................................101
Air intake.................................................... 89-92 Bulbs (changing)............................ 252, 255-256 Container, AdBlue ®........................................238
Air vents...........................................................84 Control, emergency door.................................52
Alarm................................................................56 Control, heated seats.......................................73
Amplifier, audio..............................................101 Controls, steering mounted................... 165-169
C
.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)............... 15, 125 Control stalk, lighting.................. 25-26, 111, 113
Apple CarPlay connection.........................16, 12 Control stalk, wipers............................... 119-121
Cable, audio.................................................23, 9
Armrest, front..........................................102-103 Courtesy lamps...................................... 104-105
Cable, Jack..................................................23, 9
Assistance call........................................123-124 Cruise control.... 175-176, 178, 181-187, 191-192
Capacity, fuel tank.........................................220
Cruise control by speed limit recognition...... 178
Cartridge, fragrance.............................. 103-104
275
Alphabetical index
E
Cruise control, adaptive with Economy mode..............................................227 Fusebox, engine compartment......................261
Stop function.................. 178, 184-187, 191-192 Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)....125 Fuses.............................................. 257-258, 261
Cup holder........................................................99 Electronic stability control (ESC)...................125
Customisation....................................................9 Emergency braking assistance (EBA)...........125
Emergency call.......................................123-124
Emergency switching off.........................160-161 G
D Emissions control system, SCR....................237
Energy economy mode..................................227
Engine compartment..............................231-232
Gauge, fuel....................................................220
Gearbox, automatic............... 165-173, 236, 263
DAB (Digital Audio Gearbox, manual............ 164-165, 169-173, 236
Broadcasting) – Digital radio............. 22, 8, 6-7 Engine, Diesel........ 222, 231-232, 240, 269, 271 Gear lever, automatic gearbox.............. 165-169
Date (setting).................................. 38-40, 31, 18 Engine oil pressure..........................................12 Gear lever, manual gearbox.................. 164-165
Daytime running lamps...................112, 252-253 Engine, petrol................................ 222, 232, 268 Gear shift indicator ~ Gear
Deactivating the passenger airbag....134-135, 139 Engines...........................................267-269, 271 efficiency indicator............................... 170-171
Deadlocking............................................... 47, 50 Environment.....................................................52 Glove box.......................................................100
Defrosting.........................................................93 GPS..................................................................12
Defrosting, front...............................................93 Grab handles...................................................99
Demisting.........................................................93
Demisting, front................................................93
Demisting, rear.................................................94 F H
Dials and gauges...............................................8 Fatigue detection....................................196-197 Hands-free access...........................................61
Dimensions....................................................272 Filling the AdBlue ® tank.................................238 Hands-free tailgate.................................... 60-62
Dipstick............................................. 31, 233-234 Filling the fuel tank................................. 220-222 Hazard warning lamps...........................123, 240
Direction indicators................................. 25, 113, Filter, air.........................................................235 Headlamp adjustment.................................... 114
. 252-253, 255-256 Filter, oil..........................................................235 Headlamps, automatic dipping......... 26, 116-118
Display screen, instrument panel........... 170-171 Filter, particle......................................... 234-235 Headlamps,
Distance Alert ~ Collision Risk Alert......192-193 Filter, passenger compartment......................235 automatic illumination....................111, 114-115
Door pockets....................................................99 Fitting a wheel........................................ 249-251 Headlamps, dipped beam...........25-26, 252-254
Doors................................................................58 Fitting roof bars...................................... 229-230 Headlamps, halogen.......................114, 252-253
Doors, rear..............................................153-154 Fittings, boot..................................................108 Headlamps, main beam................... 26, 252-254
Driver's attention warning..............................197 Fittings, interior........................................ 99-100 Head restraints, front....................................... 71
Driving........................................................ 68-69 Fittings, rear...................................................106 Head restraints, rear..................................76, 81
Driving abroad............................................... 112 Flap, fuel filler......................................... 220-221 Heating...........................................84, 86-88, 92
Driving positions (storing)...........................72-73 Floor, concertina..............................................80 Heating, additional...........................................94
Driving time warning......................................196 Foglamps....................................................... 111 Heating, programmable...................................94
Dynamic pack................................................ 170 Foglamps, front.................25, 112, 118, 252-254 Hi-Fi system...................................................101
Dynamic stability control (DSC)..............125-129 Foglamps, rear....................................... 112, 256 Hill Assist Descent Control
Folding the rear seats................................ 76-78 (HADC)...........................................24, 129-130
Frequency (radio)........................................21-22 Hill start assist.........................................169-170
Fuel................................................................222 Horn...............................................................123
Fuel tank................................................ 220-221
276
Alphabetical index
I
i-Cockpit amplify function.... 74, 83-84, 103, 170 Lamps, rear....................................................255 Menu, main........................................................4
Ignition..............................................158, 160, 28 Lane Departure Warning Menus (audio).........................................3-5, 4-5
Ignition on......................................................160 System (LDWS), Active..........17, 198-199, 205 Messages.........................................................28
Immobiliser, electronic.............................52, 156 Lane Departure Warning Messages, quick..............................................28
Indicator, AdBlue ® range..................................32 System (LDWS)..................................... 17, 198 Mirror, rear view......................................... 75-76
Indicator, coolant temperature.........................32 LEDs – Light-emitting Mirrors, door.........................74-75, 94, 203-204
Indicator, engine oil level...........................31, 35 diodes...................................112, 252-253, 255 Mirror, vanity....................................................99
Indicator lamps, operation......................... 11, 15 Level, brake fluid............................................234 Misfuel prevention..........................................221
Indicators, direction............................... 113, 253 Level, Diesel additive............................. 234-235 Modularity, seats..............................................82
Inflating tyres.................................................236 Level, engine coolant...............................32, 234 Motorised tailgate...................................... 60-62
Inflating tyres (using the kit)...................243, 245 Level, engine oil............................... 31, 233-234 Mountings, ISOFIX........................................146
Instrument panel.................................8-9, 35-37 Levels and checks......................... 231-232, 234 MP3 CD..............................................................9
Intelligent Traction Control.............................126 Level, screenwash fluid.........................120, 234
Internet browser...............................................16 Light-emitting diodes –
ISOFIX........................................................... 147
ISOFIX mountings.........................................146
LEDs.....................................112, 252-253, 255
Lighting.............................................................26
N
Net.......................................................... 108-109
Lighting, cornering......................................... 118 Net, high load retaining...........................109-110
Lighting dimmer...............................................36 Number plate lamps.......................................256
Lighting, exterior............................................ 111
J Lighting, guide-me home.................. 48, 115-116
Jack...................................... 242, 246-248, 23, 9
Jump starting.................................................262
Lighting, interior..................................... 104-105
Lighting, mood.........................................36, 105
O
Lighting, welcome.......................................... 115 Obstacle detection.........................................205
Loading................................... 109-110, 229-230 Oil change.............................................. 233-234
K Load reduction mode.....................................227
Locating your vehicle.......................................48
Oil consumption..................................... 233-234
Oil, engine........................................ 12, 233-234
Key.............................................................46, 52 On-board tools........................................241-243
Key, electronic............................................ 49-50 Locking................................................. 47, 50, 52
Locking from the inside....................................55 Opening the bonnet............................... 230-231
Keyless Entry and Opening the boot.......................................49, 59
Starting...............................49-50, 52, 158-159 Locking the doors............................................60
Low fuel level.................................................220 Opening the doors.....................................49, 58
Key not recognised.................................160-161 Opening the fuel filler flap..............................220
Key with remote control.................................156 Opening the windows......................................46
Kit, hands-free..................... 25-26, 13-14, 10-11
Kit, temporary puncture repair........241-243, 245 M
Map reading lamps................................ 104-105
Markings, identification..................................273
P
Pads, brake............................................ 236-237
.
L Massage function ............................................ 74
Massage, multi-point....................................... 74 Paint...............................................................273
Paint colour code...........................................273
Labels, identification......................................273 Mat.................................................................104
Memorising a speed...............................175-176 Parcel shelf, rear............................................107
Lamp, boot..................................................... 110 Park Assist..............................................212-213
Lamps, parking.............................................. 113 Menu................................................................12
277
Alphabetical index
Parking brake......................................... 236-237 Removing the mat..........................................104 Service indicator........................................29, 35

Parking brake, electric................ 14, 27, 161-164 Replacing bulbs............................. 252, 255-256 Servicing..........................................................29
Parking sensors, audible and visual..............205 Replacing fuses......................................257-258 Settings, equipment............................. 38-42, 44
Parking sensors, front....................................206 Replacing the air filter....................................235 Settings, system.........................................30, 16
Parking sensors, rear....................................205 Replacing the oil filter....................................235 Sidelamps........................112-113, 252-253, 255
PEUGEOT Connect Nav....................................1 Replacing the passenger Side repeater.................................................254
PEUGEOT Connect Radio................................1 compartment filter.......................................235 Snow chains................................... 174, 228-229
Plates, identification......................................273 Reservoir, screenwash..................................234 Snow screen..................................................228
Player, Apple ®......................................24, 10, 10 Resetting the service indicator........................31 Socket, 12 V accessory................. 100, 107, 110
Player, MP3 CD............................................23, 9 Resetting the trip recorder......................... 35-36 Socket, 230 V.................................................106
Player, USB......................................100, 23, 9, 7 Reset trip..........................................................37 Socket, auxiliary.......................................23, 9, 8
Port, USB..................................100-101, 23, 9, 7 Rev counter........................................................8 Socket, Jack.............................................23, 9, 8
Pre-heater, Diesel............................................23 Reversing camera..........................................209 Speakers........................................................101
Pressures, tyres.....................................236, 246 Reversing lamps.................................... 255-256 Speed limiter............................175-176, 178-181
Pre-tensioning seat belts...............................133 Roof bars................................................ 229-230 Speed limit recognition...........................176-177
Priming the fuel system......................... 240-241 Running out of fuel (Diesel)................... 240-241 Speedometer.....................................................8
Profiles.......................................................30, 16 Stability control (ESC).................... 125, 127-129
Protecting children................. 134-135, 138-139, Starting a Diesel engine................................222
142, 144, 146-148, 150
Puncture.................................................243, 245
S Starting the engine........................................156
Starting the vehicle........... 27, 155-159, 165-169
Safety, children...................... 134-135, 138-139,
142, 144, 146-148, 150 Starting using another battery........160-161, 262
Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel)..........235 Station, radio...................................... 21-22, 6, 4
Stay, bonnet........................................... 230-231
R Scented air freshener............................ 103-104
Screen menu map............................................ 12 Steering mounted controls, audio......... 3, 3, 2-3
Steering wheel, adjustment............................. 74
Radio.......................................... 21, 24, 6, 9, 4-5 Screen, monochrome................................ 38-40
Radio, digital (Digital Audio Screen, multifunction (with audio system).........4 Stopping the vehicle......... 27, 155-159, 165-169
Broadcasting – DAB).............................22, 8, 6 Screens, very cold conditions ......................228 Stop & Start.............................23-24, 38, 86, 93,
Range, AdBlue........................................... 32-34 Screenwash, front..........................................120 171-173, 220, 230, 235, 265
RDS.........................................................21-22, 7 Screenwash, rear....................................119-120 Storage...................................... 99-100, 102-103
Rear air blower.................................................92 SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction).............237 Storage boxes................................................108
Rear screen, demisting....................................94 Seat belts........................................130-133, 142 Storage compartments....................................99
Recharging the battery.......................... 263-264 Seat belts, rear............................................... 131 Storing driving positions.............................72-73
Reduction of electrical load...........................227 Seats, additional........................................ 79-82 Sunroof, panoramic.........................................64
Regeneration of the particle filter..................235 Seats, electric.............................................72-73 Sun visor..........................................................99
Reinitialisation of the under- Seats, front............................................69, 72-73 Switching off the engine................................156
inflation detection system............................ 175 Seats, heated...................................................73 Synchronising the remote control....................54
Reinitialising the remote control......................54 Seats, rear.................................................. 76-82
Reminder, key in ignition................................158 Selector, gear......................................... 165-169
Remote control..........................46-47, 49-50, 52 Serial number, vehicle...................................273
Removing a wheel................................. 249-251
278
Alphabetical index
T U
Table position..............................................70-71 Under-inflation (detection)............................. 174
Tables, aircraft...............................................107 Unlocking...................................................46, 49
Tables of fuses...............................................261 Unlocking from the inside................................55
Tailgate.............................................................59 Unlocking the boot..................................... 48-49
Tank, fuel................................................ 220-221 Unlocking the doors.........................................60
Technical data................................ 268-269, 271 Unlocking the tailgate................................ 48-49
Telephone....... 101-102, 25-29, 13-16, 10-11, 13 Updating the date....................................... 31, 18
Telephone, Bluetooth Updating the time....................................... 31, 17
with voice recognition....................................14 USB.................................................... 23-24, 9, 7
Temperature, coolant.......................................32
Third brake lamp............................................256
Three flashes (direction indicators)............... 113
Ticket holder....................................................99
V
Ventilation............................................84-88, 92
Time (setting)................................. 38-40, 31, 17 Very cold climate screen (snow shield).........228
TMC (Traffic info).............................................13 Visibility............................................................93
Tools........................................ 241-243, 246-248 Vision, 180° forward......................................210
Total distance recorder.............................. 35-36 Visiopark........................................................207
Touch screen......................................... 101, 1, 1 Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2................................210
Touch screen ~ Touch screen Voice commands..........................................5-10
tablet..................................................40, 42, 44
Towball, quickly detachable................... 224-227
Towbar.....................................127, 155-156, 223
Towed loads....................................267-269, 271
W
Warning and indicator lamps........................... 11
Towing another vehicle.......................... 265-266 Warning lamp, braking system...................14-15
Traction control (ASR)............................125-129 Warning lamp, Diesel engine pre-heater........23
Traffic information (TA)......................................5 Warning lamp, driver's seat
Traffic information (TMC).................................13 belt not fastened..........................................132
Trailer......................................127, 155-156, 223 Warning lamps..................................... 11, 14, 35
Trailer stability assist (TSA)...........................127 Warning lamp, seat belts...............................132
Trajectory control systems.............................125 Warning lamp, Service....................................16
Triangle, warning...........................................240 Weights...........................................267-269, 271
Trip computer..............................................37-38 Welcome lighting..................................... 48, 116
Trip distance recorder................................ 35-36 Wheel, spare...................236, 241-243, 246-249
Tyres...............................................................236 Window controls..............................................63
Tyre under-inflation detection.......... 18, 174, 246 Windscreen, heated................................... 93-94
.
Wiper blades (changing)........................120, 257
Wiper, rear.............................................. 119-120
Wipers.............................................. 24, 119, 121
Wipers, automatic rain sensitive............ 119, 121
279
Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, by application Reproduction or translation of all or part of
of the provisions of the European legislation this document is prohibited without written
(Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.
Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by
this legislation and that recycled materials are
used in the manufacture of the products that it
sells.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
10-17
www.peugeot.com *17P87.0040* ANG. 17P87.0040

2018 Peugeot 5008 112691 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2018 Peugeot 5008 112691 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2018 Peugeot 5008 112691 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HANDBOOK

Left-hand drive vehicle

Right-hand drive vehicle

Overview . Ease of use and comfort Lighting and visibility

Instruments and controls

1. External lighting/Direction indicators

Optimise the use of your Drive smoothly

Limit the causes of excess Observe the recommendations

At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only

6. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm).

- "MINIMAL": minimal display with digital

* Versions with monochrome screen.

F Press the "Dashboard

As a safety measure, these adjustments

F For each customised display area, left and

Warning and indicator lamps

Certain warning lamps may come on in one

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Action/Observations

Red warning/indicator lamps

The battery charging circuit has

The warning lamp should go off when the engine is

Fixed, associated with Speed above 6 mph (10 km/h), a

* Depending on the country of sale.

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Action/Observations

Warning/indicator lamp State

Orange warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Action/Observations

The system has been

For more information on the Distance Alert/Active

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Action/Observations

Fixed, in the seat belt

The control switch, located in the

In this case, do not install a rearward facing child seat

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Action/Observations

Switched on for around

The remaining driving range

Top up the AdBlue ®.

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Action/Observations

When the ignition is switched on

The period of illumination of the indicator lamp is

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Action/Observations

Green warning/indicator lamps

Fixed. The function has been activated, but

The front foglamps have been

Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk once

Left-hand Flashing with audible The lighting control stalk has

Right-hand Flashing with audible The lighting control stalk has

Sidelamps Fixed. The lighting control stalk is in the

Dipped beam Fixed. The lighting control stalk is in

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Action/Observations

Blue warning/indicator lamps

Electric parking brake Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Action/Observations

Resetting the service indicator

The level read will only be correct if the

F Press the trip distance recorder reset

AdBlue® range indicators

Remaining range between 500 and 60 miles

When switching on the ignition, this warning

Locating your vehicle Selective unlocking and eyless Entry and

Locking eyless Entry and Starting